B. 
 
 LAV . 
 
 THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 LOS ANGELES 
 
.aB5; 
 
 LA 
 
ENTERED, ACCORDING TO ACT OF CONGRESS, IN THE TEAR 1861, BY 
 
 ANDREW J. GRAHAM, 
 
 is THE CLERK'S OFFICE OF THE DISTRICT COURT OF THE UNITED STATES 
 FOR THE SOUTHERN DISTRICT OF NEW YORK. 
 
 ENTEF.ED, ACCORDING TO ACT OF CONGRESS, IN THE YEAR 1887, BY 
 ANDREW J. GRAHAM, 
 
 IN THE OFFICE OF THE LIBRARIAN OF CONGRESS, AT WASHINGTON, D. C. 
 
 To secure the Phonographic Engraving and the various other Revisions of 
 the previous edition. 
 
 See the Preface, Introduction, and Key with Notes, following the 
 Engraved Exercises, 
 
G- 
 
 
 
 c/-v 
 
 J 
 
 ^ 
 
 c^ 
 
 ; -Jsir* 9 
 ./?} ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 yc 
 
 ; 
 
 c^-i 
 
 -^^ "i 
 
 /I 
 
 i " ^ / . \ 
 % * v v / V 
 
 1 n r v 
 
 x / -v... -* ^ 
 
 448585 
 
J-T'VO LTJ. L ^r. n3 
 
 x , ^o 
 
 ^ .V?. 1V^ L^ 
 
 ) 
 
 C"^ 
 
 J^/ 
 
 r 
 
 y 
 
 ^ 
 
 <* 
 
 L 
 
 /^f.^(~>. 
 
 K / 
 
 ^ 
 
< _- - f^. . . 
 
 % X 
 
 i^rv^ 
 
 Vo /..._ |^-_<r- 
 
 -J^ x- 
 
 ^- 0--^C 
 
 k. 
 
 X 
 
 5 
 ^ /' 
 
 AV 
 -\ 
 
 ^ 
 
 k^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 k 
 
 X 
 
 T^ 
 
 .^AV, 
 
 ,.r^/ 
 
 -=^-> 
 
 ^ 
 
 ( M- 
 
 
 I/ 
 
 "\ 
 * 
 
- *-5\.T^Y/ ' * 
 
 ' r 
 n 
 
 A 
 
 k-n-J-^-- 
 
 7 
 
 idence of ihc v^ircu ation olineJ! 
 
 \ 
 
 -/I 
 
 .s n 
 
o i J\ 
 
 - v -\ 
 
 *-^..V.- y % ~> ~~^ $ ~J c ^-^_ A. 
 
 X > / \ 
 
 .b.y.^A^ s^e..^ ^^..-^cr.^ 
 
 <!.U.S- V ..lL-t .- JD v,^ 1 i -<f^. ->!- 
 
 ) ^ / " l^ -^ ? ( 
 
 fr I o 1 v 
 
 c-^rr ic ^:- ( s.U./ ^ z. ^-^ ^?/!?. o v_^ c .1 
 
 N* / U- -f ^LVLrHt*-'r^. S*S-*I'\ l^^JL 
 
 /: ^.(..r-xs^-^^^/- 
 
.1... 
 
 I \ 
 
 
 <<;/>>,. 
 
 -x; 
 
 1 1 - < -: / V r 
 
 
 N V- S - M 
 
 OUT rienos ITJ / leoiu r| 
 
12 
 
13 
 
A 
 
17 
 
 \jr^t 
 
 A 
 
 _,< -r- < 
 
 * . . t s - - 
 
 V 
 
 J^yv'^v*/ 
 

 Y 
 
 I / % ^^ 
 
 S-.fc-Vs -\-- 
 
 "tc 
 
19 
 
20 
 
 c 
 
 A, 
 
 V 
 
 v^Q. 
 
 \ r v -^- x 
 \. J . .. _n_. 
 
 s.T^o..'/ "T, U^A.^/v- ). < r:.\ /^.^/i r v 
 
 ^-/--^ ^ ^..^/^^ , L_N^- 4 
 
 v^ ' ^ / 7^ K./^ ^ -'-V- ^- -^/X- 
 
 --=*'- J >-\./ J -v^ sr <;-<;-v,- T -^ , v A,-,- 
 
21 
 
 O 
 
 * 
 
 * O-/...IM 
 
 /*e 
 
 "> 2 
 
 \ 
 
 x 
 -7 7 
 
 " 
 
 "^"t^5~ "^- 
 
22 
 
23 
 
 rv. 
 
2-1 
 
 ( 7 
 
 
 I. 
 
 '..^ 
 
 vr< v 
 
 Vr 
 
 > L /r 
 
 /."^/ 
 
 C-t/ ^-v 
 
 V ^ 
 w.^.. 
 
25 
 
27 
 
 ?_) 
 
 LVL- 
 
 I x-r^ . 
 
 ~V7 
 
 /\' 
 
 I / " "\ P '"N 
 
 L \ *J ) 
 X \3 
 
 r\,/s 
 
 >- -\ 
 N 
 
 ' s '"I 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 V 
 
 ~\ 
 
 -> 
 
 A 
 
28 
 
29 
 
 v^t ^^w, 
 
 ^s -^ ^s 
 
 v^KMunP^-V< 
 
 7 
 
 -- 
 
 I ' n r^, 
 
 Grr?." 
 
 V 
 v 
 
 -- 
 
 ---- 
 
 v < 
 
 x- / I 
 
 r 
 
 3 
 
 (5) 
 
 "Z * V- 
 
^ ^ y = \^ /' ~Y 
 
 / -^-- ' -<^ 
 
 .No Laujfor Slairery. 
 
 , 
 
 1 
 
 -4r-/9 
 
32 
 
33 
 
 fro 
 
S/- A "--Q/' r ^? "*- 
 
 , J l^_ -7 /i -V 
 ~(r>- ^J-f/k % - : 
 
 OL^ 
 
 V= s ^-i 
 
 n r 
 
35 
 
r~ 
 
 37 
 
 c 
 
 VI 
 
 3- 
 
 f -= 
 
 v . 
 
 ^ 
 
 vj-^vj-iy-v-v^ , 
 
 -o._C f^ /-vvO. 
 
 V**/ ( ^/ 
 
 ty J..,.^ -Y-,. t.Vf.fc 
 
 ^ 
 
 r 
 
 /-^r 
 
 ^-/ 
 
 .v- 
 
 ^-r L> .^r r\ .^r^ 
 
 k .C ^SC / 
 
 448585 
 
38 
 
 \ A, w-o/7 
 
 cX 
 
 X* 
 
 i 3 c T 
 
 K . V 
 
 
 _ 4- 
 
 / C -V\ 
 
 \( 
 
 1 
 
 = !> - -I , \ ^-< / J <r f c ^ p 
 
 / f . t I ... N C.^N.._ I 
 
C.C, 
 
 r 
 
 -, , J. v 
 
 a 
 .x ? 
 
 J 
 
 v 
 
 * 
 
 \ 
 
 ^\ 
 
 .. 
 
 LOfr* 
 
 39 
 

 
 V-l 
 
 ..V I 
 
 i ' 
 
 //^-^ S2/ 
 
 ^~\ <; If ^~\ (^ 
 
 ^> >> / (, r- I 
 
 -^ 7 
 
 ^-CxV-.^. ^-L- 
 
 ^v^ 
 
 -^-^ 
 
 -x-^-s^vv-t// 
 
 ^l- 
 
 <^A 
 

 v-v./ (A^l^v^.K-s^ -, &.:) /*~S^.r:. 
 
Alexander tfon Humtoldi 
 
 trx 
 
 ' O 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 r:. i 
 
 .*^ 
 
 -1 
 
 2^ i ~A 
 
 ^-v 
 
 > :>_ Y :\ ^ , > e. 
 
 I .L^7!r:n 
 
 t^^r-i^v. 
 
 <^ ^ 
 
 \ -C^ "1 b.^ ? 
 <r ~^v A L_-x 
 
 Vl/ 
 
 -~ i H^ ^ v v v ^/: -" ^-> 
 
 I ^i ^_^ ^ ^_ x^ j _ p __7^ ( 5 / \ S. 
 
 ji..^ ^-(i- 1 U^St^ , X, ^^ 9 i X ^- ^ 
 
 | bs Vj, , | 
 
 I 
 
 A. ^ -r f* *} 
 
 ^- v^-q^-^ 
 
 i 
 c c ^ /.... - L- 
 
 V. 
 
 --1.~- -x-< 
 
 43 
 
44 
 
 V-, 
 
 S 
 
 I 
 
 - 
 
 , , i 
 
 ^ 
 
 T I ^ 
 
 C, 
 
 /..V, ' 
 
 -*^ 
 
 .._ 
 
 } i v -j 
 
 1 
 
 
 ji -<s*^ 
 
 k, 
 
 
 "^s N rt~ 
 
 -G-/-O- 
 
 .^/...^..c^ 
 
 1 \ 
 
 b-. v -- ---I 
 
 
45 
 
 A"V "~// ^_' '/V; 
 
46 
 ] I 
 
 
 w 
 
 v f. K 
 
 W A. 
 
 .. / 
 
 ' >->^ L 7 
 
 , 1 s/- 
 
 ...] ...r 
 
 "p-o I 
 
47 
 
 -\---l-- 7 
 
 v , 
 
 v^> ' ' ^ 
 
 V\j^ """*? x f*l 
 
 rrn k . }...*-..(S-. 
 
 I*. 8 / I 
 
 J\JL* A t ' 
 
 C P / 
 
 ^>' 
 
 s v Vr^. < r7'~x ) "~ ^~ ^^ ^ ^ I /i v ^ . , ^X 
 
 .^- \ J *"' ^ 
 
 \ ^ '-Vac* ^ 
 
 \ _^ v f 
 
 i"*"* 1 \^~ T/ '^U 
 
 ^./i\ "^^ n^-, . /i < v c -" -^ ^-^ 7 / 
 
 ^^y 
 
48 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 THIS, the fourth volume of the Series of Standard-Phonographic 
 Text-Books, is designed for reading and study, after the student has 
 read and copied the First Reader, and studied the Compendium thor- 
 oughly from 255 to 280, inclusive, having committed to memory 
 the word-signs and contractions, and familiarized the list of words 
 distinguished by difference of outline or position. 
 
 But if it should seem, too tedious to commit the lists to memovy 
 before commencing to read these reporting exercises, the study may 
 be varied and rendered more attractive by alternating the study of 
 the lists with reading the engraving in this work. 
 
 But, of course, if the reading is commenced before learning the lists, 
 there will be required much more frequent reference to the Key ; but 
 in this manner many word-signs and contractions will bo easily and 
 pleasantly familiarized. 
 
 But no method of study can obviate the absolute necessity of acquiring the ut- 
 most familiarity with the reporting lists. 
 
 And, in no case, should the learner allow himself, or be allowed, to 
 proceed to a second reading lesson, until the first can be read with the 
 utmost rapidity of articulation. 
 
 Considerable assistance will be derived before commencing to read 
 the Reporting Exercises, from the examination of the chapter on the 
 Characteristics of the Reporting Style, on page 60 of this volume. 
 
 As soon as a page or exercise can be read easily, it should be placed 
 in view as a "copy," and copied many times, with both pen and pen- 
 cil, until all the characters are familiarized and can be easily and 
 gracefully formed, and especially until the forms and positions of 
 word-signs, contractions, and phrase-signs are carefully impressed 
 upon the memory. 
 
 > The engraving is designed as a good example for close imitation, 
 both as to the size of characters and the spacing of words. A consid- 
 erable loss of speed will be incurred either by making the letters larg- 
 er than is necessary for a proper distinction between the different 
 
 49 
 
50 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 lengths of strokes, or by writing the words a considerable distance 
 apart. By making the characters quite large there is no jrenter diir- 
 tinction secured between the different lengths, than when they are 
 made of the size in these exercises ; for, though it sometimes happens 
 in small writing that a doubt arises as to the intended length of a 
 particular stroke, the same doubt is as liable to occur in reading large 
 writing, and even more so, for the loss of time resulting from writing 
 large necessitates a haste and movement of the hand which are rath- 
 er inconsistent with making due distinctions in length. 
 
 After an exercise has been copied several times, let it be written 
 from the reading of some other person, the rate of reading being such 
 as to require considerable effort to keep up, but not so fast as to re- 
 quire illegible and incorrect writing, or to induce a confused, hesitating 
 movement of the hand for, the hand should move with regular and uniform 
 
 Compare the "notes" thus made with the engraved exercises, ob- 
 serve all the differences, and write again from reading, and again cor- 
 rect ; and so proceed until the exercise can be reported correctly and 
 rather neatly at a speed of from 80 to 100 words per minute. 
 
 Then let these ' ' notes ' ' be read repeatedly until they can be read 
 with the utmost rapidity of articulation. 
 
 The student should next, especially if he wishes to become a repor- 
 ter, make a longhand transcript of his notes ; precisely as if he were 
 to furnish it for publication. The Key, of course, will enable him to 
 correct any orthographical, punctuational, or other errors in his 
 transcript. He should persevere in this transcribing until his tran- 
 scripts coincide with the Key, though he should not require of him- 
 self precise agreement therewith in respect of minor particulars of 
 punctuation. 
 
 Considerable time, and perhaps more patience, will be required to 
 finish one exercise in accordance with this plan. But he that rules 
 himself is greater than he that rules a city. Don't allow any impa- 
 tience, or wearisomeness of labor, to overcome you. Rule yourself in 
 this phonographic study in the very first lesson ; and, instead of diffi- 
 culties thickening as you proceed, the way will constantly become 
 more easy ; and you will acquire a habit that will be invaluable to 
 you in reporting or in any other undertaking or profession; and, 
 what will be of great moment, you will possess a thoroughly practical 
 knowledge of a highly useful art. 
 
 The learner should be examined by himself, or by his teacher, as to 
 the principles involved in each exercise, after the manner of syntac- 
 tical examinations. 
 
 After this Reader has been thoroughly studied through in accordance 
 
PREFACE. 51 
 
 with the preceding directions, and through again and again, until every 
 page of the exercises can be written with a speed of from 150 to 200 
 words per minute, the student may write from dictation from other 
 books, etc., in all cases of doubt as to the proper reporting outlines 
 referring to the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. (That work gives 
 an immense number of phrases and their signs, which it will be well to 
 write repeatedly from dictation.) This practice of writing from dicta- 
 tion, reading notes, and transcribing, should be continued until suffi- 
 cient speed has been attained to commence the reporting of moderate 
 speakers. But whatever opportunities may be offered to report from 
 public speakers, the practice of writing from dictation should not be 
 discontinued until a speed has been acquired of from 150 to 200 words 
 per minute in new reading. 
 
 To attain a speed greatly surpassing the powers of the Old (or Eng- 
 lish) Phonography, or any modification that has been made of it since 
 the issue of the Hand-Book, all that is necessary is, that the student, 
 having commenced with Standard Phonography, shall perfectly famil- 
 iarize it, not meddling with works on the Old or any Compromise sys- 
 tem to introduce causes of confusion and hesitation. See p. 190. 
 
 The author's system of Phonographic Nomenclature is of great ser- 
 vice in the study of Phonography, by enabling conversation to be car- 
 ried on easily and understandingly between the student and his teacher 
 or fellow- learner as to phonographic outlines. It will be especially 
 useful in the study of the Reporting Style. This system familiarized 
 describes word-forms and phrase-signs with perfect certainty. It is as 
 much better than the former circumlocutory descriptions (as for in- 
 stance, "p with an Miook and a circle on it and an -hook") as the 
 modern chemical nomenclature is better than the old alchemistic 
 names for elements and compounds. For convenience of reference, a 
 resume [razuma-] of the system will be presented in a following chap- 
 ter, there being added to the system as presented in the Hand-Book 
 the method employed in the Dictionary of naming "ticks." Another 
 chapter will show the application of the system, by describing a page 
 of the engraving in the Fieader. 
 
 In the Notes, the aim has been to answer every question, and to 
 clear away every difficulty, that the author supposed could present it- 
 self. Especially will the Notes serve to thoroughly educate the pupil 
 in Phrase-writing, one of the most important aids to speed, and, at 
 times, to legibility. 
 
 In the Notes, also, he has, in a comparatively few cases, pointed out 
 the difference between the Old and the New Phonography, and shown 
 the advantages of the latter over the former. He has also exhibited 
 the reasons for and against various phonographic devices, because the 
 
52 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 student, in learning the reasons in any rase, becomes possessed of use- 
 ful principles to guide him in analogous cases; and these reasons be- 
 ing understood, and a knowledge of them diffused, will perhaps save 
 Phonography from the mischief of attempted changes by persons ig- 
 norant of the principles involved in the art. 
 
 Throughout this work, it should be observed 
 
 1. That the references, unless otherwise specified, are to the Com- 
 pendium, Part II. of the Hand- Book. 
 
 '2. That the references are to the sections and their subdivisions, 
 unless preceded by p=page. Two or more references are separated by 
 a semicolon ; thus, 48; 150. 
 
 In making the selections for this Reader, the aim has not been to 
 make those with which everybody would agree, for that would be impos- 
 sible, but to make such as would afford as great a variety as possible 
 of styles of expression and thought (for the reporter must study styles 
 of thought as well as of expression), and embrace a variety of the 
 general subjects of public speaking, so as to introduce an extended 
 vocabulary, and thus prepare the student for ACTUAL reporting, by 
 causing him to familiarize a huge number of the most useful outlines, 
 word-signs, contractions, and phrase- signs, and by acquainting him 
 somewhat with the conflicting thoughts which he must be prepared to 
 report. If any one should be disposed to object to these selections 
 because he does not, perchance, find his own views represented, or 
 because he finds views expressed with which he does not agree, let 
 him philosophically reflect, that if he should seek to convince an op- 
 ponent, it could be done only upon the condition of a patient hearing 
 which he is disposed to refuse to the expression of opinions differing 
 from his own. in this instance, even when the object of presenting 
 them is not to propagate any particular opinion, but to furnish the most useful 
 exercises for the pupil. 
 
 ANDREW J. GRAHAM. 
 
 NEW YOEK, August 13th, 18CO. 
 
 Kevised, 1887. 
 
 In this New and Revised Edition, the former copperplate engraving 
 is replaced by plates produced by the Author's own hand, by means 
 of his process of stereography. In the re-engraving, the few transi- 
 tional forms of twenty-six years before, have been changed to agree 
 with the later thought and experience embodied in the Standard- 
 Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
PHONOGRAPHIC NOMENCLATURE. 
 
 1. THE names of the simple-consonant strokes (ire Pee, Bee, Tee, 
 Dee, Chay, Jay, Kay, Gay, Ef, Vee, Ith, Dhee, Es, Zee, Ish, (sh writ- 
 ten downward), Shay (sh written upward), Zhay, El (I written down- 
 ward), Lay (I written upward), Ar (r written downward), Hay (the 
 upward r), Em, En, Ing, Way, Yay, Hay. 
 
 2. The circle for * or z, in order to distinguish it from the stroke, is 
 named Iss. where its sound cannot be conveniently spoken in one 
 syllable with the name of the stroke to which it is joined. Skay is 
 the s-circle and the stroke for k. Es-Kay, the stroke for s and the 
 stroke for k. Iss-Bee, the s-circle and the stroke for b. 
 
 3. The large circle is named Ses or Sez, printed either in a separate 
 syllable, or added to the name of a stroke without a preceding hy- 
 phen. Thus, Ses-Tee. Chay-Ses or Chay'sez. 
 
 4. The loop for s/ is named Steh (e as in met), or the sound of the 
 letters st is spoken in connection with the name of the stroke to whL-h 
 the loop is joined ; thus, Steh-Tee, Steh-Pee, Star (sMoop and the 
 downward r) Chayst, Kayst, Enst, Wayst. 
 
 5. The loop for str is named Stcr. To distinguish it from the name 
 of another letter (Iss and Ter, or simply Rter), it is made to form, with 
 the name of the preceding letter, a single word, accented on the first 
 syllable. For example, En, Bee, and Kay form with the name for the 
 loop Ster, the words En'ster, Bee'ster, Kay'ster. 
 
 0. The brief sign for w is called Brief Way, or, in order to distin- 
 guish between the different facings of the sign, Weh, when facing to 
 the right, and Wuh, when facing to the left. When joined as a hook 
 to Em, En, Lay, Ray, the characters thus formed are named Wem, 
 Wen, Wei, Wer. 
 
 7. The brief sign for y is named Brief Yay, or, in order to distin- 
 guish between the different directions, Yen, when the sign opens up- 
 ward, and Yuh, when it opens downward. 
 
 8. The brief Way and Y ( ay, when written in the vowel-places to 
 
 53, 
 
54 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC HEADER. 
 
 Indicate a following vowel, arc called we, yG, wil, ya, etc , the w and 
 y being printed Avith a small letter. 
 
 9. The tick for A may be called Heh, or named in accordance with 
 a plan hereafter explained (23) of naming ticks, vowel-dashes, etc. 
 The dot for A may be called Hetch, or spoken in connection with the 
 vowels ; thus, he, ha, ha, etc. 
 
 10. The El-hook signs are named Pel, Bel, Tel, Del, Kel, Gel (g as 
 in gay}, Fel, Vel, Thcl, Dhcl, Shcl, Zhel, Yel, Mel, Nel, Eel. 
 
 11. The Ar-hook signs are named, Per, Ber, Ter, Der, Cher, Jer, 
 Ker, Ger, Fer, Ver, Ther, Dher, Sher, Zher, Mer, Ner. 
 
 12. The back hook for in, en, or vn, written at the beginning of Iss- 
 Per or Sper, Iss-Ter or Ster, and some other letters, is named In ; thus, 
 In-Sper=In-Iss-Per=Ins-Per, In-Ster, In-Sker. In-Iss-Lay=In-Slay 
 =Ins-Lay. 
 
 13. Tlic enlarged El-hook signs, i.e., the Ler-hook signs, arc named 
 Pier, Bier, Tier, Dler, etc. See Compendium, 175. 
 
 14. The enlarged Ar-hook signs, i. ., the Rel-hook signs, are named 
 Prel, Trel, etc. See Compendium, 175. 
 
 15. The simple or group-signs with an Ef-hook, are named by pre- 
 fixing the sounds they represent to the syllable Ef, if this can be done 
 conveniently; if not, add the sound of f to the syllable-name of the 
 stroke ; thus, Pef, Chef, Kef, Plef, Tlef or Telf, Chref or Cherf, Prelf, 
 Plerf, Chlerf. 
 
 16. The simple and the group-signs with the En-hook, are named 
 by prefixing the sounds they represent to the syllable En, or, if more 
 convenient, or better for distinction's sake, by prefixing the syllable- 
 name of the stroke to the syllable En, or to the sound of n, the accent 
 being placed upon the name of the stroke ; thus, Pen, Ken, Plen, 
 Chlcn or Chel'en, Pren, Chren or Chern, Prel'en, Plern, Chlern, Es'en 
 (not Sen=Iss-En), Wayn (instead of Wen, which is En with the Way- 
 hook), Yayn. 
 
 17. The name of a Shon-hook or Tiv-hook sign is formed by adding 
 the syllable Shon or Tiv, as the case may be, to the name of the 
 stroke; thus, Pee'shon, Dee'shon, Ray'shon, Pel'shon, Per'shon, 
 Pler'shon, Prel'shon, Wer'shon, Rel'shon ; Pee'tiv, Dee'tiv, Chay'tiv, 
 Pel'tiv, Rel'tiv, Per'tiv, Cher'tiv, Pler'tiv, Prcl'tiv. 
 
 18. The small hook for slton, is named Esh'on ; thus, Dces-Eshon, 
 decision ; Pees-Eshon, position, possession ; Perseshon, persuasion ; 
 Trenseshon, transition. Sec Compendium, 197, 1. 
 
 19. The widened Em is named Emp or Emb, according as it repre- 
 sents mp or inb. 
 
 20. Lengthened strokes, doubled or trebled, arc named by prefixing 
 the name of the stroke to the sound added by lengthening ; thus, 
 
INTRODUCTION. 55 
 
 IngTter, Ing'ger, Lay'ter, Lay'ther or Lay'dher ; Way'ter, Wcn'dher, 
 Fcl'ther, Fer'dher; Chay'dher, Kay'dhcr; Chay'dherdher, Way'dher- 
 dlier. See Compendimii, 207 ; 204 ; 264, R. 9. 
 
 21. The syllables ter, der, tker, dfier, her, ger, when they indicate 
 strokes, arc commenced with capital letters, and are separated from 
 the name of any preceding stroke to which they are joined, by a hy- 
 phen ; thus, En-Ter, entry ; Sen-Der, sundry ; Ver-Tlier, overthrow ; 
 Ef-Dher, feathery; Ing-Ger, angry. 
 
 22. The half-lengths are named by adding the syllable Et or Ed to 
 the sound of the full-length, except when it is more convenient, or 
 better for distinction's sake, to add the sound of t or d to the syllable- 
 name of the full-length ; thus, Pet or Fed, Bet or Bed, Let, Eld, Met, 
 Med, Net or Ent, Ned or End, Art, Ard, Berd or Bred, Mert or Merd, 
 Pee'shont or Pce'shond, Dee'shond, etc.; Wcmt or Wemd, Wert or 
 Werd, Plet or Pled, Tlet or Telt, Delt or Deld, Pret, Bret. 
 
 23. The dash-vowel word-signs, and similar small signs, may be 
 named by the words they represent, as 'all,' 'of,' 'to,' 'I,' 'he,' etc.; 
 or names may be formed for them by adding the syllable old (signify- 
 ing like, or resembling) to the names of the half-lengths which these 
 small signs resemble. Bed'oid 1 is the sign for all; Ded'oid 1 is the sign 
 for already ; Kret'oid 2 is the horizontal anrf-tick with the Ar-hook ; 
 Peft'oid 2 is the word-sign for to with the Ef-hook. 
 
 24. Prefix and Affix signs are indicated by quoting them, thus, 
 *con,' 'com,' 'accom,' 'discon,' 'ing,' 'ingly,' 'bility;' or, their 
 signs may be indicated by their S3 r llable-names. 
 
 25. Enlarged Way is named, when opening to the East, Weh'weh ; 
 to the West, Wuh'wuh ; to the North-east, Weh'yeh ; to the South- 
 west, Wuh'yuh. Way may be substituted for the first syllable of these 
 names, if the sign is heavy. Weh'wernt is the name of Rent with 
 Weh'weh joined as an initial hook. See Compendium, 262. 
 
 26. Enlarged Yay is named, when opening upward, Yeh'weh ; when 
 opening downward, Yuh'wuh ; when the sign is heavy, ' Yay ' may be 
 substituted for the first syllable of these names ; thus, YayVeh. 
 
 27. The figures 1, 2, 3, are used to denote respectively the first, 
 second, and third position. The figure 4 is employed to indicate that 
 the letter after whose name it is placed is to be written to imply a 
 preceding to, according to the Compendium, 250, Rem. 2. Thus, Es 4 
 is Es commencing at the line of writing, as iu writing ' to say ' in the 
 Reporting Style. 
 
5G SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC EEADEE. 
 
 LETTERS DISJOINED, OR CROSSING, ETC. 
 
 28. To indicate that a sign is to bo written disjoined near the other 
 portion of the word, it is preceded or followed by a colon. En:Beest, 
 indicates that En is to be written near, but not joined to Beest. 
 
 29. The dagger (f) is printed between two signs to indicate that the 
 character following it is to be written through the preceding one ; 
 thus, 'EnfEf indicates that the Ef is to be written through the En. 
 
 30. Words or letters to be omitted are inclosed in brackets [ ] . 
 Words that are omitted but implied (as o/and to) are not thus printed. 
 
 KEY TO THE PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 As pronunciation will need to be indicated occasionally in the sub- 
 sequent pages, the following Key should be observed by the student ; 
 
 a, e, etc., long ; a, e, etc., short ; u as in full, and as o in to; v as in 
 iip; x as ai in air ; o as a in all ; 6 as o in /or, long ; a as a in ah; a as a 
 in art; a as a in ask; ui as oo in too; dh for the spoken th, as in then; 
 and th for the whispered th, as in thin; zh for the spoken sound corre- 
 sponding to the whispered sh. () Accent; thus, ak'sent. () Sylla- 
 ble-mark ; thus, iu.kwlr. 
 
 For ordinary purposes I do not distinguish between o and 6 ; a, a, 
 and a ; e and e ; simply because the different situations of these sounds 
 are suflicient distinction for ordinary piirposes. In the Standard-Pho- 
 nographic Dictionary these distinctions are always carefully indicated. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF PHONOGRAPHIC 
 DESCRIPTION. 
 
 THE following paragraphs are designed to exhibit the application of 
 Phonographic Nomenclature, by describing p. 8 of this Reader. The 
 sign (:) may be read "near" when in the place of of, of a-n, of the; 
 "under," when implying cow, com, cog; and "disjoined," when pre- 
 ceding affixes or following prefixes. 
 
 Net-Els* Dees-Pee-Jay:'ing' Geds 4 -Zed-Em Dhee^ Lays 2 -Dee-Strcf 
 lVtsoid*-Ced-Ens ZeeMletoid Jel*-.Tay Ith^-Ray En- Vent* Ketoid-Pet'- 
 Ef Eii '39 Nel 2 IS-Ych'-Gay Bce'-Chetoid IlayS-Vee-Der Pee(l)'- 
 
67 
 
 Sem-Ith Nerd'-Petoid-Ray:Slay-Retoid Dhen* Kay'-Ent-Pret:' first' 
 Chay 3 :Jay 2 -Enses Wch'-Chetoid Dee 2 -Em-Stershons:Jel 2 -Jay-Es-Ens. 
 Der'-Sem-Ith Sded' Es*:Chay 3 Es<-Ens IKS"- Dee'-Met-Dhet Ar 3 -Gel-Bce 
 Dceses n -Ted Ef- Kent '-Lays-Jays Ketoid- Dee 3 - Ben-En-Bet Bee'-Vee- 
 Rfty8-BftyBes:En*-Mels Bef-' Dee 3 -Em Zee'--Kret(ya) [to be read Kvet voc. 
 with ya, or kreat-] ; Tctoid 2 Ef^-SkayrVend'-Ket/ing-a' Layter'-Ent- 
 Pret:Em-Zee 2 -Kay Kcnt 2 :Kershon 2 Kred'-Chay 2 'the' Sen 2 Men 3 Stars 2 
 Plents 3 En'-Mels Ketoid-Men 2 Ems 2 Weh 2 Kret 2 Net'-Ket 6 Ith-Yeh- 
 Gay Kletoid' Dhen'-Petoid [com]:Pees:6 Dee'-'-Ren-Lay Dees 9 : 24 Ar<- 
 Iss Chay 1 Chetoid : '-Ment-End-Dhet Sem-Ray Per 2 - Pees In-Sem- Sen- 
 ter 2 -Pref-Ens:(a)Ish 9 Ncn 3 Ens^-Tees Let a -Ted Tetoid 1 El-'-En-Jet 
 Ketoid-Eri'-Jay-Gcr Tetoid 1 Jel 2 -Jay Iss 2 Dees-'-Kef En-Tcrs(a)2-Vet 
 Dher 2 -Zee Ketoid-Spet(o) 1 Scin 2 10 Em-Layses-Kay-Wer Lay'-Kay- 
 Clietoid Dees*-Kel Wcr 2 Wei' Bedoid 1 Tees-Det En-Dheedher-'-Prets- 
 Gel-Bee "Zee 2 Lay'-Ef Kctoid-Let' Dher-Rend(a) Ef^-Tee Ncl 2 Dee^- 
 Ith Ketoid-Drens 3 (a)Med'-Retoid. Wclter 2 -Ings:Kay-Tee 2 -Kay:Es> ; 
 Ketoid-Chay 2 Tee 3 -Retoid Def :End 3 Zee 2 -Pent-Rct Bec'-Let Tetoid- 
 Kay-Ped 1 Bee'-Der(!)-Lend Ketoid- Elt*-Met (a)Ar2-Retoid-End:Kertiv* 
 Wuh-Kay' Bee 2 -Kay Ketoid -Senter 2 En-Chay 2 Iss-Ret 2 - Plents Ketoid- 
 En'-Mels Ketoid-Ef-Nel Men 2 Ems 2 Well 2 Kret 2 ." En 5 -Petoid, Wnh'- 
 Ketoid-Dees-Gays-Ef En-Steus 2 Iss-Dhees 2 :Tee--Ens-Teo Weh-Chay 2 
 Ith 2 -Jay Per 2 :Speeshons 2 Ar 2 -Eld En-Dee'-Ef-Ens:Fels--Ef-Ter. Spees 1 - 
 Dhet Wei 1 Bedoid ' -Chetoid Jel J -Jay-(e)Ar-Iss Wen 2 Eft-Endher Weh 2 
 Pees 3 : 'ing' Thcrdher* Em'-Ens Skels 1 Ketoid- Wcl' Bedoid'-Rayst:Ray 2 - 
 Itli Zee 2 Def : 'ing ' Steh-Tce 1 :Per 2 -Pee-Ray Ef-'-Chetoid-Rays-Dens :Men 2 
 Ketoid-Let'-Pcrs-Ray :Kay-Es 2 Sem 2 -Ray Retoid 2 -Bee-Kerf Ef-Enst En' 
 Ketoid-Chays'-El Kay-Pet 2 Tel 3 6 Ith 3 -Yeh-Gay Wen'-Chetoid Wer 
 Zeether 2 -Den En'-Skays-Dees Chef-Dee Lays'-'- Ar Kay-Pet 1 Kent-Lays- 
 Jays Pref Ketoid-Dhet 1 Erases 2 En 2 -Chetoid Bedoid' Bet 3 -Dhees Skays- 
 Dees 2 Wcr 2 Tetoid 2 Dent '-En Bet 3 -Dheedher Teftoid'-Petoid-Ded En 2 
 Bet'-Tee Kay-Pets 2 -En-Jay Ems'. Retoid 3 Ef'-Kay-Ish Wuh 2 -Bee- 
 Chetoid Nen 3 Tetoid-Kay-Pcrshon 2 :Ter 3 -Jcn Ketoid-Ter 3 -Es-Ens En- 
 Pref^-Ent:'ing' Schay 2 -Ray-Krcds:Ii?h-Em Fcr 2 -Bee-Ing In-Sker' Ret- 
 oid-Pce' ? -Jays:Est'-Ray. 
 
 Ver 2 -Bed Ens 2 -Chetoid EP-Kay :Tee 2 -En-Dee ' inter ' :Em-Ray- Jays 
 Em 2 -Ing-Perses Rel -2 Bee' :Sen''-Gay-En-Tee. ' The ' ' cog ' :Net' Bled 2 : 
 En-En-Ray-Chet Ketoid-En-Stee 2 -Em-Let Ferdher 2 Fent 3 -Ens Sen 3 
 Breds 1 Wuh-Kay'-Ens Deeses 1 Ketoid-Embs-Let 1 . Jays 2 -Ests Weh'- 
 Tetoid Skct 2 Dhet' Ishts 9 -Tee Tcr 2 Kays-Tee 2 -Zee-Net Em-Berst 2 En'- 
 Skay-Em Vets' Fend'-Rays. 'The' I-Dees 2 :Schay--Sket Vee-En-Lay- 
 ter-En-Tef Efdher* Tee-'-En-Deeses-Tens Tetoid-' Bred(e)< En-Ketoid- 
 En Ketoid-Dhees 2 Bee' Ketoid-Skel-Jay*-Lay Iss 2 Em-Tee 2 -Bel Iss 2 - 
 Chetoid Efs ? -Jay Sen 3 Bee 2 -Gets Ketoid-Pcr 2 - Jay-En :Ef-'-Ith Ray'-Ens 
 
58 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Bees'- Ard Embs-Lay 1 Ketoid-Dct'-Kay. Tetoid* Chetoid'-Kay-' we ' 
 Way' Jen' Wch<-Dee Es'-Ens. Chetoid 3 -Kay- 4 we ' Ray a :Slay* Es'-Ens 
 Es ? -Ing Ester*-En-Jed Ketoid-En*-Petoid Retoid-Ef'-Ar Her 2 Ester*- 
 En-.Jed Dhon'-Vce Ea'-Pees Jen' Ketoid-Dhees' Spef-Chetoid Nrl-'- 
 Bred-Ger-Em Dhcts'-Wer-Dhee:Ar'-Kay-Wen-El Bet- Tetoid-Ar 1 Em'- 
 Gay Dee^-Ray. Retoid'-Ens-Ray Es'-Ens Snet' Sket*. Tee-Dees-Net: 
 Fen Tees" En<-Sgay-Ment:Iss-Rel 2 :Fels ; -Ef-Ter Tetoid* Skays 1 Em<- 
 Bers-Chetoid Enter 1 Sef-Rens. Tee 3 -Pers-Dee Ketoid-Bee'-Get En 1 - 
 Es-Ens Kent'-Lay-Vee. 
 
 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE REPORTING 
 STYLE. 
 
 THE Corresponding Style of Standard Phonography contains, in germ 
 at least, nearly every principle of the Reporting Style. The latter is 
 distinguished from the former principally by the following-mentioned 
 characteristics. 
 
 I. By usually omitting the vowels. 
 
 II. By the extension of the nse of three positions for outlines. See 
 Exhibit of Reporting Style Position, on a subsequent page. 
 
 III. By additions to the word- signs and contractions of the Corre- 
 sponding Style. 
 
 By means of improvements in word-signs and contractions alone 
 (many of which improvements, however, are dependent upon the new 
 principles embodied in Standard Phonography) a great gain over the 
 Old or English Phonography is made in respect of speed. This specifi- 
 cation is inclusive of the general principles of contraction of Standard 
 Phonography, but exclusive of anything specified in the following 
 paragraphs. 
 
 IV. By substituting, for convenience of phrase-writing, briefer word- 
 signs for some of the Corresponding word-signs ; namely : 
 
 (1.) By expressing He by a tick, whether standing alone or in phrase- 
 writing. This makes an important gain over the Old reporting style, 
 in which lie was expressed by a dot, or (as improved by the writer, for 
 convenience of phrase- writing) by Hay, the same as in the Correspond- 
 ing Style of Standard Phonography. This method of writing he secures 
 thousands of phrase-signs which were cither difficult or impossible 
 
INTRODUCTION. 59 
 
 ttpon any former plan of writing this word. See, in the Standard- 
 Phonographic Dictionary, the phrases commencing with He. 
 
 (2.) By expressing How by the Hay-tick in the third position. This 
 makes a gain of fifty per cent, upon the Old Phonography in the ex- 
 pression of this word, and secures a large number of phrase-signs which 
 were impossible in the Old Phonography. See the phrases beginning 
 with How, in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 (3.) By expressing / when standing alone by a perpendicular tick 
 (271) ; and when joined to a preceding word, by a perpendicular or 
 horizontal tick (103, E. 1). This makes a considerable gain over the 
 Old Phonography, securing many valuable phrase-signs where none 
 were possible iu the Pitman Phonography. 
 
 (4.) By expressing You in phrase-writing by Yeh whenever Yuh can 
 not be employed at all, or without difficulty ; thus, I send you, Ket- 
 oid 1 -Scud- Yeh. 
 
 V. By implying To, followed or not by a-n or the (which are supplied 
 by means of the context) . 
 
 (1.) Either by joining the following word to the preceding ; thus, 
 Ish'-Bee, wish to be; Kred-Dhet 1 , according to that. 
 
 (2. ) Or, by commencing the following word where the word-sign for 
 to would stop (i. e., so as to just touch the lower edge of the line of 
 writing). P. 130, 11. 2; 260, b. 
 
 This single principle adds greatly to the speed secured by the Old 
 Phonography. 
 
 VI. By implying Of, followed or not by a, an, or the (which are sup- 
 plied by aid of the context), by writing the following word near or 
 joined to the preceding. This principle adds considerably to the speed 
 of the Old Phonography. This principle is also valuable on account 
 of its distinguishing, almost always, between of and / at the begin- 
 ning of phrases. 
 
 VII. By writing the present time for the past tense or time when- 
 ever a stroke or more can be saved thereby. 
 
 This principle makes a great gain over the Old Phonography. It is 
 a general principle of contraction of Standard Phonography, not in- 
 cluded in specification III. 
 
 VIII. By using a large hook on Em, En, Ray for I. 
 
 This principle obviates many inconvenient forms of the Old Pho- 
 nography, 
 
 IX. By enlarging the small El-hook t add r, and the Ar-hook to 
 r,dcl I. 
 
CO SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC IJEADEB. 
 
 This new principle secures a great advantage over the Old Phonog- 
 raphy in respect of brevity, analogy, and distinctions. 
 
 X. By enlarging Brief Way and Yay. 2G2 and L'('K>. Tin's new- 
 principle renders easy the writing of many phrases which by the Old 
 Phonography were written slowly and with comparative difficulty 
 such expressions, for instance, as the following: "If we cannot do 
 what we would, let us do what we can ;" "We were with difficulty ;" 
 "What were you thinking?" "What you would;" "What you 
 were;" "You were;" "You would." See Odds and End*, page 1 U8. 
 
 XI. By frequently prefixing you by a Yuh-hook, and by frequently 
 joining we by the Way-hook, even to certain straight lines. P. 107, 
 11. 2 ; p. 108, R. 3. 
 
 This partially new principle also obviates in many cases the slow- 
 ness and difficulty of writing phrases which are spoken with groat 
 rapidity; such as, "We can," "we cannot," "we give," "we may 
 be," "you do," "you do not," "if yon choose," "if you desire," 
 "if you wish," "if we can," "if we cannot." 
 
 By this principle many such phrases can be written much faster 
 than in the Old Phonography. See, in the Standard-Phonographic 
 Dictionary, the phrases beginning with Have you, If you, If u-c, Are you, 
 Because you, Because zee, Can we, Can you, Could you, Shall you, May you, 
 You do. 
 
 XII. By lengthening the straight lines to add tlir (and by the ad- 
 vanced reporter sometimes to add tr, dr), and trebling them to add 
 thrt/ir ; and also by lengthening Ing and the other curves to add dhr 
 there, their, they are, they were, other. See DIIR in the Standard- 
 Phonographic Dictionary. All this was devised by the Author, with 
 the exception of lengthening the curves to add there, their, and they 
 are. 
 
 The new part of this principle makes a great gain over the Old 
 Phonography. 
 
 XIII. By expressing dhr (=thcir, there, they are, they were, other; 
 see DHR in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary) by a heavy tick 
 (272) when it cannot be more conveniently expressed otherwise. This 
 frequently gains considerably over the Old Phonography. 
 
 XIV. By the frequent expression of all or u-ill by an El -hook or }>y 
 enlarging an Ar-hook. This principle makes considerable gain over 
 the Old Phonography in many cases, by securing a condensed and 
 brief expression for many phrases which were written too slowly in 
 the Old Phonography, and by enabling the reporter to avail himself 
 
INTRODUCTION. 61 
 
 of other valuable principles, as in writing by all, Bel 1 ; by all its, Blets 1 ; 
 lyall thr, Beldher 1 ; by all (of) our, Bier 1 . 
 
 XV. By the frequent expression of are, were, or our by an Ar-hook, 
 or by enlarging an El-hook. This principle makes considerable gain 
 over the Old Phonography, by rendering possible a condensed and 
 brief expression for many phrases which were written too slowly in 
 the Old Phonography, and by securing the advantages of other prin- 
 ciples as in writing by our, Ber 1 ; by our other, Berdher 1 ; which are, 
 Cher 2 ; which were, Cher a ; ivhich are therefore, Chcrdherf- ; which arc had, 
 Cherd- ; which are of, Cherf- ; for all are (or our), Fler*. 
 
 XVI. By making it a general principle to add it, had, what, or would 
 (and occasionally, in the writing of the practiced reporter, at, out), by 
 shortening a letter. This very frequently makes a great gain over tho 
 Old Phonography. See phrases tinder it, had, what, would, at, out, in 
 the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, especially postpositive phrases 
 (that is, phrases in which the words in question are added to other 
 words-). 
 
 XVII. By tising the Ef-hook on curves, both to express simple/ or v, 
 and to express have, ever, fore (sometimes for-th), of, and the affixes f al- 
 ly-ness. This method frequently makes a considerable gain over the 
 Old Phonography. For example : Lef-Kend, loving kindness ; Nef-Get, 
 naviijatc ; Dlief-, tluy have; Emdhevf 2 , may there ever, or may therefore 1 ; 
 Es'eP, uscful-ly-ness. 
 
 XVIII. By frequently adding than to comparatives by an En-hook, 
 as in writing more than, Mern 2 ; older than, Laydhcrn 2 ; longer than, Ing- 
 dhern 3 ; better than, Bet 2 -Ren. This principle frequently makes a great 
 gain over the Old Phonography. 
 
 XIX. By omitting to a greater extent than in the Corresponding 
 Style words which may be supplied ; as in writing more than one, Mer 2 - 
 Wen ; over and above, Ver'-Bee-Vce ; from place to place, Pels 2 - Pels ; from 
 time to time, Tee':Tee'; in connection with, En^Kayshon 2 . 
 
 XX. By the uses of the mode of expressing repetitions explained in 
 the Compendium, 276. This principle is very valuable to the repor- 
 ter, because the repetitions for the expression of which it provides arc 
 usually spoken with such rapidity that it was at least very difficult to 
 report them by the Old Phonography. See an instance of this on pager 
 20 of this Picader, line 17, where Standard Phonography gains over the 
 Old Phonography in writing what would be spoken in two seconds 
 seven strokes and three liftings of the pen. 
 
62 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 XXI. By the extensive use of phrase-writing. See and carefully 
 study the Compendium from 244-240 inclusive, and the following 
 Exhibit, or Chart, of Phonographic Phrase-Writing. 
 
 The following rather inelegant yet forcible statement of the advan- 
 tages of phrase-writing is commended to the reader's attention : 
 
 " Phraseography is of special importance to the reporter. Whatever 
 may be the amount of his practice, the reporter will sometimes find 
 himself engaged in a chase with the speaker ; [.] it is then that the 
 use of this principle will be felt and appreciated, [;] for [,] perhaps a 
 single convenient phraseograph [phraseogram] will bring him, as with 
 a bound, close \ip to the speaker." 
 
 \i Standard Phonography, by its new principles of writing, indepen- 
 dent of its peculiar powers of phrase- writing, renders the spectacle of 
 "a chase with the speaker" far less necessary than with the Old Pho- 
 nography ; and, by furnishing in abundance those convenient phrase- 
 signs which "bring the writer, as with a bound, close up to the speak- 
 er," and which in the Old Phonography were frequently absent when 
 most needed, enables the reporter to keep pace with the speaker, and 
 places the reporting ability within the reach of thousands who other- 
 wise could not attain it. 
 
 Standard Phonography, by many of its new principles, greatly facil- 
 itates phrase-writing ; and it is fully adapted to the easy expression of 
 frequent and rapidly-spoken phrases of ordinary speaking, which by 
 the Old Phonography were often written with great comparative slow- 
 ness. Many phrases are of frequent occurrence in public speaking, 
 especially if extemporaneous, which rarely occur in books ; and a sys- 
 tem of shorthand, when applied to the writing of the language of 
 elaborate compositions, might seem sufficiently rapid for reporting 
 purposes, and yet prove very deficient or fail entirely when applied to 
 actual reporting. Any one who will observe the wonderful phraseo- 
 graphic power of Standard Phonography, as exhibited in the exercises 
 In this work, must see that it is greatly superior to any other system. 
 of shorthand, and that it is fully adequate to the requirements of ac- 
 tual reporting, 
 
63 
 
 EXHIBIT 
 
 OF 
 
 REPORHNG-STYLE POSITION. 
 
 [From the Student's Journal, Volume 4, August, 1875.] 
 
 DISTINCT-OUTLINE WORDS 
 
 Usually in the Corresponding-Style Position ; 
 
 OTHER WORDS 
 
 In FIRST, SECOND, or THIRD position, according to 
 Accented Vowel (Hand-Book Comp., 257-9) ; 
 
 EXCEPT FOK DISTINCTION'S SAKE (261) 
 
 I. UNCONTRACTED WORDS : 
 
 A. MOST FREQUENT WORDS in the Corresponding- 
 
 Style Position. 
 
 B. DISTINGUISHED WORDS in Other positions : 
 
 1. Either Arbitrarily; 
 
 2. According to Ordinary Accent ; 
 
 3. Or According to the Distinguishing, or Con- 
 
 trasting, Accent. 
 
 II. CONTRACTED WORDS : 
 
 According to Note 2 on page 136 of Second 
 Reader* i. e., Derivatives with contractions 
 of same form as Primitives, are to keep posi- 
 tion assigned the Primitives. 
 
SECOND STANDAnD-PHONOGItAPHIC READER, 
 
 As derivative word-signs generally keep the 
 primitive form ill its position. See Haud- 
 Book, 261, Rein. 2f (copied on next page). 
 
 J8@"Tlie position of the Primitive, and of the Deriva- 
 tive with primitive form as a contraction, to be 
 that of the Corresponding Style, UNLESS distinction 
 requires a different position, as it does in several 
 cases cited in Note (6)*, page 154 of the Second 
 Reader, which is, for convenience of the reader, 
 copied below. 
 
 (i). Generally, in Standard Phonography, when the same sigft 
 (stands for a primitive word and one or more derivatives, some or all 
 of them being contracted, that sign is written in the proper or assigned 
 position of the primitive, whatever may be the accented vowel (i.e., 
 the proper position) of the derivatives ; thus Es'-Em, assimilate-d-ion; 
 Plent 3 , plant-ed-(er)-ation ; Kay-Pee-, capacious-ty ; Dee'-Klen, de- 
 cline-able-ation ; Dees 5 -Pet, despot-ic-ical-ically ; Dee--Men, diminish- 
 ed-ution; Dee 3 -Men, admonish-ed-ition ; Dee'-Men, dom'inate-d-tion- 
 nt ; Kays 2 -Enter, eccentric-al-ity ; Kays-'-Kel, exclaim-ed, cxclama- 
 tion-tory ; Fels*-P>ee, flexible-ility ; Fer'-Jed, frigid-ity ; Jay-'-Ger. geo- 
 graphy-ical-er ; Pee'-Kret, hypocrite-ical ; En-Dren 1 , indoctrinate-d- 
 ion ; En-Sper', inspire-ation : Ent'-Ket, intellect-ual-ity ; Ent'-Med, 
 intimidate-d-ion ; En-Vet 1 , invite-d-ation ; Em-Jay 3 , majesty-ic ; Em- 
 Thed a , method- ic-ical, Methodism; Em-Thcdst 2 , Methodist-ic-ical ; 
 Fet'-Ger, photography-ic-ist-er ; Pers'-Pet, precipitatc-d-ion ; Eay-- 
 Fet, refnte-d-ation ; Ray'-Pct, repeat-ed, repetition ; Piay 3 -Pet, repTite- 
 d-ation ; Eaj r2 -Ped. rapid-ity-ly. (c.) This general principle corre- 
 sponds to the general rule of position applying to derivative 
 word-signs. See Hand-Book, 2G1, Pi. 2. It serves to distinguish 
 many contracted outlines, which by the general rule of position would 
 occupy the same position, and hence be undistinguished except by 
 meaning (or the context). (d.) The suggestiveness (i.e., legibility) 
 of contractions for derivative words is favored by placing them in the 
 position of the primitive ; for, the primitive word being first read or 
 suggested, that and the context will at once indicate what derivative 
 is to be employed. For instance. Em-Thed- will easily be read as, or 
 suggest, method; and (hat, if it be not the required word, will suggest, 
 
INTRODUCTION. 65 
 
 in connection with the context, the proper word for the place, name- 
 ly, methodic, methodical, methodically, or Methodism, (e). When the prop- 
 er position of a primitive word and that of the derivative words would 
 he different, as of Refute ( 3 ) and Refutation (-), and the corresponding- 
 style position of the two words would he the same, they are hoth 
 placed in that position (as Ray 3 -Fet, refute-d-atiori) , unless a different 
 position is required for distinction's sake ; as Ray 3 -Pet, repute-d-ation, to 
 distinguish these words from Ray*-Ped, rapid-ly, rapidity (which is in 
 conformity with the rule), and Ray'-Pet, repeat-ed, repetition. 
 
 fREM. 2. Derivatives Following the Position of the Primitive. Legibility 
 demands that in most cases a primitive word-sign depending consid- 
 erably on position for legibility, should, when a formative sign is add- 
 ed, retain its position, without regard to the general rule ; hence, 
 Net'-, nature Net '-El, not Net-.E7 2 , natural; Preft 1 , prophet Preft 1 - 
 Kay, not Preft --K&y, prophetic ; Ken 2 , question A'en'-'-Bee, not Ken- 
 Bee-, questionable. 
 
 POSITION OF WORDS IN THE DICTIONARY. 
 
 Word-Positions are noted in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, 
 according to paragraph 45 on page 9 of its Introduction ; where it is 
 said : "The position of a form is generally left to he determined by 
 the rules of position, except in case of word-signs, contractions, and 
 phrase-signs." Of course, if one is writing in Corresponding style, 
 he applies the Corresponding-style rules of position (Hand-Book, 
 52, 58, 209, 219) ; and when one is writing in the Reporting, he should 
 apply the Reporting-style rules of position (256-261), as presented 
 in the preceding Exhibit of Reporting-Style Position. 
 
66 SECOND STANDAKD-rnONOGEAPHIC 
 
 EXHIBIT. 
 
 PHONOGRAPHIC PHRASE- 
 WRITING 
 
 TREATS OF THE JOINING OF WORDS. 
 
 A. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 
 
 L UNTECHNICAL STATEMENT: 
 
 GENERALLY join words related in a clause or 
 sentence ; that is, make the written pln-ases 
 correspond to ,<^>eec/i-phrases ; as, I-told-him- 
 ihat; as-soon-as-possible; enter-upon; if-you- 
 can-do-so ; 
 
 EXCEPT 
 
 1. Of course, when tlie junction is impossible; 
 
 as do-not care; most words ; gave them. 
 
 2. "When the junction is inconvenient; as 
 
 1. Because of too great length : 
 
 a. Above the line. 
 
 b. Below the line. 
 
 c. Horizontally. 
 
 2. Because of confusing succession of 
 
 signs : as, in-many-names ; which is 
 better written in many-names. 
 
 3. When ambiguity would result. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 67 
 
 4. When obvious PAUSES intervene ; as 
 
 a. Separating an expression of circum- 
 
 stance : time, manner, purpose, or- 
 der, etc. ; as, at-that-time, I thought ; 
 in-the-first-place [En-EP-Pel], I-will- 
 say ; secondly, I-will-state. 
 
 b. Separating a direct address, or ex- 
 
 planatory term : Go, Thomas ; Jose- 
 phus, the historian. 
 
 c. In various other cases ; as of pause 
 
 before a strongly emphasized word, 
 etc. 
 
 IL TECHNICAL STATEMENT : 
 
 That is, using grammatical and rhetorical terms. 
 This is convenient in teaching students well versed in 
 grammar and rhetoric. See Technical Statement in the 
 Hand-Book, 242-6. 
 
 B. SPECIAL PRINCIPLES. 
 
 I. Lapping may be used instead of joining ; as, told: 
 
 it; could:get ; so t :much 3 ; chit l :chat. 
 
 II. Other means of facilitating Phrase-writing : 
 
 1. Omitting letters and words ; as, bes[t]-way; one- 
 
 [of the] -most ; upo [ n ] -one-side. 
 
 2. Implications ; as by nearness, under, fourth-posi- 
 
 tion, etc. 
 
 3. Special phrase-writing. 
 
 This Glance, or Chart, of Phrase- Writing was first presented in the 
 Author's Phonographic Visitor, Vol. IV., in the number for May 2, 1870. 
 The Glance principle, or Chart-like presentation of a logical (or natu- 
 ral) analysis of a subject, is one of the most effective modes of instruc- 
 tion. It is a valuable characteristic of the Author's SYNOPSIS op 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. A Logical Analysis of a subject is most easily 
 understood ; and a Chart-like, or Outline, presentation of the same, 
 impresses it strongly on the memory, calling in aid (as it does) the 
 faculties of Form, Size, Number, Locality, and Order, 
 
G8 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOQKAPHIC KEADEB. 
 
 PHRASE-SIGN POSITION. 
 
 I. USUALLY, First sign in proper position, and others 
 
 following without regard to position. See Hand- 
 Book, p. 156. 
 
 II. SOMETIMES, Second sign in proper position, with preced- 
 
 ing adapted ; as, in-those 3 ; I-think?; I-thank?; and-if; 
 and-at 3 ; his-own 3 (is l -no); as-?/ 1 ; as-feiv s ; as-that\ See 
 Hand-Book, p. 128. 
 
 WORD-DISTINCTIONS. 
 
 Words of similar or different meanings, and containing 
 the same consonants, are distinguished 
 
 I. By difference in the mode of representing the 
 first consonant ; as, Rays-Let, resolute ; Ar- 
 Slet, irresolute; Lay-Kay, like; El-Kay, 
 alike. 
 
 H. By some other difference of outline ; as, Em- 
 der-Tee, moderate; Mod-Ret 1 , immoderate; 
 Ket 1 , quite; Kay-Tee, quiet; Kayst, cost; 
 Kays-Dee 1 , caused. 
 
 III. By difference in position ; as, Per'-Met, per- 
 mit (the most frequent word generally in cs 
 position, as here) ; PerVMet, prompt: Per'- 
 Met, promote (where the word is out of le- 
 gitimate position, for distinction's sake}. 
 
 IV. By the vocalization of one or more of the 
 words to be distinguished ; as, Em 2 -Gret, 
 emigrate: En^-Gret, migrate; lEn^-Gret, 
 immigrate. 
 
 t& See list of words distinguished in the Hand-Book, 
 p. 195-8. 
 
KEY 
 
 TO THE 
 
 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 ANCIENT AND MODERN PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 3 TUB end which the great Lord Bacon proposed to himself was 
 the multiplying 2 of human enjoyments 3 and the mitigating 
 
 PAGE 
 
 31 to himself. P. 130, R. 2. The caution of this Remark " Provided, that 
 the word so written would not be liable to be mistaken for some other word in the 
 third position" may be complied with in respect of horizontals by writing them 
 (iis always in this revised edition of the Second Reader), for the FOURTH position 
 ((. e., to imply to), close against the lower edge of the line ; while third-position 
 Kigns, slanting or perpendicular, are best written through the line, except put, 
 about, doubt (written below and free from the line), to put about (or remove) doubt. 
 The FOURTH position is so designated, because it was the fourth in the histor- 
 ical order of development. It was unknown to the Old Phonography, (b). An 
 initial hook, circle or loop, on an ascending letter, may be written in the fourth 
 position, to imply a preceding to ; as, Iss'-Lay-Vee, to solve; WehJ-Rea, to [the or 
 ] workman; Ses'-Ray, to Cicero. 
 
 2 multiplying of human enjoyments. Jlelt^ as a word-sign for multiply- 
 ied, multitude, is nearly three times as fast as the old forms, Em-Let-Pel, Em-Let- 
 Pled, Em-Let-Ted. This gain is, of course, dependent upon the new principle of 
 writing a large initial hook on Em, En, Ray, for I. Experience shows that a largo 
 initial hook may be written as readily at least as a large final one. The Old Pho- 
 nography prohibited the shortening of a large-hook letter, but there was no suf- 
 ficient reason for such prohibition. The shortening of large-hook letters obviates 
 many difficult or needlessly long outlines of the Old Phonography, and consti- 
 tutes one of the valuable and characteristic features of Standard Phonography. 
 (6). A little practice will show any one who may think that a large initial hook is 
 difficult, that it is so for just the same reason that the making of a Pee or Gay is 
 difficult to the beginner namely, that it is new. 
 
 3 of human enjoyments. The implying of O/by writing the following word 
 near the preceding, which is a novel feature of Standard Phonography, secures 
 
 69 
 
70 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 of human sufferings. The ancient 4 philosophy disdained to he 1 * use- 
 ful, 6 and was 7 content** to be stationary. 9 It dealt largely in theories 
 of moral perfection, 1 " which were so" sublime, that they never could 
 be 12 more than 13 theories ; in attempts to solve 14 insoluble enigmas, 
 
 the advantage of leaving the following word in its proper position, and thus 
 adding to legibility, as well for this cause as by usually securing a different in- 
 dication of /and Of at the beginning of phrase-signs. "Of human enjoyments" 
 expressed by the Old Phonography, Petoid'-Meu-En-Jay-Ments, not only requires 
 an additional stroke and angle (for angles of themselves consume time, and must 
 be taken into account), but human must be brought out of its proper (third) po- 
 Eition, and, of course, its legibility somewhat impaired. 
 
 * ancient. See Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, under ANCIENT. The 
 Old-Phonographic outline for this word was En-Shayut. 
 
 5 disdained to be. 250, 2. The implying of to by the principle of this refer- 
 ence is, at a general principle, a new feature of Standard Phonography. Its value 
 will be better understood as we proceed. The principles of implying of and to 
 have saved, in the first line of this exercise, three strokes and one lifting. 
 
 6 useful. See p. 01, xvii. of this Reader. 
 
 7 and was. The plan of joining and by either a perpendicular or horizontal 
 tick was introduced by the author. The rule of the Old Phonography was that 
 and might be joiued by a horizontal tick only, and only in the Reporting Style. 
 Of course, the writing of such phrases as and wot, and to, and many other phrases, 
 required the lifting of the pen where it is now obviated. 
 
 * content. Con- is here implied by writing Tent under Zee. P. 112, R. 7, 6. 
 9 stationary. See Odds and Ends, p. 18G, "The Shon and Tiv Hooks." 
 
 M moral perfection. 175 ; 215. See p. 59, ix. of this Reader. 
 
 11 -which were so. See p. 60, xv. of this work. The principle I mean much 
 more than exceptional practice or single instance of expressing are or were by an 
 Ar-hook, is a novel feature of Standard Phonography ; and so also, consequent- 
 ly, the method of distinguishing between which are, which, were ; such, are, such 
 were, etc. The phrase which were so would have been written by the Old Phonog- 
 raphy Chay2 Weh2 Es2 ; i. e., would have required one character and two liftings 
 of the pen more than the Standard-Phonographic expression. 
 
 12 that they never could be. 245. The advantage of a good word-sign or 
 contraction is not simply in the saving of strokes, but also in securing greater 
 powers of phrase-writing. To illustrate the Standard-Phonographic word-sign 
 for never not only saves in this instance one of the slowest kind of strokes (a 
 heavy curve), but also secures a phrase-sign here which otherwise would have 
 been impossible. 
 
 is more than. See p. 01, xviii. of this Reader. 
 
 M to solve. According to instruction in note on the preceding page, Note, 
 1, (b) the initial circle on Lay is written in the fourth position that is, closo 
 against the lower edge of the line to imply a preceding to. 
 
KEY TO THE RETORTING EXERCISES. 71 
 
 in exhortations to the attainment 15 of unattainable frames of mind. 16 
 It could not condescend to the humble office of ministering 16 to the 
 comfort of human beings. 17 All the schools regarded w that office as 
 degrading, some censured it as immoral/Once, indeed, Posidonius, 
 a distinguished writer of the age of Cicero 19 and Caesar, so far forgot 
 himself as to enumerate among the humbler 20 blessings which man- 
 kind owed to philosophy, the discovery of the principle of the arch, 
 and the introduction of the use of metals. This eulogy 81 was consid- 
 
 15 to the attainment. A distinction should be made between supplying 
 and implying. In this phrase, only to is implied ; but whether a-n or the follows 
 the to or not is a matter to be determined by reference to the context. The, in 
 this phrase, therefore, is to be supplied. 250, 3. (6). The Standard-Phonographic 
 Fourth position corresponds nearly to the Latin dative-case form, which implied 
 nearly always our to, leaving the sense of our a-n or the to be understood if re- 
 quired. If this case answered in the use of the Latin language for many centu- 
 ries, it may be assumed that the corresponding device in Standard Phonography 
 is equally safe. 
 
 10 frames of mind. See p. 59, vi. This novel principle of the Standard- 
 Phonographic reporting style implying OF by nearness, and leaving a-n or the to 
 be supplied if required, corresponds nearly to the Latin genitive-case form, which 
 implied nearly always our to, leaving the sense of our a-n or Vie to be understood 
 if required. If this case answered in the use of the Latin language for many 
 centuries, it may be assumed that the corresponding device in Standard Phonog- 
 raphy is equally safe. This principle for implying of, and that for implying to, 
 are by far too advantageous to be lightly dispensed with. Fully one-fifth of the 
 labor of writing Of (a-n or Hie) and To (a-n or the) as in the Old-Phonographic style 
 is saved by these two beautiful principles devised by the Author. 
 
 1' to the comfort of human beings. Observe how beautifully and ad- 
 vantageously the two principles spoken of in the two preceding notes combine 
 here : to (the) being disposed of by the fourth position, and of by writing human 
 near. The Old style for this expression would have been Petoid 2 Chetoid [to tlie} 
 EP-Ret Petoidi [of] Men 3 -Bee-Ings. 
 
 is regarded. See p. 59, vii. of this Reader. 
 
 19 Cicero. The plan of writing a large initial circle was first presented in 
 the Hand-Book. It makes an average saving of 14 per cent, (see Hand-Book, Part 
 V., 9) over the Old-Phonographic way of writing the syllables sys, sus, etc., in 
 such words as system, sustain, Sicily, Cicero, Ccesar ; besides adding to the power 
 of phrase-writing, and, in many cases, securing greater analogy or convenience 
 of form. For example, consistent, Ses-Tent 1 ; inconsistent or in consistent, Enses- 
 Tent 1 (Old Phonography, Eni Iss-Est-Ent) ; sustain, Ses-Ten 2 ; in sustaining, Eu- 
 Bes-TenVing' ; suspect (reporting style), Ses-Pee 2 (Old Phonography, Es-Spee-Ket) ; 
 unsuspecting, Enses-Pee 2 :'ing.' 
 
 20 humbler. 175. See p. 59, ix. of thia Reader. See, also, p. 186 of Odds and 
 nds. 
 
 21 eulogy. The plan of joining Brief Way and Tay as simply w and y is a 
 novel and valuable feature of Standard Phonography, securing legibility in many 
 
72 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 ercd as an affront, 22 and was taken up with proper spirit. Seneca ve- 
 hemently disclaims these insulting compliments. Philosophy, accord- 
 ing to him, 23 has nothing to do with teaching men to rear arched 
 roofs over their heads. "The true philosopher does not cure whether 
 he has an arched roof, or any roof. Fhilosophy/ius nothing to do 
 with teaching men the uses of metals. 24 She teaches us 2 " 1 to be inde- 
 pendent of all material substances, 2J of all mechanical contrivances." 
 He labors to clear 27 Democritus from the disgraceful imputation of 
 
 cases where, to secure it in the Old Phonography, the to or y had to be written 
 in the vowel-place, necessitating a lii'ting of the pen which Standard Phonogra- 
 phy avoids. It is also valuable because of facilitating phrase-writing. 
 
 22 as an affront. The expression of a-n by a horizontal or perpendicular 
 tick was originated by the author. Its value is well illustrated in this little 
 phrase, in which two liftings of the pen, that would have been required by the 
 Old Phonography, are saved. 71. And is expressed in Standard Phonography 
 in the same way. 69, R. 2. Please see also Note 7, on p. 70 of this Reader. 
 
 23 according to him. In the Old Phonography, Kred 1 was given for accord- 
 ing or according to, and Nerd 1 for in order or in order to. This is an absolute proof 
 that the plan of implying to, even by joining the following to the preceding 
 word, was not a.principle of the Old Phonography. In Standard Phonography 
 there is no lame and exceptional method of meeting an acknowledged necessity 
 (namely, of getting rid, so far as possible, of writing the frequent to) ; but the 
 Gordian knot is cut by implying to in accordance with a principle. See p. 59, v. 
 of this Reader. Notice the application of this principle in the very next phrase, 
 " has nothing to do," which would very probably have been written by any one 
 of the publishers of the Old Phonography, Iss 2 En-Ith 2 -Ing Petoid--Dee, i.e., with 
 two strokes and two liftings of the pen more than are required by Standard Pho- 
 nography. 
 
 -' men the uses of metals. The, when not connected closely with the 
 preceding word, is usually, in the author's practice, expressed by the dot ; 
 though it is allowable to join it to the following word, by a slanting tick, on the 
 line as the best position. See THE in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 For instance, " the uses" here might have been written Chetoid 2 -Es-Iss, or Ret- 
 oid'--Es-Iss. 
 
 2: ' teaches us. The principle of joining us by a circle or by enlarging a circle 
 is a novel and valuable feature of Standard Phonography. P. 18:2, R. 2 It very 
 frequently is nearly equivalent to saving entirely the expression of us, and often 
 amounts to more, by saving the lifting of the pen. 
 
 26 of all material substances. The advantage of the novel Standard-Pho- 
 nographic principle of adding all by an El-hook to the vowel-dashes among other 
 signs, is partially illustrated in this case. Without it, there would be required 
 after making o/^Petoid 1 ) the lilting of the pen and the making of the heavy dash, 
 Bedoid 1 (for all). The same gain is repeated in tho very next phrase. See Stand- 
 ard-Phonographic Dictionary, under OF ; and p. GO, xiv. in this Reader. 
 
 -' he labors to clear. To is hero meant to bo implied by writing Klcr in 
 the fourth position. 2CO, 6. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 73 
 
 having made the first arch, and Anacharsis from the charge of having 23 
 contrived the potter's-wheel. The business of these philosophers was 
 to declaim in praise of poverty, with two millions sterling out at us- 
 ury ;* 9 to meditate epigrammatic conceits 30 about the evils of luxury, 
 in gardens which moved the envy of sovereigns ; to rant about liber- 
 ty, while fawning on the insolent and pampered freedmen oya ty- ^ 
 rant ; to celebrate the 31 divine beauty of virtue with the same pen 
 which had just before written a defense of the murder of a mother by a 
 son. From the cant of this philosophy, a philosophy meanly proud 
 of its own unprofitableness, it is delightful to turn to the lessons of 
 the great English teacher. The philosophy which he taught was 
 essentially new. Its object was the good of mankind, in the sense in 
 which the mass of mankind always have understood, and always will 
 understand, the word good. The aim of the Platonic philosophy was 
 to exalt man/into a god. The aim of the Baconian philosophy was 
 to provide man with what he requires, 32 while he continues to be a 
 man. Th aim of the Platonic philosophy 33 was to raise us far above 
 vulgar wants. The aim of the Baconian philosophy 33 was to supply 
 our vulgar wants. The former aim was noble ; but the latter was 
 attainable. Ask the follower of Bacon what the new philosophy, as 
 it was called in the time of Charles the Second, 31 has effected for man- 
 kind, and his answer is ready. It has lengthened life ; it has miti- 
 
 28 of having. It is better in this case to add having by the hook and dot 
 than to imply o/and write Vee and the dot. 
 
 29 out at usury. See p. 61, xvi. of this Reader. 
 
 30 epigrammatic conceits. Generally, in the Reporting Style, the Kay of 
 the termination Met-Kay may bo omitted. Con- of conceit* is implied by writing 
 under. 
 
 31 to celebrate the. The circle is in the fourth position, to imply a pre- 
 ceding to. 
 
 32 with what he requires. 2G2. See, also, p. GO, x. of this Reader. 
 
 S3 "Platonic Philosophy" and "Baconian Philosophy." This exerciso 
 is a good illustration of progressive contractions. The first time a rather slowly- 
 written phrase or word occurs, it may be written without contraction ; but if it 
 should occur again, and the reporter should anticipate its recurrence, he may 
 contract it to some extent. If it should occur frequently, he may contract it inoro 
 and more until the utmost brevity has been attained. Such are special contrac- 
 tions. If I were reporting a lecture in which I anticipated the frequent occur- 
 rence of the phrases, " Platonic philosophy " and " Baconian philosophy," I 
 should probably write Pel-Fel, or even Plcf, for the former, and Bee-Fel, or even 
 Bef, for the latter. Be sure to read, in this connection, Compendium, 237, R. 2. 
 
 M Charles the Second. When several Es-sounds occur together, one or 
 more may be omitted to secure the advantage of a phrase-sign. P. 191, R. 8. 
 
74 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 gated 3 ' 1 pain ; it has extinguished/diseases ; it lias increased the fertil- 
 ity of the soil ; it has given new securities to the mariner ; it lias 
 spanned great rivers and estuaries with bridges, of form unknown to 
 our fathers ; 3ti it has guided the 
 
 4 thunderbolt innocuously from heaven to earth ; it lias lighted 
 up the night with the splendor of the day ; it has extended 
 the range of the human vision ; it has rmiltiplied the power 1 of the 
 human muscles ; it has accelerated motion ; it has annihilated dis- 
 tance ; it has facilitated intercourse, correspondence, all friendly of- 
 fices, all dispatch of business ; it has enabled man to descend to the/ 
 depths of the sea ; to soar into the air ; 2 to penetrate securely into 
 the noxious recesses 3 of the earth, to traverse the land on cars which 
 whirl along without horses, and the ocean in ships which sail against 
 the wind. These are but a part of its 4 fruits, and of its first fruit. 
 For, it is a philosophy which never rests, which is never perfect. Its 
 law is progress. A point, which was yesterday invisible, is its goal 
 to-day, and will be its starting-post io-mo\ro\v./ Edinburgh Review. 
 
 ' 
 
 mitigated. P. 168, R. 8 ; p. 59, vii. of this Reader. This novel principle 
 Of Standard Phonography is of such frequent application that even if the gain 
 effected by it in each instance were slight, it would in the course of a siugle 
 hour's reporting save a great many strokes, and also many liftings of the pen, 
 in writing both words and phrases. 
 
 36 to our fathers. Pretoid- for to our is quicker than Ar<. It is also more 
 legible, and more easy to join in phrases. 
 
 - j i power. Power being a rather frequent word, it is well to write it Pee- 1 - 
 Qt Bay instead of Pee-Ar, so as to secure the greater speed of the straight 
 line for r, and also so that the analogous form, Pee^-Ref, may be used for the de- 
 rivatives powerful-ly-ncss. To write power with Pee-Ar and powerful with Pee-Ref 
 would be a confusing change of outline. 
 
 2 into the air. If this were occurring frequently, I should write it En-Tee- 
 (a)Ar. 
 
 3 noxious recesses. In the Reporting Stylo of Standard Phonography, 
 words ending in the sounds slnis-li-nes, are usually contracted, the contraction 
 ending with Ish ; and if the word should be long, and less of the word would 
 suffice to characterize it, even more may be cut off; as in Pren 1 , pernicious-ly- 
 ness. 
 
 > but a pai't of its. This phrase is but one of thousands of instances in 
 which the novel characteristics of Standard Phonography combine to effect a 
 great gain over the Old Phonography. This phrase in the Old Phonography 
 would have been written Tetoid" a 8 (heavy dot) Pee 2 -Ret Petoidi-Tees, niuo 
 strokes and liftings of the pen. This phrase in Standard Phonography requires 
 only four strokes, i.e., it is twice as fast aa the Old Phonographic expression. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 75 
 
 LOGIC. 
 
 IN every instance in which we reason, 5 in the strict sense of the word, 
 t. e. , make 6 use of arguments, whether for the sake of refuting an ad- 
 versary, or of conveying instruction, or of satisfying our own minds 
 on any point, whatever may be the subject we are engaged on, a cer- 
 tain process takes place 11 in the mind, which is one and the same 7 in 
 all cases, provided it be correctly conducted. 
 
 Of course it cannot be supposed that every one is even conscknis of 
 this process in his own mind ; much less, is competent to explain the 8 
 principles on/which it proceeds. This indeed is, and cannot but be, 
 the case with every other process respecting which any system has 
 been formed ; the practice not only may exist independently of the 
 theory, but must have preceded the 9 theory. There must have been 
 Language before a system of Grammar 1 ' 1 could be devised ; and musi- 
 cal compositions, previous to the science of Music. This, by the way, 
 will serve to ercpose the futility 11 of the popular objection against 
 Logic, that men may reason very well who know nothing of it. The 
 parallel instances adduced show that such an objection might be ap- 
 
 6 we reason. P. 168, R. 3, 6. 
 
 make. The full forms for make and take are too long for the Reporting 
 Style ; they are, therefore, provided in Standard Phonography with word-signs 
 Em2, make ; Tee 2 , talce (Tee :t , took). See phrases beginning with MAKE and TAKK 
 in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 7 which is one and the same. The is omitted here as the impediment to 
 securing a phrase-sign for a frequent phrase one and the same. Remove the im- 
 pediments is a good rule in making contractions and phrase-signs. 
 
 'to explain the. The plan of omitting Kay in many such words as ex- 
 plain, explore, expend, etc., is a novel and valuable characteristic of Standard Pho- 
 nography. It not only saves a stroke, but in many cases avoids a difficult junc- 
 tion within the word, and facilitates joining with other words. 
 
 9 but must have preceded the. See 249 ; and especially 250, 3. 
 
 19 before a system of Grammar. See remark under ABOVE in the Stand- 
 ard-Phonographic Dictionary. This phrase illustrates the advantage of the re- 
 porter's availing himself of every judicious expedient. This phrase could not 
 have been written without the use of three novelties of Standard Phonography, 
 namely, the tick for a, the word-sign for system (depending upon the new prin- 
 ciple of employing a large initial circle), and the principle of implying of by 
 joining. 
 
 11 futility. Many words ending in Uy are provided in Standard Phonogra- 
 phy with contractions by adding t by halving El, Lay, or an El-hook sign. This, 
 of course, saves a stroke and a half, and in most cases an angle. 
 
76 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 5. plied/in many other cases, where its 14 absurdity would be obvious; 
 and that there is no ground for deciding thence, either that the sys- 
 tem has no tendency to improve practice, or that even if it had not, 
 it might not still he a dignified and interesting pursuit. 
 
 One of the chief impediments to the attainment of a just view of the 
 nature and object of Logic, is the not fully understanding, or not suf- 
 ficiently keeping in mind, the SAMENESS of the reasoning process in all 
 cases. If, as the ordinary mode of speaking would seem 13 to indicate, 
 
 A mathematical reasoning, and theologicaiyaud metaphysical, and po- 
 
 ^ litical, etc., were essentially different from each other, i. e., different 
 
 kinds of reasoning, it would follow, that supposing there could be at all 
 
 any such science, as we have described Logic, there must be so many 
 
 different species or at least different branches of Logic. 
 
 5 And such is perhaps the 1 most prevailing notion. Nor is this 
 much to be wondered at ; since it is evident to all, that some 
 men converse and write, in an argumentative way, very justly 2 on one 
 subject, 3 and very erroneously on another, in which again others ex- 
 
 12 where its. 221, R. 4. See, also, p. 63, xvi. of this Reader. 
 
 is would seem. (a). This phrase-sign closely resembles In-Sem ; but I have 
 never found any contusion arising from this. (b). Just as in the common or- 
 thography, when we know that a letter has several different powers, we readily 
 discover the correct power to assign it in the case presented, so in stenographic 
 matters we need apprehend no serious difficulty from different uses of the same 
 thing, or from slight differences between different things, so long as we are aware 
 of such different uses or close resemblances, unless, of course, the, law of legibility u too 
 much neglected, (c). When the same thing has different uses, or when things of 
 different uses or values are not readily distinguishable of themselves, the uses or 
 values must be so different that one could not reasonably be substituted for the other in 
 any case. (d). This principle saves the phrase sign Wuh-Sem ; for, the use or 
 value cannot, in any case, reasonably (i. e., so as to make sense) be substituted 
 for the use or value of In-Sem. Try it. (). This also saves Pretoid, Pletoid, 
 Peftoid, Pentoid, Kletoid, Keftoid, etc., from the objection that they too closely 
 resemble Pret, Plet, Peft, Pent, Klet, Kelt, etc., as thoroughly and completely as 
 it saves Petoid, Tetoid, Ketoid, Retoid, etc., from the precisely similar and no 
 less valid objection which, however, is not now made, though it was formerly 
 that they too much resembled Pet, Tet, Ket, Ret, etc. 
 
 51 and such is perhaps the. We here write together the words of the 
 speech-phrase, disjoining at the, because it will not easily join with most, 
 and in order to get a fresh impulse ; i.e., so as not to make the written phras* 
 inconvenient. See Phrase-Writing Exhibit, p. 66 of this Reader, A, I., Exc. 2. 
 
 2 justly. 237, R. 1, b; p. 1C8, R. 5. 
 
 3 on one subject. 250, 3, On. See p. 67 of this Reader, Special Principles, 
 IL; I, -- --- ,-- - 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 77 
 
 eel, who fail in th^nformer. This error may be at once illustrated 
 and removed, by considering the 4 parallel instance of Arithmetic, 5 in 
 which every one is aware that the process of a calculation is not af- 
 fected 3 by the nature of the objects whose numbers ais before us; 
 but that (e.g.) the multiplication of a number is the very same opera- 
 tion, whether it be a number of men, of miles, or of pounds ; though 
 nevertheless persons may perhaps be found who are accurate in calcu- 
 lations relative to natural philosophy, and incorrect in those of polit- 
 ical economy, from their different degrees of skill in the/subjects of 
 these two sciences ; not surely because there are 7 different arts of 
 arithmetic applicable to each of these respectively. 
 
 Others again, who are 8 aware that the simple system of Logic may 
 be applied to all subjects whatever, are yet disposed to view it as a 
 peculiar method of reasoning, and not, as it is, a method of unfolding 
 and analyzing our reasoning : whence many have been led 9 (e. g. , the 
 author of the Philosophy of Rhetoric) to talk of comparing Syllogis- 
 tic 10 reasoning with Moral reasoning ; taking it for granted" that it is 
 possible to reason correctly without reasoning logically -./which is, in 
 
 4 by considering the. The plan of implying ing preceding a-n or the, by 
 writing the latter in the place of the 'ing' -Hot, originated with the author. How 
 admirably it works, and how valuable it is, will be seen in the course of reading 
 the reporting exercises of this Reader. Isaac Pitman has proposed to use the 
 disjoined tick at the end to signify the rarely occurring ings. This plan sup- 
 poses the objection that ings written with a heavy dot cannot be distinguished 
 from ing written with a light dot. If this objection were valid in this case, it 
 would be equally valid against the whole Phonographic plan of heavy and light 
 dots for long and short vowels. See the same objection to the heavy dot for oc- 
 com, disposed of in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary under ACCOM. 
 
 5 arithmetic. See above, p. 3, note 30. 
 
 is not affected. The word-sign for is not is here adapted to the position 
 of affected for the sake of greater legibility. 246, 1. See this Reader, page 68, 
 Phrase-Sign Position, II. 
 
 7 because there are. 272 ; also p. 60, xiii. of this Reader. 
 
 8 who are. 178, R. 5 ; also p. 61, xv. of this Reader. See these notes, p. 4, 
 R. 13, e. 
 
 9 many have been led. 249. 
 
 10 syllogistic. Contractions for words ending in istic-al-ally are usually 
 formed in analogy with this contraction ; for example, Ker 2 -Kayst, characteris- 
 tic ; Thest 2 , atheist-ic-al. 
 
 11 taking it for granted. That we may have a written phrase for this fa- 
 miliar speech-phrase, we must omit the impediments, namely, the ing-dot and for. 
 Omit the ing-dot and shorten take (Tee 2 ), to add it, and then omit for (because it 
 cannot be joined to Tet 2 ) and then add granted (by Grent). See this Reader, p. 
 67, B, II., 1. - - - - 
 
78 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 fact, as gi-eat a blunder as if any one were to mistake grammar for a 
 peculiar language, and to suppose it possible to speak correctly with- 
 out speaking grammatically. They have, in short, considered Logic 
 as an art of reasoning ; whereas (so far as it is an art) it is the art of 
 reasoning ; the logician's object being, not to lay down principles by 
 which one may reason, but by which all must reason, even though 
 not distinctly aware of them 13 to lay down rules, not which may be 
 followed with advantage, but which cannot possibly be departed/' f 
 in sound reasoning. Whateley's Elements of Logic. 
 
 GEOLOGY. 
 
 THE manner in which the geologists have been able to restore the 
 history of the primeval earth, affords one of the most brilliant tri- 
 umphs of the human intellect. Chemistry, botany, mineralogy, and 
 physical geography 1 " 1 have all" 5 aided in unfolding this enigma ; but it 
 is 17 perhaps to comparative anatomy, which enables us to identify an 
 animal by a single bone that the principal merit is due. A laborer, 
 in blasting a limestone rock cr sinking a well, throws up a bone, 
 w r hich has been buried there 1S for millions of ages ; 13 it is looked upon 
 
 12 the. 69, R. 1. 
 
 13 aware of them. See p. 59, vi. of this Reader. 
 
 n departed from. 244, R. 3 (2). In this phrase, the peculiar Standard- 
 Phonographic principle of writing the present lor the past time whenever a 
 stroke or more can be saved thereby, not only saves a stroke and the difficult ob- 
 tuse angle formed by Per and Ted, but avoids the lifting of the pen which would 
 otherwise have been required. 
 
 1R and physical geography. The word physical written alone would not 
 be contracted ; and this contraction of it is to be regarded as falling under the 
 rule for special contractions. See these notes, p. 3, note 33. Words ending in 
 ography-ic-ical are usually provided with contractions ending in Ger, in analogy 
 wilh this contraction. See Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, under ADMON- 
 ISH-ED-ITION and APPREHENSIVE. 
 
 16 have all. 178, R. 4 ; and p. 62, xiv. of this Reader. See phrases begin- 
 ning with HAVE ALL in the Standard-Phonogi'aphic Dictionary. 
 
 17 but it is. This is distinguishable from Tees 3 both from the context and 
 from the fact that it commences slightly above the line, while one half of Tecs 1 ' 
 is above the line. This useful phrase-sign was first presented by the Hand- 
 Book. 
 
 i" which has been buried there. 2G4 ; and p. 62, xii. of this Reader. 
 19 for minings of ages. The Old Phonography was defective in not having 
 
6 
 
 KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 79 
 
 1 with wonder by the simple rustic, who/supposes that it must have 
 been there 20 ever since the flood ; but, to the eye of Cuvier, 21 that 
 bone suggests a whole animal, with all the conditions necessary for its 
 existence. The mastodon, the megatherium, the paleotherium, and 
 pterodactyl are thus restored to our natural history, 
 
 and live again in our literature. Nor is this all ; for, where 
 there arc no bones 1 to speak, the strata often contains the im- 
 press of their* former inhabitants. In a thin bed of clay, occurring 
 between two 3 beds of sandstone, this evidence is often preserved. The 
 ripple-mark, the worm-track, the scratching oy a small crab on the 
 sand, and even the impression of a raindrop, so distinct as to indicate 
 the direction of the wind at the time of the shower these, and the 
 footprints of the bird and reptile, are all stereotyped, and offer an 
 evidence which no argument can gainsay, no prejudice resist, con- 
 cerning the natural history of a very ancient period of the earth's 
 life. But the wave that made that ripple-mark has long ceased to 
 wash those shores. For ages has the surface then exposed been con- 
 cealed under great thicknesses of strata. The worm and the crab/ 
 have left no solid fragment to speak of their form or structure ; 4 the 
 bird has left no bone that has yet been discovered ; 4 the fragments of 
 
 provided any word-signs for the frequently occurring numerical denominations 
 liuudred-th, thousaud-th, million-th. 
 
 20 that it must have been there. This phrase can be rendered perfectly 
 distinct from must b& there, by writing Eins-Ben-Jedoid ; but as the context fur- 
 nishes sufficient distinction, I prefer this mode because more rapid, 
 
 21 but to the eye of Cuvier. Cuvier is pronounced kii-via ; u being sound 
 No. 29, and i sound No. 2 of the Extended Alphabet. P. 210, 25, No, 29 ; p. 206. 
 24, No. 29 ; p. 201, 2, 2 ; p. 202, 7. (6). This expression of these six words 
 gains three strokes and one lifting of the pen over tho Old-Phonographic ex- 
 pression. 
 
 6 1 where there are no bones. This speech-phrase might have differ- 
 ent representations. Proceeding in the Author's chosen way (1) Length- 
 t-n Wer 2 (where) to add there ; and (2) lap Ray for are ; (3) for greatest legibility, 
 disjoin no bones, writing the no in its position. 
 
 2 of their. Veedher 1 for ofthr, and Vet 1 for of it, are new and useful word- 
 signs introduced by the Hand-Book. 
 
 3 two. As numbers are usually written by figures, as 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, I find it 
 generally most convenient to write two in the same way ; and besides, Bedoid 2 is 
 not so distinct as 2 ; though, of course, in phrases, such as one or two, Wen 2 -Bed- 
 oid ; two or three, Bedoid 2 -Ther ; year or two, Yeh!-Bedoid ; the word-sign must 
 be used. 
 
 4 structure" and "discovered." The engraving, by presenting a larger 
 space than usual after these words, affords a good illustration of the manner of 
 
80 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 the reptile are small, imperfect, and extremely rare. Still, enough 
 is known to determine the fact ; and that fact is all the more inter- 
 esting and valuable from the very circumstance under which it is 
 Ansted. 3 G> 
 
 EVIDENCE OF THE CIRCULATION OF THE 
 BLOOD. 
 
 1. WITH the microscope, in the transparent parts of animals, the 
 blood can be seen in motion ; and if its course be attentively 5 ob- 
 served, its route may be clearly traced. 
 
 2. The membranes, termed valves, are so placed as to allow of the 
 freest passage to the blood in the circle described ; while they either 
 altogether prevent, or exceedingly impede, its movements fn any 
 direction. 
 
 3. The effect of a ligature placed around a vein and an artery, and 
 of a puncture made above the ligature in the one vessel and below it 6 
 in the other, demonstrates both the motion of the blood and the 
 course of it. When a ligature is placed around a vein, that part of 
 the vessel which is most distant from the heart becomes full and tur- 
 gid, on account of the accumulation of blood in it ; while the part of 
 the vessel which is between the ligature and the heart becomes empty 
 and flaccid, because it has carried on 7 its contents to the heart and it 
 can receive no fresh supply from the body. When, on the contrary, 
 a ligature is placed round an artery, that portion of the vessel which 
 lies between the ligature and the heart becomes full and turgid, and 
 the other portion empty and flaccid. This can only be 8 because the 
 contents of the two vessels move in opposite directions from the 
 
 writing by a good reporter, to indicate punctuation. By leaving little spaces, in 
 this way, corresponding to the pauses of the voice, the legibility of the writing 
 will be greatly increased ; for frequently the greatest difficulty in reading notes 
 arises from misapprehending the punctuation. 
 
 s attentively. 237, R. 1, b. 
 
 * below it. 221, B. * ; and p. 61, xvi. of this Reader. 
 
 7 because it has carried on. 171, 3. On is an adverbial modifier of car- 
 ried, and not a preposition to be joined to ttt. The advanced reporter might write 
 this phrase (because it has carnal on its contents) thus : Kays-Tees 2 -Krents:Tents. 
 
 8 this can only be. P. IG'J, R. 12. The En-hook is here omitted as an 
 impediment. 
 
KEY TO TfiE REPORTING EXERCISES. 81 
 
 heart to the artery, from the artery to the vein, and from the vein to 
 the heart. At the same time, if the vein be punctured above the lig- 
 ature, there will be little or no loss of blood ; while, if it be 
 punctured below the ligature, the blood will continue to flow until 
 the loss of it occasions death, which could not be unless the blood 
 were in motion, nor unless the direction of its course were from the 
 artery to the vein, and from the vein to the heart. 
 4. If fluids be injected into the veins or arteries, whether of the dead 
 
 Tor the living body, they readily make their way and fill the 1 ves- 
 sels, if thrown in the direction stated to be the natural course 
 of the circulation ; but they are strongly resisted if forced in the op- 
 posite direction. 
 
 Such is the description, and, with the exception of the first proof, 
 such the evidence of the circulation of the blood in the human body, 
 pretty much as it was given by the discoverer 2 of it, the illustrious 
 Harvey. Before the time of Harvey, a vague and indistinct concep- 
 tion that the blood was not without motion in the body had been 
 formed 3 by several anatomists. It is analogous to the ordinary mode 
 in which the human mind 4 arrives at discovery, that many minds 
 should have an imperfect perception of an unknown truth before 
 some one mind sees it in its completeness, .and fully discloses it. 
 Having about the year 1620' succeeded in completely tracing the cir- 
 
 9 there will be. 175 ; 178, B. 4, 6; p. 60, xiv. of this Reader. 
 
 7 1 and fill the. When the perpendicular tick is joined for a-n-d how is 
 it distinguished from or ? By this : A-n-d when it has to be joined by 
 Tetoid is joined in preference to or ; and or is disjoined when a-n-d has to be 
 written by Tetoid because the Ketoid will not join conveniently. 
 
 2 discoverer. P. 194, R. 7. 
 
 s had been formed. P. 169, R. 12. En-hook dropped because in the way; 
 see also Phrase-Writing Exhibit (p. 67 of this Reader), B, II., 1. 
 
 * human mind. Under principle just referred to we can facilitate our writ- 
 ing by omitting the n of human ; or, we can make a slight offset for the En-hook. 
 
 8 162O. Throughout these exercises I have given the common figures for 
 dates, instead of Phonographic numerals ; because if any one were not disposed 
 to make use of the Phonographic numerals, he need not be troubled to read 
 them ; but any one who has studied them may substitute them lor the figures ; 
 as for instance, Kays-Lay-Tee, for 1G20. 1 have sometimes, in order the better to 
 distinguish the Phonographic numerals, written a long Kay above the line, and 
 written the remainder of the date below ; thus, Kay 1 . Slay Tee=1620. This corre- 
 sponds to the longhand practice, which is sometimes followed in these exercises, 
 of placing a long stroke (which may be regarded as a long 1. though really tho 
 old-fashion apostrophe) before the concluding figures of a date. 
 
82 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 cle in which the blood moves, and having at that time collected all 
 the evidence of the fact, with a rare degree of philosophical forbear- 
 ance, Harvey still spent no less than eight years in re-examining the 
 subject and in maturing the proof of every point, before he ventured 
 to speak of it' in public. The brief tract which at length he published 
 was written with extreme simplicity, clearness, and perspicuity, and 
 has been justly characterized as one of the most admirable examples 
 of a series of arguments deduced from observation and experiment 
 that ever appeared on any subject. 
 
 Contemporaries are seldom grateful to discoverers. More than one 
 instance 7 is on record, in which a man has injured his fortune and 
 lost his happiness through the elucidation and establishment of a 
 truth which has given him immortality. It may be that there are 8 
 physical truths yet to be brought to light, 9 to say nothing of new ap- 
 plications of old truths, which, if they could be 10 announced and dem- 
 onstrated to-day, would be the ruin of the discoverer. It is certain 
 that there are moral truths to be discovered, expounded, and en- 
 forced, which, if any man had now penetration enough to see 
 them, and courage enough to express them, would cause him to 
 be regarded" by the present generation with horror and detestation. 
 Perhaps, during those eight years of re examination, the discoverer 
 of the circulation sometimes endeavored in imagination to trace 
 the effect which the stupendous fact at the knowledge of which 
 
 before he ventured to speak of it. It is sometimes well to vocalize a 
 wo'd-sign in phrase-signs when there is seen a possibility of its being read for 
 some otber word. In this case, however, there is no such necessity lor the vo- 
 calization of Spee ; for the context will not allow it to be read for anything but 
 speak ; and it is a principle of Standard Phonography to have the word-signs and 
 contractions so constructed that they may be introduced in phrases without 
 their legibility being seriously impaired thereby. 
 
 " more than one instance. 250, 3 ; see also Phrase- Writing (in this Reader) 
 Special Principles, B, II., 1. Here than (omitted) is obviously the impediment in 
 the way of this desirable phrase-sign. 
 
 * it may be that there are. This beautiful writing-phrase is secured by 
 making Em heavy to add be , by adding Dheedher for tha' lliere , and by adding 
 are by Ray (rather than Ar), to carry the pen back toward the line. 
 
 3 yet to he brought to light. See this Reader, p. 59, v., 1. 
 
 "' if they could be. To join could distinctly to they, let the latter word end 
 a little heavy, and with less curve than usual. 
 
 11 would cause him to be regarded. In this case be is added to Jiim by 
 widening the Em, and to is omitted. To be may frequently be added to Em in 
 this way ; for instance, Kel 2 -Emb, dcum-ed to be; Tee 2 Semb, it seemed to be; Tee 2 - 
 Sernben, it seemed to have been. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. S3 
 
 he had arrived would have on the progress of his favorite science ; 
 and, it may be, the hope and the expectation occasionally arose, that 
 the inestimable benefit he was about to confer on his fellow-men 
 would secure to him some portion of their esteem and confidence. 
 What must have been his disappointment when he found, after the 
 publication of his tract, that the little practice he had had as a phy- 
 sician by degrees fell off! He was too speculative, too theoretical, 
 not practical. Such was the view taken even by his friends. His en- 
 emies saw in his tract nothing but indications of a presumptuous 
 mind, that dared to call in question the revered authority of the an- 
 ck'nts ; and some of them saw, moreover, indications of a malignant 
 mind, that conceived and defended doctrines which, if not checked, 
 would undermine the very foundations of morality and religion. 
 When the evidence of the truth became irresistible, then these per- 
 sons suddenly turned round and said that it was all known before, 
 and that the sole merit of this vaunted discoverer consisted in having 
 circulated the circulation. The pun was not fatal to the future fume 
 of this truly great man, nor even to the gradual though slow return 
 of the public confidence, even during his own time, for he lived to 
 attain the summit of reputation. Philosophy of Health. 
 
 RELIGION AND SCIENCE. 
 
 8 NOT less disparaging to God's wisdom, though less destructive 
 to his goodness, was the geologic theory, invented and put 
 forth 1 in 1839 2 only fifteen years ago by the Rev. Dr. Pye Smith, 
 in order to reconcile the then common interpretation of the lirst 
 chapter of Genesis with the demonstrations of geological science. Dr. 
 
 o i and pvit forth. P. 169, R. 16. 
 
 2 1839. It is always sufficient to write the last two figures of a date of 
 the present century, and simply the last figure of the present decade. These fig- 
 ures may be preceded by an apostrophe ; thus, '39 (1839), '0 (I860) ; or by a long 
 stroke like Chay-Chay close to them. If a particular date or a fow dates are fre- 
 quently occurring, sufficiently distinguished to the memory of the reporter liy 
 the last figure, of course that figure would be all that need bo written after (he 
 apostrophe or the long stroke. (In such a case, though the Phonographic num- 
 erals would be more rapid, it is sometimes better to employ the common figures, 
 because they more readily catch the eye and are of advantage in finding a certain 
 part of your notes.) But this plan must not be employed if the reporter employs 
 the plan of writing only the last figure of a date of the present decade, UNLESS those 
 dates belong to the present decade, or if not, are so few and so well known to 
 
84 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READM. 
 
 Smith conceded so much 3 to the science as to admit that our glob 
 had existed for countless ages, and had been inhabited by various 
 races of animals before Adam was created ; but, for the sake of vin- 
 dicating a literal interpretation of the Mosaic account of the creation 
 according to which sun, moon, stars, plants, animals, and man him- 
 self were created not quite six thousand years ago, and all within the 
 compass of six diurnal days, of twenty-four hours each he main- 
 tained that somewhere, perhaps in some central province of Asia- 
 no one knows its latitude or longitude, and no geography or geology 
 has discovered any trace of it there was a spot, some "ten miles 
 square," like the District of Columbia, where, while all outside of it, 
 in the other parts of the globe, " was life and light, there reigned 
 for a time only death and darkness amid the welterings of a chaotic 
 sea ; and which, at the Divine command, was penetrated by light, 
 and occupied by dry land, and ultimately, ere the end of the creative 
 week, became a center in which certain plants and animals, and final- 
 ly man himself, Avere created " Now what a disgraceful instance is 
 this of the tenacity with which theological pre-conceptions are held, 
 in defiance of philosophical truth I To suppose that while all the 
 geologic eras, one after another, were passing through their immense 
 cycles, and while all the rest of the earth was advancing to a state of 
 preparation for the residence of man, a little " preserve of chaos," 
 somewhere, should be carefully fenced in, and choicely kept, until 
 six thousand years ago. when the work was there done in six days 
 which it had elsewhere occupied countless ages to perfect ; and that 
 Moses knew all about this six day's work, but did not know about 
 the other ; or, if he did know about it, kept his knowledge to him- 
 self ! How efficacious would be the union and co-operation of true 
 religion and true science in preventing such records of shame from 
 being inscribed on the pages of history ! 
 
 Everybody knows the effect of continued intermarriages among 
 persons related by consanguinity. The cognate blood, unenriched 
 and unstimulated from other fountains, soon breeds weakness, dis- 
 ease, and imbecility. Just so it is with a sect that shuts out truth 
 because it was not embraced in the scheme of its founders. The ideas 
 of suck a sect have no alternative for their continued existence but 10 
 breed in and in, and this, by a psychological law as immutable as the 
 physiological, soon begets a progeny of faith erroneous, ausuid, im- 
 becile, and idiotic. 
 
 the reporter that uo confusion can possibly arise Irom writing only the last 
 figure. 
 
 * so much. Lap much, instead of joining. Sec Phrase Writing Exhibit (in 
 this Header), p. 67, B, L 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES, 85 
 
 f But how can we woo Religion to wed Science ? How can we recon- 
 cile Science, so long estranged, and now, I fear, more estranged than 
 ever, to espouse Religion, and thus accept the only bridegroom that 
 is worthy of her queenly beauty and her magnificent dowry ? 
 
 I answer, Science is not sectarian. It does not confine itself to any 
 segment of the circle of philosophic truth, but seeks to embrace the 
 entire circumference. At the present day a bigot in science cannot 
 live. 
 
 9 Its pure empyrean air either exorcises the demon of bigotry 
 out of him, or sends him and it after the swine of the Gada- 
 renes, to be choked in the sea of oblivion. Let any man at this time, 
 in any scientific body or association in Christendom, defend any dog- 
 ma on the authority 1 of his government, or by any decree of old coun- 
 cil, or assembly, or sanhedrim, against the facts of observation and 
 the results of experiment, and he is considered as blaspheming against 
 the 2 " higher law," and his words accounted as " vain babbling." He 
 cannot be heard to set up theory against fact, authority against ex- 
 perience, or the tradition of a thousand years against the demonstra- 
 tion of yesterday. The only religion, therefore, with which science 
 will freely and rejoicingly 3 consent to live and to work, 4 is an unsectar- 
 ian religion. Any other union is forced and unnatural, involving 
 discord, dishonest compliances, and a suspension of progress in the 
 pursuit of truth. In fine, any other union is not wedlock, but concu- 
 binage only. Science has no creed or articles of faith which a man 
 must subscribe before he can be allowed to enroll his name as her 
 follower, and to offer his acceptable contributions at her shrine. Sci- 
 ence welcome* all new truth, all honest lovers of truth, and all honest 
 inquirers after truth, from whatever quarter they may come ; and the 
 recommendation of her votaries is, not that they have attached them- 
 selves to the school of Werner or Hutton, of Newton or Laplace, but 
 that they have not. The great book of Nature is her Bible. Devoutly 
 she believes that, " 'tis elder Scripture, writ by God's own hand," 
 and she suffers no one to shut it up in order that he may open in its 
 stead some philosophy of the Dark Ages, or substitute for it some 
 
 1 on the authority. The articles a-n and the are generally omitted, 
 where they may be readily supplied, unless they are convenient connect- 
 
 9 
 
 ing strokes. 
 
 2 against the. Genst 2 -Chetoid seems about as convenient a sign, and 
 sometimes better for adding other words. 
 
 s rejoicingly. See Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, DHR, 4. 
 * ami to work. Weh 4 -Bay, to ^vork, to which prefix the and tick. 
 
'8C SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 cosmogony of the heathen. And therefore science demands of relig- 
 ion that she, too, shall love truth supremely ; not Talmuds, nor acts 
 of Parliament, nor decrees of Councils or Synods, and that she shall 
 subject the old interpretation to every new test which the continual 
 evolution or unrolling of God's providence shall supply. 
 
 Science is the interpreter of Nature. It reverently inquires ; it list- 
 ens to know ; it seeks ; it knocks to obtain communication ; and then 
 all that it does is reverently to record nature's processes, and accept 
 them as true. And it demands that religion shall proceed on similar 
 exegetical principles. Hon. Horace Mann. 
 
 OUR FRIENDS IN HEAVEN. 
 
 SUMMER is coming to us once more, with its flowers, and its grass, 
 and its waving trees ; and naturally 5 in our 6 gladness our hearts turn 
 to our friends, scattered, driven hither and thither over life's prairie. 
 How few can we 7 draw to our side ! how few surround us in our walks, 
 and gather in our home circle ! Yet we think of them in their dis- 
 persion, and we send them letter or token, and receive from them from 
 afar greeting and token in reply. But we have friends to whom we 
 can send 8 no word, no token. We arc certain that we still have these 
 friends. We call them ours ; and though the places that once knew 
 them, now know them no more ; though their name is effaced from 
 the roll of living 
 
 10 
 
 names, yet we call them still our own. Amid our summer 
 wreaths and joyous garlands, let there be 1 one to Our Friends 
 
 5 and naturally. 261, R. 2. 
 
 6 in our. If placed by the first word, would be Her 1 , which may conflict 
 with near, Ner 1 . Greater certainty demands that the our should determine the 
 position of this phrase-sign. Sec, in this Reader, Phrase-Sign Position, II., on p. C8. 
 
 i can -we. P. 1C9, R. 12. 
 
 8 we can send. P. 1G8, R.. 3 ; p. 109, R. 12 ; p. CO, xi. of this Reader. It is 
 very desirable that such phrases as we give, we can, we could, which are spoken as 
 rapidly as 7 give, I can, I could, should bo as conveniently and rapidly written. 
 To attain this, I introduced the method of joining we as a hook in a lew such 
 cases. See remarks as to different uses of the same signs and of those nearly 
 alike, in note 13, p. 70 of this Header. 
 
 \\j ! let there be. See Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, DHH, 3, a. 
 
KEY TO TfiE tUEfOfcTlNG EXERCISES. 87 
 
 fn Heaven. Are we not richer for their being there ? Arc we not made 
 nearer to heaven by thinking of them there ? They have known us 
 so intimately ; they have known our history, our individualities, our 
 soul-wants, our aspirations, our trials. We have wandered with them 
 hand in hand through the tangled wood of life. We have lost our 
 way together. We have hungered and thirsted together, and looked 
 out 2 with weary and perplexed star-gazing, now trying this path and 
 now that ; and we have rejoiced together when our way has been 
 made plain before us. We have seen them wrestle and strive with 
 life, as wo still must. We have seen their heart fail, and their hand 
 fall slack, as ours, 3 full oft, may do. We have seen them bear the 
 wrench and strain, the cruel agony which life forces inexorably on all, 
 in one or other 4 of its phases ; and, last of all, we have seen them at 
 the river of death. We have seen the heaven opening, and the angels 
 descending, and they have been borne from our sight, and as they 
 rose they were transfigured, and became as the sons of God. 
 
 It is strange what a change is wrought in one hour by death. Tho 
 moment our friend is gone from us forever, what sacredness invests 
 him ! Everything he ever said or did seems to return to us clothed in 
 new significance. A thousand yearnings rise of things we would fain 3 
 say to him of questions unanswered, and now unanswerable. All he 
 wore, or touched, or looked iipon familiarly, become sacred as relics. 
 Yesterday these were homely articles, to be tossed to and fro, handled 
 lightly, given away thoughtlessly ; to-day we touch them softly, our 
 tears drop on them ; death has laid his hand on them, and they 
 have become holy in our eyes. Those are sad hours when one has 
 passed from our doors never to return, and we go back to set the 
 place in order. There the room so familiar, the homely belongings 
 of their daily life each one seems to say to us, in its turn, " Neither 
 shall their place know them any more." 
 
 Ah ! why does this bring a secret pang with \ it, when we know 
 that they are where none shall any more say, " I am sick ! " Could 
 only one flutter of their immortal garments be visible in such mo- 
 
 2 and looked out. In this case the principle of writing the present for 
 the past time is availed of. Were it not for this, there would have been re- 
 quired an additional stroke and lilting of the pen. 
 
 a as ours. 21G, i. 
 
 ' in one or other. Sec Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, DHB. 
 
 5 we -would faiu. 262 ; and p. 60, x. of this Header. 
 
 6 Ah ! As the words Ah ! and Oh! or 0! are usually spoken quite slowly, 
 I prefer to write them in longhand. 
 
$8 SECOND STA^DAHD-PHOSOGRAPSIC KtACEE. 
 
 ments could their face, 7 glorious Avith the light of heaven, once smile 
 on the deserted room, it might he hetter. One needs to lose friends 
 to understand one's self truly. The death of a friend teaches things 
 within that we never knew before. We may have expected it, pre- 
 pared for it, it may have been hourly expected for weeks ; yet when 
 It comes, it falls on us suddenly, and reveals in us emotions we could 
 not dream. The opening of those heavenly gates for them startles 
 and flutters our souls with strange, mysterious thrills tmfclt before. 
 The glimpse of glories, the sweep of voices, all startle and dazzle us, 
 and the soul for many a day aches and longs with untold longings. 
 
 We divide among ourselves the possessions of our lost ones. Each 
 well-known thing comes to us with an almost supernatural power. 
 The book we once read with them, the old Bible, the familiar hymn ; 
 then, perhaps, little pet articles of fancy, made dear to them by some 
 peculiar taste, the picture, the vase 
 
 Uhow costly are they now in our eyes ! We value them not 
 for their beauty or worth, hut for the frequency with which 
 We have seen them touched or used by them ; and our eye runs over 
 the collection, and perhaps lights most lovingly on the homeliest 
 thing which may have been oftenest touched or worn by them. 
 
 But there are invisible relics of our lost ones' more precious than the 
 book, the picture, or the vase. Let us treasure them in our hearts. 
 Let us bind to our hearts the patience which they will never need 
 again ; the fortitude in suffering which belonged only to this suffering 
 state. Let us take from their dying hand that submission under af- 
 fliction Avhich they shall need no more in a world where affliction is 
 unknown. Let us collect in our thoughts all those cheerful and 
 hopeful sayings which they threw out from time to time, 2 as they 
 walked with us, and string them as a rosary to be daily counted over. 
 Let us test our own daily life by what must be their now perfected 
 estimate ; and as they once walked with us on earth, let us walk with 
 them in heaven. 
 
 We may learn at the grave of our lost ones how to live with the 
 living. It is a fearful thing to live so carelessly as we often do with 
 those dearest to us, who may at any moment be gone forever. The 
 life we are living, the words we are now saying, w T ill all be lived over 
 
 " could their face. To distinguish cou' thr from ca' thr, keep the more 
 frequent (ca' thr) in the natural position, and \vrite could thr by Kaydher 5 . 
 
 1 of our lost ones. To secure this convenient phrase-sign, drop the 
 t of lost, and write it downward so that Wens may be joined. 
 
 11 
 
 2 from time to time. 250, 3, From to. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 89 
 
 in memory over some future grave. If we would know how to meas- 
 ure our words to living friends, let us see how we feel towards the 
 dead. Let us walk softly ; let us forbear and love ; none ever repent- 
 ed of too much 3 love to a departed friend ; none ever regretted too 
 much 4 tenderness and indulgence ; but many a tear has been shed for 
 too much Ixardness and severity. Let our friends in heaven, then, 
 teach us how to treat our friends on earth ; thus, by no vain fruitless- 
 sorrow, but by a deeper self-knowledge, 5 a tenderer and more sacred 
 estimate of life, may our heavenly friends prove to us ministering 
 spirits. 6 
 
 The Apostle Paul says to the Christian, " All things 7 are yours life 
 and death." Let us not lose either ; let us make Death our own, in a 
 richer, deeper, and more solemn earnestness of life. So those souls 
 which have gone from our ark, and seemed lost over the gloomy ocean 
 of the unknown, shall return to us, bearing the olive leaves of Para- 
 disc IMrs. II. B. Stowe. 
 
 CREATION. 
 
 CREATION, in its primary import, signifies the bringing into being 
 something which did not before exist. The term is therefore 8 most 
 generally applied to the original 9 production of the materials whereof 
 the visible world is composed. It is also used in a secondary or sub- 
 ordinate sense, to denote those subsequent operations of the Deity 
 xipon the matter so produced, by which the whole system of Nature, 
 and all the primitive genera of things, receive their form, qualities, 
 and laws. 
 
 There is no subject concerning which learned men have differed in 
 
 ( * too much. Here much may bo safely joined. In so much, write Es 2 and 
 Ch'ay 3 lapped, as it cannot be clearly joined. See phrases under MUCH in the 
 Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 * too much. Safely written Bedoid 2 -Chay. 
 6 self-knowledge. P. 113, R. 14. 
 
 6 ministering spirits. Drop the tn</-dot to secure this phrase-sign. 
 
 1 all things. In the Old Phonography, the advantage of niauy phrase-signs 
 was lost from prohibiting many junctions which the practiced writer will find 
 sufficiently easy, especially by proper variations of the inclination of sloping 
 strokes and of the curvature of curved ones. See Compendium, 25. 
 
 * is therefore. 261, R. C, 2. 
 
 to the original. To is here implied by writing the <fte-(ick (Petoid in this 
 case) iu the fourth position. 260, 6. Chetoid* is reserved for to how. 
 
90 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 their conjectures more than in this of creation. " It is certain," as a 
 good writer 10 observes, " that none of the ancient philosophers had 
 the smallest idea of its being possible to produce a substance out of 
 nothing," or that 12 even the power of the Deity himself could work 
 without any 
 
 -J Ci materials to work upon.' Hence some of them, among whom 
 J[ h was Aristotle, asserted that 'the world was eternal, both as to 
 its matter 2 and form. Others, though they believed that the gods had 
 given the world its form, yet imagined the materials whereof it is 
 composed to have been 3 eternal. Indeed, the opinions of the ancients, 
 who had not the benefit of revelation, were on this head so confused 
 and contradictory, that nothing of any consequence can be deduced 
 from them. The free-thinkers of our own and of 1 former ages have 
 denied the possibility of creation, as being a contradiction to reason ; 
 and of consequence have taken the opportunity from thence to dis- 
 credit revelation. On the other hand, 5 many defenders of the sacred 
 
 1 good writer. 164, R. 2 ; p. GO, xii. of this Reader. 
 
 n out of nothing. The maxim of the ancients upon this subject was, Ex 
 nihilo nihilfit Nothing from nothing springs. (&). In this case it is better to ex- 
 press o/by the Vee hook than to imply it. 
 
 12 or that. It is allowable to join or (Tetoidi) to any following word to which 
 and would be joined by a horizontal tick (i.e., Ketoid). Ketoid^Dhet, and that. 
 
 Af\ ! to work upon. Putting the \Veh-hook in the fourth position im- 
 -l plies a preceding to. See this Reader, p. 59, v. 2. 
 
 2 as to its matter. Tees* =to its; at prefixed will rest on the line. Observe 
 that Stee 3 would have the Tee through the line ; and Stee< (to sit, or to tlte city) 
 would have the circle close against the lower edge of the line. 
 
 3 to have been. This new word-sign is made thus: Bee 3 = to be, plus En- 
 hook =to been ; have being omitted, and naturally supplied, as there is no such 
 phrase as to been. Bee 3 for to be originated in the Old Phonography, in the seventh 
 or eighth edition, when Bedoid 3 was to, to which bt was added by Bee, resulting 
 in Bee'. 
 
 4 " of our own " and " and of." Here are two beautiful instances of add- 
 ing hooks to ticks. The ticks are shorter theoretically than a half-length, and 
 by sense are distinguished from half-length signs. But, by a little care the 
 writer will find it easy to distinguish by Bize half-lengths from licks, as Prent 
 aud Kelt from Prentoid and Keftoid. 
 
 5 on the other hand. This phrase-sign is arrived at by omitting the read- 
 ily supplied of the, and expressing in the briefest manner other hand, Dhrend. 
 But why make it second position ? To distinguish it from the desirable phrase- 
 fiign, Dhrent 3 , there would (or had) not, in which the vowel of the second word is 
 allowed to determine the position ; as in Dhrent 1 , there OUGHT not. 
 
 6 many defenders of the. Here of the is omitted, although the following 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 91 
 
 writings have asserted that 7 creation out of nothing, so far from being 
 a contradiction to reason, is not only probable, but demonstrably 
 certain. Nay, some have gone* so far as to say, 9 that from the very 
 inspection of the visible system of Nature, we are able to infer that it 
 was once in a state of non-existence." \Vc cannot, however, here 
 enter into the multiplicity of the arguments on both sides; it is enough 
 for us to know what God has been pleased to reveal, both concerning 
 himself and the works of his hands. Men, and other animals that 
 inhabit the earth and the seas ; all the immense varieties of herbs and 
 plants of which the vegetable kingdom consists; the globe of the earth; 
 and the expanse of the ocean these we know to have been produced 
 by his power. Besides the terrestrial world, which we inhabit, we see 
 many other material bodies disposed around it in the wide extent of 
 space. The moon, which is in a particular manner connected with 
 our earth, and even dependent upon it ; the sun, and the other plan- 
 ets, with their 10 satellites, which, like the earth, circulate round the 
 sun, and appear to derive from him light and heat ; those bodies 
 which we call fixed stars," and consider as illuminating and cherishing 
 with heat each its peculiar system of planets ; and the comets which 
 at certain periods surprise us with their appearance, and the nature 
 of whose connection 1 ' 2 with the general system of Nature, or with any 
 particular system of planets, we cannot pretend to have fully discov- 
 ered ; these are so many more of the Deity's works, from the contem- 
 
 word is carried to the next line, an example which the reporter may safely follow 
 in almost all cases. 
 
 7 have asserted that. That what? What Is said in the following sentence. 
 That hi such relations is called a conjunction, or joining word, and in most of 
 such cases is best joined to the preceding word. 
 
 s some have gone. 250, 3 ; see also p. 61, xix. of this Reader. 
 
 9 so far as to say. This speech-phrase might be written thus : Es 2 -Ef-Iss, so 
 far as; then join the dependent to say that, omitting the to as easily supplied. But 
 it is better to divide the phrase thus, so-fa[r]-as \to\-say-that. It is better to let as 
 go with its related word/ar, than to join it (as it is sometimes) to Es^. 
 
 < 
 
 10 with their. To get this desirable phrase-sign, let us change Web 1 , wi(th}, 
 to Way 1 , and then we can add thr by lengthening, as in so many other cases. 
 
 11 fixed stars. In astronomical matters it is desirable to have a convenient 
 phrase-sign for this phrase. If we write Ef-Kayst forjixed, we cannot join Steh- 
 Ars for stars. Let us, therefore, omit the impediment, Kayst, and write Efsters, 
 that is, Ji' stars. See 237, R. 2. 
 
 12 and the nature of whose connection. Join nal[ure] to and the by a good 
 angle ; imply o/by nearness of whose; under which write ekshon, to imply con. 
 
92 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 plation of which we cannot but conceive the most awful ideas of his 
 creative power. 
 
 "Matter, however, whatever the varieties of form under which it 
 is made to appear, 13 the relative disposition of its parts, or the motions 
 communicated to it, is but an inferior part of the works of creation. 
 We believe ourselves to be animated with a much higher principle 
 than brute matter ; in viewing the manners and economy of the lower 
 animals, we can scarce avoid acknowledging even them to consist of 
 something more than various modifications of matter and motion. 
 The other planetary bodies, which seem to be in circumstances nearly 
 analogoiis to those of our earth, are surely, as well as it, destined for 
 the habitations of rational, intelligent beings. The existence of in- 
 telligences of a higher order than man, though infinitely 14 below the 
 Deity, appears extremely probable. Of these spiritual beings, called 
 angels, Ave have express intimation in Scripture. But the limits of the 
 creation we must not pretend to define. How far the regions of space 
 extend, or how they are filled, we know not. How the planetary 
 worlds, the sun, and the fixed stars are occupied, we do not pretend to 
 have ascertained. We are even ignorant how wide a diversity of 
 
 I' tinder which it is made to appear. Here Is a speech-phrase. How 
 can we best secure a writing-phrase ? To under (Ned) join winch, shortening it to 
 to add it ; then add is made, and then add the dependent [to] appear. Remember 
 that these phrases are not to be regarded as arbitraries, but as exemplars, senr- 
 ing to suggest many others. 
 
 u infinitely. One great object kept constantly in view by me in my Phono- 
 graphic improvements was the removal of the disparities which existed in the Old 
 Phonography, in which the outlines for many frequent and rapidly-spoken words 
 were fifty per cent, slower than speech, BO that if the other words could be writ- 
 ten with the rapidity of speech, the reporter was obliged to fall behind in writing 
 the slow words, of which, for example, the word infinitely (En-Ef-Net El), was one, 
 requiring four slowly-written strokes, i.e., slow as compared with straight lines. 
 For Infinite-ly, etc., Standard Phonography provides a word-sign which can be 
 written with sufficient rapidity ; and by providing appropriate word-signs (of 
 which this is, of course, but a single instance), by new principles of writing and 
 new sources of brevity, and by general principles of contraction, "the rough 
 places have been made smooth," so that the pen or pencil by an even movement 
 keeps pace with the speaker. For further illustration the old form Tetoid-Kot- 
 oid, when employed for why and while, was too slow, requiring two strokes lor 
 rapidly-spoken monosyllables, and allowing but little opportunity for joining in 
 phrases ; but when used, as in Standard Phonography, to represent two words, 
 it is sufficiently rapid ; and the use of Tetoid-Ketoid in this way, and providing 
 quickly-written word-signs for why (Way 1 ) and while (Wei 1 ), serve to remove a 
 disparity of speed which must have been felt by any Old Phonographer who has 
 had to write after a rapid speaker such phrases as the following : Wky is it ; why 
 are you ; why were you; while it; while thr ; but a htlle time (Tetoid 2 -Ketoid-Let- 
 Tee) ; or a-n (Tetoid'-Ketoid); but lam (Tetoid^-Ketojd-Em). 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 93 
 
 forms, what an 1 ' infinity of living animated beings may inhabit our 
 own globe. So confined is our knowledge of creation, yet so grand, 
 so awful, that part which our narrow understandings can compre- 
 hend. 
 
 "Concerning the periods of time at which the Deity executed his 
 several works, it cannot be pretended that mankind have had oppor- 
 tunities of receiving very particular information. Many have been 
 the conjectures, and curious the fancies of learned men, respecting it ; 
 but, after all, we must be indebted to the sacred writings for the best 
 information." Different copies, indeed, give different dates. 
 
 The Hebrew copy of the Bible, which we Christians, for good 
 reasons, consider as the most authentic, dates the creation 
 of the world 3,944 years before the Christian era. The Samaritan Bi- 
 ble, again, fixes the era of the creation 4,305 years before the birth of 
 Christ. And the Greek translation, known by the name 1 of the Sep- 
 tuagint version of the Bible, gives 5,270 as the number of the years 
 which intervened between these two periods. By comparing the va- 
 rious dates in the sacred writings, 2 examining how these have come 3 to 
 disagree, and to be diversified in different copies; endeavoring to re- 
 concile the most authentic profane with sacred chronology, some ingen- 
 ious men have formed schemes of chronology plausible, indeed, but 
 not supported by sufficient authorities, which they would gladly per- 
 suade us to receive in preference to any of those 4 above mentioned. 
 
 1S what an. The article o or an is generally joined to the following word, 
 except when the preceding related word is a breve (that is, a circle, semi-circle, 
 dash, or tick). 
 
 13 
 
 i by the name. Obviously name will join better with Retoid than 
 with Chetoid (which more commonly follows Bee 1 , for 6^ the), Chetoid 
 
 generally joining more easily than Retoid with the following word ; as in Bee 1 - 
 
 Chetoid-Way, by the way. 
 
 f" 2 m the sacred writings. If we omit the as an impediment and as readily 
 supplied, then we may joiu in by the In-hook ; and as that is adapted to the 
 following stroke (for sacred here), we shall secure at once the highest legibility 
 and brevity. 
 
 3 these have come. Although this is a speech phrase, we disjoin come for 
 greater legibility. 
 
 _' of those. En 4 -Dhees might be safely used for to any of th (=these, 
 this, or those) ; but for Bake of greatest certainty those is disjoined and put in its 
 ition. 
 
 * to any of those. En^-Dh 
 
 is, or those) ; ' ' " 
 
 assigned posit 
 
94 SECOKD STANDARD-PHOXOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Usher makes out from the Hebrew Bible 4,004 years as the term be- 
 tween the creation and the birth of Christ. Josephus, according to 
 Dr. AVills and Mr. Winston, makes it 4,G58 years; and M. Pezion, 
 with the help of the Septuagint, extends it to 5,872 years. Usher's 
 system is the most generally received. But though these different 
 systems of chronology arc so inconsistent, and so slenderly supported, 
 yet the differences among them are so inconsiderable in comparison 
 with those which 5 arise before us when we contemplate the chronology 
 of the Chinese, the Chaldeans, and the Egyptians, and they agree so 
 well with the general information of authentic history, and with the 
 appearances of nature and of society, that they may be considered us 
 nearly fixing the true period of the creation of the earth." Uncer- 
 tain, however, as we may be 7 as to the exact time of the creation, we 
 may profitably apply ourselves to the contemplation of this immense 
 fabric. 8 Indeed, the beautiful and multiform works around us must 
 strike the mind of every beholder with wonder and admiration, un- 
 less he be enveloped in ignorance, and chaiaed down to the earth 
 with sensuality. These works every way proclaim the wisdom, the 
 power, and the goodness of the Creator. Creation is a book which 
 the nicest philosopher may study with the deepest attention. Unlike 
 the works of art, the more it is examined, the more it opens to us 
 sources of admiration of its great Author ; the more it calls for our 
 inspection, and the more it demands our praise. Here everything is 
 adjusted in the exactest order; all answering the wisest ends, and 
 
 5 in comparison with those which. Let us omit the two impediments, 
 
 com and with. 
 
 6 so well. So what ? So well. The Way-hook in well secnres the greatest 
 legibility, but it may be safely dropped in many phrases where the hook would 
 not join ; as in Es2-Lay, so [w]ell ; Ver 2 -Lay, very [w]elt. See WELL in the Standard- 
 Phonographic Dictionary ; especially the postpositive phrases (that is, phrases 
 in which well follows other words). 
 
 ' we may be. P. 168, R. 3 ; see also in this Reader, p. CO, xi., second para- 
 graph. 
 
 * this immense fabric. The Compendium, 27, 4, requires that a cir- 
 cle between two strokes shall be written in the most convenient manner. In 
 Tees-Kay, Tees-Pee, Chays-Gay, Chays-Pee, the most convenient manner is to 
 turn the circle on the left-hand side of Tee and Chay. In such a combination as 
 Dhees-Em the question of convenience must be settled in favor of turning the 
 circle on the right-hand side of Dhee ; i.e., so that it comes on the concave side 
 of both Dhee and Em. "Dhees (with Iss on the back)-Em" is apt to be written 
 " Vee-Ar-Sem," unless the pupil trains the pen to stop a little at the end of Dhee be- 
 fore adding Sem. As to Ef-Sem, the most convenient way of writing the circle is 
 undoubtedly on the back of Ef. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 95 
 
 acting according to the appointed laws of Deity, Here the Christian 
 is led into the most delightful field of contemplation. To him every 
 pebble becomes a preacher, and every atom a step by which he ascends 
 to his Creator. Placed in this beautiful temple, and looking around 
 on all its various parts, he cannot help joining with the Psalmist in 
 saying, "0 Lord, how manifold are thy works! in wisdom hast 
 thou made them all." 9 Buck's Theological Dictionary. 
 
 THE AGE OF THE HUMAN RACE. 
 
 OF all the subjects which have occupied the attention of the scien- 
 tific societies 10 and journals of Europe during the past year, none have 
 excited so much interest as the geological evidence lately adduced 
 from various sources, tending to prove that the period of man's exist- 
 ence upon our planet has been greatly vaster than" that hitherto as- 
 signed by biblical and common chronology. It is also a very notice- 
 able circumstance that, 12 notwithstanding this subject has occupied 
 the 
 
 U attention of the scientific men, generally, of Europe, during 
 the past year, to a greater extent than any other, hardly a 
 word relative to the evidence or discussion has found its way 1 into any 
 American publication (book or newspaper) save the Annual of Scienhjic 
 Discovery. Whether theological prejudice or censorship has contrib- 
 
 9 hast thou made them all. Write has for hast ; adapt it to the position 
 of thou (for sake of legibility) and join made them. 
 
 1 scientific societies. The word society is frequently represented in phrase- 
 writing by Es. It is rendered more legible in such case by writing it through the 
 last stroke of the preceding word. 
 
 11 vaster than. 201, R. 8 ; and in this Reader, p. Cl, xviii. 
 
 12 noticeable circumstance that. How can we join this conjunction that 
 to Stens= circumstance? By turning the circle on the back of Sten, which makes 
 an Ens-circle, and then adding that. 
 
 Ui has found its way. As we cannot join to the verb has found, its 
 object its way, wo must disjoin it. As both speed and legibility are the 
 objects of the reporter, we should not make, slow and difficult junctions, nor sac- 
 rifice legibility by the same. Read and study carefully the Exhibit of Phrase- 
 Writing on p. CO of this Reader. Sec there A, I., Exc. 1 and 2, 
 
96 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 uted 2 to this result, may be a question. 3 The following, however, is 
 a brief resume of the recent contributions which have been made 1 to 
 our knowledge 1 on the subject : 
 
 Some two years ago or more, Mr. Leonard Horner, an English engi- 
 neer of wealth, and a member of the Royal Society, undertook, in 
 connection with 6 some French engineers in the employ of the 1'a.sha 
 of Egypt, to determine the depth of the alluvial deposits in the valley 
 of the Nile. This river, as is well known, is remarkable for its annual 
 overflow, whereby a great part of all the arable land of Egypt is sub- 
 merged for the period of several weeks, and covered with a thin de- 
 posit of mud, or sediment, which in geological language is termed 
 "alluvium." This action recurring with great regularity, year after 
 year, has produced on both sides of the Nile a strip of land of unex- 
 ampled fertility, and is also yearly 7 extending the delta or coast-line, 
 at the mouth of the river, farther and farther* into the Mediterranean. 
 In all places in the valley of the Nile where the soil has remained 
 undisturbed by human agency, the annual deposits of mud can be 
 Been reposing upon each other with great regularity each successive 
 layer or stratum of sediment representing a year in time, in the same 
 manner as the successive rings in the trunk of a tree represent the 
 wood-growth of successive seasons. By counting, therefore, 9 the num- 
 ber of layers in a given thickness of Nile deposit, we have an almost 
 certain measure of the time required for its formation. 
 
 Mr. Homer's researches were based upon these facts, and were 
 made by sinking a series of shafts, ninety-five in all, across the Nile 
 valley, nearly in a line with, and crossing the site of the ancient city 
 
 * contributed. 'Contri* is here joined to Bet. See this word in the Stand- 
 ard-Phonographic Dictionary. P. 112, R. 8. Beeshou 3 is a word-sign lor contri- 
 bution. 
 
 3 question. Ken2 as a word-sign for question-ed was first introduced in the 
 Hind-Book. 
 
 * which have been made. P. 169, R. 12. 
 
 6 to our knowledge. To secure a pood junction between Pretoid and En, 
 make the former quite slanting, and begin En with more than usual curvature. 
 
 6 in connection with. 250, 3, and example With. 
 i yearly. P. 118. R. 3, c. 
 
 8 farther and farther. 276, c. See p. 61, xix. of this Reader. The beat Old- 
 Phonographic expression of this phrase is Ferdher Ketoid-Ferdher. 
 
 9 counting, therefore. The Dher-tick is here written in place of the ing- 
 dot, to imply tng ; a.ndjore is added by an Ef-hook. See Standard-Phonographic 
 Dictionary, DHU, 5. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 97 
 
 of Heliopolis. la every case the alluvium was found to be regularly 
 livi<letl into layers, and the average of many careful measurements 
 indicated that the rate of vertical increase of sediment was about three 
 and one-half 10 inches per century. One of these shafts, in particular, 
 was sunk close to the great monolithic statue of Kameses II., at Mem- 
 phis, and it was found that there were nine feet four inches of Nile 
 sediment between eight inches below the present surface of the ground 
 and the lowest part of the platforms on which the statue stands. Now 
 this statue has been determined by Lepsius and other Egyptian schol- 
 ars to have been erected 1,361 years before Christ, and this date, 
 added to 1858, gives, therefore, 3,219 years, during which the above- 
 mentioned depth of sediment accumulated, a rate of increase in strict 
 accordance with the" results of the measurements above alluded to. 
 Below the platform of stone on which the statue rests, the shaft was 
 driven thirty-two feet ; but the lowest two feet consisted of sand, thus 
 leaving thirty feet of true Nile sediment in an undisturbed condition 
 below this foundation. At the base of this sediment, or at a depth of 
 thirty-nine feet four inches from the present surface of the ground, 
 fragments of pottery were found in a good state of preservation, and 
 exhibiting some considerable artistic skill. Allowing now that the 
 thirty feet of sediment covering these remains (below the platform of 
 the statue) were deposited at the rate oC three and one-half inches per 
 century, we have in the fragments of pottery a record of the existence 
 of man 13,500 years before A.D. 1858, 11,500 years before the Christian 
 era, and 7,600 years before the commencement of the reign of Menes 
 as assigned by Lepsius ; of man, moreover, 
 
 ~j ]t in a state of civilization 1 sufficiently advanced to be able 
 Li) to fashion clay into vessels, and harden it* by heat. 
 The fragments in question are now deposited in the British Museum, 
 
 18 3 1-2. In writing fractions, the reporter may save himself the trouble of 
 writing the horizontal line, as in the engraving. 
 
 11 in strict accordance with the. P. 1C8, R. 10; 250,3, and example 
 With. 
 
 A^ ! in a state of civilization. See how beautifully speech-writing cor- 
 AtJ responds to speech-phrasing. In what? In-a-state-of-civMzation. We 
 can drop the a. and of as superfluities in the writing, because they are readily 
 supplied. As the legitimate form for state, Steu-Tee, would not join with in, 
 let us use an equivalent expression, Iss-Tet ; and then join to this Iss-Velseshon, 
 civilization. 
 
 2 and harden it. 221, B. 4. 
 
98 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 and Mr. Homer, in exhibiting them to the lloyal Society, expressed a 
 confident opinion that their antiquity was at least 3 equal to the calcu- 
 lation 4 above given. At any rate, 5 it seems certain that they were'' 
 deposited in the place whence they were taken long anterior to the 
 time 7 when the workmen of Rameses II. laid the platform for the 
 reception of his statue, 3,000 years ago. 
 
 The results of Mr. Horncr's investigations are, however, cast entire- 
 ly into the shade by the discovery of flint weapons, spear-heads, axes, 
 etc., associated with the remains of extinct animals elephant, rhino- 
 ceros, bear, tiger, hyena, etc. in imdisturbed beds of gravel, in the 
 north of France. The cannouncement of this discovery was first made 
 by Mr. Evans, an English geologist, to the London Society of Anti- 
 quaries, in June, 1859, and subsequent researches have fully confirm- 
 ed it. The weapons and bones occur in what is s geologically known 
 as the drift, in the neighborhood of the town of Amiens, I0 and present 
 unmistakable evidence of having been buried cotemporancously. At 
 
 3 at least. Telst :! for at least, is distinguished from Tee 3 -Layst, at last. 
 
 * to the calculation. Here KcP, calculation} is put close against the line 
 to imply to; the being readily supplied. If you wish to distinguish most cer- 
 tainly between to the and to a-n, write the by Petoid iu the fourth position for to 
 the, and write the a-n by Tetoid iu the fourth position for to a-n. Chetoid' is to 
 how. 
 
 5 at any rate. For greater ease of writing join any rate by one stroke, Nert 
 = nrt, instead of using three strokes, En-Ray -Tee nrt. 
 
 6 it seems certain that they were. This phrase might bo written Tces2- 
 Emses-Ret-Dhee-Weh ; but it will be better for the beginner to break the phraso 
 into two parts : it-seems-certain that-they-were. The first part illustrates the en- 
 larging a small circle at the end of one word, as seems, to express the s at the be- 
 ginning of a following word. 
 
 " to the time. Write Petoid 4 (to the) Tee 1 , time; or omit the and put time in 
 fourth position. To become a ready reader of your notes, practice reading your 
 shorthand, and study the principles of note-reading. For instance of the con- 
 text helping, you will see here that Tee 4 is interpreted readily by aid of the pre- 
 ceding words, long (Ing 3 ) anteriorCtSct 2 ), and to implied by the fourth position, 
 and by when (Wen 1 ) following. 
 
 8 in what is. 221, K. 4 ; see in this Reader also, p 61, xx. 
 
 9 drift. A word used as here as a name or "as a word," should bo under 
 scored or quoted. 
 
 10 Amiens. Pronounced amiii, (.) expressing the nasalization of the preced- 
 ing a. The t is represented by Yay, eo as to help give a suggestive outline. For 
 the stenographic representation of nasalized vowels, see p. 203, 12. My usu:il 
 plan is in reporting foreign names, when their pronunciation is quite different 
 from the values of the letters interpreted by general English analogies, to write tho 
 
B, 0. BAK 
 
 LAV;'". 
 
 DAI L 1 ' * 
 
 KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 99 
 
 the meeting of the British Association" in September, 1859, Sir Charles 
 Lycll, who has hitherto favored the received chronology respecting 
 man's existence as a race, said that he fully believed that the anti- 
 quity of these flint weapons was "immensely great as compared with 
 the times of either history or '-tradition ; " and it is conceded by all 
 geologists that the continued existence of tropical animals is not pos- 
 sible 13 in Central Europe, under the present conditions of climate. The 
 conclusion, therefore, seems unavoidable, that there were races of 
 men inhabiting Europe at a period when this temperature was alto- 
 gether different from what it now is, and when the country was the 
 natural habitation of species of animals now restricted to the tropics. 
 Life Illustrated. 
 
 THE INFALLIBILITY OF THE CHURCH. 
 
 THE infallibility of the Church of Rome has been one of the great 
 controversies between the Protestants and Papists. By this infallibil- 
 ity it is understood that she cannot at any time cease to be orthodox 
 in her doctrine, or fall into any pernicious errors ; but that she is 
 constituted, by Divine authority, 14 the judge of all controversies of re- 
 word as though it were English ; for instance, writing Amiens as though it were 
 pronounced Am-ienz. This, of course, is upon the supposition that the orthog- 
 raphy is known. If not, you are, of course, to write the spoken word. 
 
 11 British Association. If this should occur frequently, it might be writ- 
 ten Breteshou 1 , and British Society, if occurring frequently, might bo written 
 Brets 1 , the circle standing for society, the entire contraction transferred to com- 
 mon print being "Brit. S." 
 
 12 Prof. Agassiz estimates the age of a human foot and jaw, discovered by him 
 in the coast limestone of Florida, Irom data furnished by the growth of the laud, 
 at 135,000 years. [In au Essay contributed to Types of Mankind.] 
 
 In making an excavation at New Orleans, an Indian's skull was found be- 
 neath four cypress forests, the production of each of which, it is estimated, re- 
 quired 14,400 years. Allowing a period of 500 years' rest between the different 
 productions, 59,100 years must have passed away since the skull was deposited 
 in the position where it was discovered. 
 
 13 is not possible. This is an illustration of slightly raising or lowering a 
 horizontal word-sign of the first position, in order to get a joined word in place ; 
 as Eu-Dhees 1 , in these; En-Dhees-, in this; En-Dhees 3 , in those. 246,1. 
 
 14 constituted by divine authority. Though this is a speech-phrase, we 
 are compelled, in our writing, as in many other cases, to break up or disjoin tho 
 
100 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 ligion, and that all Christians are obliged to acquiesce in her decis- 
 ions. This is the chain which keeps its members fast bound to its 
 communion ; the charm which retains them within its magic circle ; 
 the opiate which lays asleep all their doubts and difficulties ; it is 
 likewise the magnet which attracts the desultory and unstable in 
 other persuasions within the sphere of popery, the foundation of its 
 whole superstructure, the cement of all its parts, and its fence and 
 fortress against all inroads and attacks. 
 
 Under the idea of this infallibility, the Church of Rome claims 1. To 
 determine what books are and what are not canonical, and to oblige 13 
 all Christians to receive or reject them accordingly. 2. To communicate 
 authority to the Scripture ; or, in other words, that the Scripture 
 (quoad nos), as to us, receives its authority from her. 3. To assign and 
 fix the sense of Scripture, which all Christians arc submissively to re- 
 
 16 
 
 4. To decree as necessary to salvation 1 whatever she judges 
 so, although not contained in Scripture. 5. To decide all 
 controversies respecting matters of faith. These are the claims to 
 which the Church of Rome pretends, but which we shall not here at- 
 tempt to refute, because any man with the Bible in his hand, and a 
 little common sense, will easily see that they are all founded upon 
 ignorance, superstition, and error. It is not a little remarkable, 
 however, that the Roman Catholics 2 themselves are much divided as 
 to the' 1 seat of this infallibility, and which, indeed, may be considered 
 as a satisfactory proof that no such privilege exists in the Church. 
 For is it consistent with reason to think that God would have im- 
 parted so extraordinary a gift to prevent errors and dissensions in the 
 Church, and yet have left an additional cause of error and dissension, 
 viz., the uncertainty of the place of its abode ? No, surely. Some place 
 
 words. After Beei, by, we see at once that Defi, divine, should be disjoined and 
 put in its proper position ; since if joined, Def would more naturally be given 
 its more jrequeut value, different. Then we see that Ihret 1 (authority) cannot 
 be joined to Def 1 . See, in this Reader, the Exhibit of Phrase-Writing. 
 
 Jj and to oblige. BeH-Jay, to oblige to which prefix and, 
 
 A n ! to salvation. Iss 4 -Lay. For greatest legibility here write Petoid 2 , 
 1 Slay*, sal[vatwn]. 
 
 2 Roman Catholics. \Ve may safely reduce the phrase to R. Cs. 
 
 3 as to the. As to, Spetoid 2 , rests on the line ; but as to Hie is distinguished 
 from it by ths circle's resting on the line and the extending below the line. It is 
 to the (i.e., the written in the fourth position to imply to) with as prefixed. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 101 
 
 this infallibility in the Pope or Bishop of Rome ; some in a general 
 council ; others in neither Pope nor council separately, but in both 
 conjointly ; whilst others arc said to place it in the church diffusive, 
 or in all churches throughout the world. But that it could not 
 be deposited in the Pope is evident ; for, many Popes have been her- 
 etics, and on that account censured and deposed, and therefore 
 could not have been infallible. That it could not be placed in a 
 general council 4 is as evident ; for, general councils have actually err- 
 ed. Neither could it be placed in the Pope and council conjointly ; 
 for two fallibles 5 could not make one infallible, any more than two 
 ciphers could make an integer. To say that it is lodged in the church 
 universal or diffusive, is equally erroneous ; for, this would be useless 
 and insignificant, because it could never be exercised. The whole 
 church could not meet to make decrees, or to choose representatives, 
 or to deliver their sentiments on any question started ; and less than 
 all would not be the whole church, and so could not claim that priv- 
 ilege. 
 
 The most general opinion, however, it is said, is that of its being 
 seated in a Pope and general council. The advocates for this opinion 
 consider the Pope as the vicar of Christ, head of the church, and cen- 
 ter of unity ; and therefore conclude that his concurrence with and 
 approbation of the decrees of a general council are necessary, and suf- 
 ficient to afford it an indispensable sanction and plenary authority. 
 A general council they regard as the church representative, and sup- 
 pose that nothing can be wanting to ascertain the truth of any con- 
 troversial point, when the pretended head of the church and its mem - 
 bers, assembled in their supposed representatives, mutually concur 
 and coincide in judicial definitions and decrees, but that infallibility 
 attends their coalition and conjunction in all their determinations. 
 
 Every impartial person, who considers this subject with the least 
 degree of attention, must clearly perceive that neither any individual 
 nor body of Christians have any ground from reason or Scripture for 
 
 4 in a general council. Presuming that the phrase general council will oc- 
 cur frequently, let us make a special contraction for it, namely, J. K. As a sign 
 of contraction use intersection, writing J|K, that is, J crossed by K. If the phrase 
 should occur once or twice more, we may omit the intersection and write Jay2- 
 Kay ; or Jay 3 -Kay, to distinguish it from the established contraction Jay-Kay, 
 Jesus Cknst. 
 
 B fallibles. The reporter may frequently write 'bio ' by its sign ' Bee,' in- 
 stead of Bel, thus making a slight though desirable saving in some cases. Capa- 
 ble, for instance, a contraction (Kay-Bel 2 ) of the Corresponding Style, may be 
 shortened a little more ia the Reporting Style by leaving off the hook, i.e., by 
 writing Kay-Bee 2 . 
 
102 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 pretending to infallibility. It is evidently the attribute of the Su- 
 preme Being alone, which we have all the foundation imaginable t<> 
 conclude he has not communicated to any mortal, or association of 
 mortals. The human being who challenges infallibility seems to imi- 
 tate the pride and presumption of Lucifer, when he said, "I will as- 
 cend, and will be like the Most High."'' A claim to it was unheard of 
 in the primitive and purest ages of the church, but became, after that 
 period, the arrogant pretension of papal ambition. History plainly 
 informs us that the bishops of Rome, on the declension of the western 
 Roman Empire, 7 began to put in their claim* of being the supreme and 
 infallible heads of the Christian church ; which they' at length 10 estab- 
 lished by their deep policy and unremitting efforts ; by the concurrence 
 of fortunate circumstances ; by the advantages which they reaped 
 from the necessities of some princes, and the superstition of others; 
 and by the general and excessive credulity of the people. However, 
 when they had grossly abused this absurd pretension, and committed" 
 
 17 
 
 various acts of injustice, tyranny, and cruelty ; when the 
 blind veneration for the papal dignity 1 had been greatly di- 
 
 6 Most High. See in the Standard Phonographic Dictionary, under HIGH, 
 how phrase-writing with that word is rendered possible at times by using the H 
 instead of the i lor this word. 
 
 7 Western Roman Empire. Roman Is here contracted to Ar. If this 
 phrase were occurring frequently, I would con tract it (in accordance with the. 
 principle of 23 f, R. 2) to Way-Ar-Emp (i.e., W. R. Emp.). 
 
 8 put in their claim. The verb is noiput, but put-in ; therefore join them, 
 making the angle easy by writing put quite slanting and by beginning ire quite 
 curved. The object of the verb (tltetr claim) will be written most easily dis- 
 joined from the verb. 
 
 9 which they. In writing this phrase-sign, Dhee must be joined, as in the 
 engraving, without an angle. It it should seem difficult it should be the more 
 practiced, until it becomes easy. 
 
 10 at length. That is, Tien 11 , at length]. 
 
 11 and committed. Write Ketoid 2 for and, so that the following com may 
 be implied by writing itted (Ted) under. 
 
 ni for the papal dignity. Here is a speech-phrase, consisting of a 
 preposition and its object. As naturally as we speak together these 
 words, so naturally should we write them together, unless there is some hin- 
 drance. There is a hindrance to joining dignity namely, that it would run into 
 the space for the line below. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 103 
 
 minished by the long 3 and scandalous schism occasioned by contending 
 Popes ; 3 when these had been for a considerable time 4 roaming about 
 Europe, fawning on princes, squeezing their adherents, and cursing 
 their 5 rivals ; and when the councils of Constance and Basil had chal- 
 lenged and exercised the right of deposing and electing the bishops of 
 Home, then their 3 pretensions to infallibility were called in question, 
 and the world discovered that councils were a jurisdiction superior to 
 that of the towering pontiffs. Then it was that this infallibility was 
 transferred 7 by many divines from Popes to general councils, and the 
 opinion of the superior authority of a council above that of a Pope 
 spread vastly, especially under the profligate pontificate 8 of Alexander 
 VI. and the martial one of Julius II. 9 The Popes were thought by 
 
 2 by the long. We disjoin long, and put it in its proper position for legibil- 
 ity's sake. There aro many words with which longer may be joined without re- 
 gard to its position ; as, for [a] long time, just as long, a little longer than, much 
 longer, not long ago, so long, such a long time, twice as long as (TeesesMngs). 
 very long. Why in some cases do you join long without endangering legibility? 
 By the words aesociatcd with it helping to read it. 
 
 3 by contending popes. Here you naturally relate in writing, as you do 
 in speaking, the object, contending popes, with the preposition by. 
 
 4 for a considerable time. It is well to make use of a species of phrase- 
 signs, like that for this phrase, in which, though there is a disjoining, the pen 
 moves but a slight distance before commencing the disjoined word, that being 
 made to overlap the preceding as a sort of indication that it forms a part of the 
 phrase-sign, just as in cases of necessary disjoining in writing a single word, the 
 disjoined part is made to slightly overlap the preceding one the word being 
 thus distinguished from two words. See dated (Dce:Ted), 218. If in writing this 
 phrase, time had been written Tee 1 , there would have been lost the time of a long 
 air-stroke, and, moreover, the writing would not be so legible ; for, judicious 
 phrase-writing adds to legibility. 
 
 6 cursing their. See this Reader, p. CO, xii. 
 
 * then their. I prefer to join there, etc., by the Dher-tick rather than to 
 employ the lengthening principle when it produces a form which needs vocal- 
 ization to distinguish it from some other, though there is hardly ever any such 
 necessity. 
 
 ' was transferred. In accordance with the great principle of UNIFORM- 
 ITY of Standard Phonography, all contracted words ending in fcr-red are con- 
 tracted in a like manner, as 'rcfcr-red, Ray Ef ; infer-red, En-Ef 2 ; transfer-red, 
 Ten*-E. 
 
 s profligate pontificate. The full forms for these words would be too 
 Blow. Wo can readily secure good forms by omitting the impeding letters I iu 
 the first, and/in the second. If you retain I in the first you must write Gay- 
 Tee for -gate ; and if you retain /in the second word you must write Kay -Tee for 
 -cate. 
 
 fl Julius II. P. 194, R. 8. 
 
SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 104: 
 
 numbers to be too unworthy possessors of so rich a jewel ; at the same 
 time it appeared to be 10 of too great a value, and of too extensive con- 
 sequence, to be parted with entirely. It was, therefore, by the major 
 part of the lloman Church, deposited with, or made the property of 
 general councils, either solely or conjointly with the Pope. Suck's 
 Theological Dictionary, 
 
 AUDI ALTERAM PARTEM." 
 
 [Abstract of a Lecture by Rev. Dr. Cahill, delivered in Brooklyn. Reported in 
 full by Andrew J. Graham. la ] 
 
 DEAREST BRETHREN, I am now going to deliver a discourse upon 
 
 1 R appeared to be. The ed is the impediment Lore to making a good 
 writing-phrase. It is rulable, in many cases, to join a dependent infinitive, as 
 to be, to the word on which it depends, omitting the to. 
 
 11 Atuli alteram partem Hear the other side. A Roman and Grecian max- 
 im of fairness and justice, which it would be well to adopt ill modern times, es- 
 pecially as it may sometimes happen that after hearing both sides we may see 
 that the truth lies with "the other side," or only in part with either, or witlt 
 neither. " Veritas nihil veretur nisi abscondi." Veritas visu etmora, falsa festatione 
 et insertis valescunt. Tac. 
 
 12 A reporter having established in the only possible manner a reputation for 
 accuracy and impartiality, will find no difficulty, on account of difference of 
 opinions, in getting business from parties of opinions directly contrary to his 
 own, if the desire is to have a report at all. I do not say a correct report, for a 
 garbled or misrepresenting report is no report at all. A misrepresentation of a 
 speaker may be made from putting words into his mouth which it is known ho 
 never uttered words calculated to subject him to odium or ridicule ; which is 
 morally nothing less than forgery and libel. A misrepresentation may be made 
 by taking from his words clauses or sentences which serve to modify a proposi- 
 tion which, perhaps, without such modification, would be repugnant to the 
 common-sense of mankind, and detestable to himself. This also is moral forgery 
 and libel. A misrepresentation may also be made from throwing aronnd the 
 speaker such circumstances as will give to the reader an untrue idea of the spirit 
 or occasion of the speech. 
 
 No reporter who would keep his soul unspotted from such injustice, will either 
 seek or accept a situation as reporter upon any paper whose conductors either 
 expect, require, or (what is the same) allow the misrepresentation of a speaker, 
 unless it be with the most distinct understanding that ho is not himself to be di- 
 rectly concerned in such disreputable business, and that his reports are not to 
 be altered for the purposes of misrepresentation. No thoroughly honest reporter 
 can take a less sturdy position than that ; for, by the same reasoning that a man 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 105 
 
 what 13 we call the Infallibility of the Catholic Church. By infallibility 
 I do not mean that no man in the Church can fail, 14 but that the doc- 
 trines taught by Christ to his Apostles are still taught in the Church, 
 and will be taught throughout all countries and all time to the end 
 of the world. The infallibility of the Church, therefore, means this, 
 that I, having passed 1 ' my examinations in college, taken out my de- 
 gree, and being recognized and approved as a priest by my bishop, 
 you may rely upon what I tell you with the same certitude as if you 
 heard Christ himself speaking. You say that is 16 a large proposition ; 
 it is, but I assert it boldly, with perfect confidence, believing it as 
 firmly as my existence. I have no more doubt of it than I have of 
 the life, death, or resurrection of Christ. I shall endeavor to fully 
 convince you of the truth of this proposition. " 
 
 I 1 * commence by saying that Christ ought to make as good rules for 
 the soul as his Father has made for the body. You say yes. The 
 Father has established all the laws of Nature, and I want to know if 
 any of them have ever failed ? I think not. The sun has never been 
 one second too late in his brilliant course since the day he said " Let 
 there be light," and there was light. The tides have never ceased to 
 flow since that time. The seasons have never failed spring, summer, 
 autumn, winter. The great panorama over your head appears to 
 move with perfect order and regularity. All the plants arise in their 
 proper time, decay, and fall into their autumnal graves, and are lost 
 until another season ; and the young baby plant makes its appearance 
 
 has a right to air because he has lungs, he has a right to think freely, aud to ut- 
 ter his honest convictions, because he has a soul ; and the cause of Everlasting 
 Truth and every elementary principle of human rights demand that if a paper 
 report his utterances, it shall do it fairly. 
 
 is upon what. 221, R. 4. 
 
 n can fail. Omit the impediment here, the En hook, so you may join the 
 parts of the compound verb, can fail. 
 
 18 that I having passed. 237, R. 1, b. If you write the ing-Hot you must 
 break up the phrase-sign ; so omit it as an impediment, it a good junction can 
 be secured thereby, aud the ing can be supplied. 
 
 i yon say that is. P. 167, R. 2 ; p. CO, xi. of this Reader. 
 
 i' this proposition. It is rather easier to make the Ar-hook distinctly 
 here than to imply it by simply turning the hook on the back of the Dhee. This 
 combination is not difficult, alter a little practice of it. Although the Dhee is a 
 curve, the beginning and the end will be seen to be quite straight at the point of 
 junction. 
 
 is The pronoun I when written alone may be safely written Tetoid 1 ; to 
 which you prefix Ketoid for and I; and to which you add the Ef-hook for / have. 
 
18 
 
 10G SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC HEADER. 
 
 the next spring, and perpetuates the memory of its parents, and goes 
 on through ages. It is the same with the bird and the fish tribes. 
 The animal tribes still carry out their 19 instincts, and there they are, 
 family after family'- , and so it will be through ages to come. The vast 
 variety of these philosophical phenomena are maintained with per- 
 petual order and beauty. Whether this country were Mohammedan, 
 Catholic, Christian, or Infidel, these laws remain the same. Do what 
 you will, you cannot cause an eclipse of the sun. By holding up your 
 hand, you may cast a shadow on yourself, but you cannot do away 
 with the light of the great luminary. When you and I have dis- 
 coursed upon this subject 
 
 a favorite topic of mine I say to you : These are the laws 
 of the Father over nature. Don't you think there ought 
 to be as good a set of laws for the soul instituted by Christ as these 
 laws of the Father for nature? What would you think 1 if two suns 
 were made, when only one 2 would be necessary? I say no; it cannot 
 be ; it would cause confusion. One sun is the proper plan ; anything 
 else would cause disorder. Everything 3 seems to have been estab- 
 
 19 carry out their. See p. 61, xvi ; p. 60, xiii. of this Reader. 
 
 20 family after family. 250, 3. 
 
 A Q l what would you think. A beautiful and highly useful charac- 
 J. teristio principle of Standard Phonography ia 
 
 THE ENLARGEMENT OF THE SEMICIRCLES. 
 
 I. TVEH OR WTJH 
 
 1. In Natural Position, to add another TT-word ; as in we 1 were (or would}, 
 with 1 what, were 2 we (with or ichat), what 1 we (with, were, or would), 
 would- we. 
 
 2. Inclined, to intimate the addition of a K-word ; as in we 1 yet. with^ you, 
 were- ye (you or yet), what 1 ye (you or yet), would- ye (you or yet). 
 
 II. YEH OR YITII 
 
 In Vie Natural Position only, o n , to add a IP-word ; as in ye 1 would (or 
 
 were), yet- were (what or would), beyond 1 what, you" 1 were (or would). 
 (6) TJie shape of the enlarged semicircles. The enlargement is not only sideivise but 
 also lengthwise usually of horseshoe form ; or, better described as an unclosed 
 Ster-lonp. Make the semicircle in any desired direction, and then, for the en- 
 larged sign, make two-thirds of a Ster-loop ; and you will find you have made 
 the horse shoe curve. ,$35- See page 191 of this Reader for a presentation of the 
 ENLARGEMENT OF THE CIBCLES AND SEMICIRCLES, accompanied with engraved 
 illustrations of the same. 
 
 - only one. P. 169, R. 11. See ONE in the Standard-Phonographic Diction- 
 ary. 
 
 - everything. For greatest speed with this word, keep on the heaviness from 
 middle of Ver to the middle of lug, and make a smooth junction, If you doubt 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 107 
 
 lished' to be permanent to carry out his great philosophical econo- 
 my. You agree with me 5 decidedly that these laws are the same, 
 whatever may be 6 the people in the world ; these laws arc beyond 
 their reach. Now, if the laws of nature are not dependent on the 
 flitting opinions of men, how can it be believed that Christ instituted 
 laws for the soul on any such basis, when the interests of the soul are 
 so much more important than those 7 of the philosophical economy ? 
 One soul is worth a million of suns yea, worth all the suns that could 
 ever escape from the fingers of the omnipotent Creator, because the 
 soul has on it his own image. More it has the blood of Christ upon 
 it ; and one drop of his blood is infinite in value. 8 As compared with 
 the infini to value of the soul, all that he can ever create must bo fi- 
 nite. I place that programme before you, and say that if you do not 
 believe what I am going to 9 say to you, you cannot believe one word 
 of Christ. 
 
 the importance, compare the recommended way of writing the word with tlio 
 two letters tapering at the junction and then with au angular junction. 
 
 * seems to have !>eeu established. This is a beautiful instance of 
 greatly facilitating tho recording by a due use and combination of the princi- 
 ples; thus: Somsi (</:/(..-). j >iu the dependent infinitive (to have been establiski'd), 
 omitting as usual tlio infinitive particle to, and omitting the have as readily 
 supplied before Item, done, and other similar irregular past participles. A list of 
 such participles will be giveu hereafter. 
 
 5 you agree with me. A speech-phraso written thus : Yuh-Ger (the 
 Ar-hook being a slight offset)-Wem. Though the speech-phraso includes decided- 
 ly that, it is well to disjoin the latter. Why? To avoid running too far down, 
 and to give the pen a new impulse. Liftings in phrase-writing to give the pen a 
 new impulse, correspond to a speaker's division and repeated accents in a very 
 long word ; as, an-ti-trin-i-ta-i-ianism ; in-di-vis-i-bil'ity. 
 
 6 whatever may be. Illustrating variations from the usual forms of 
 signs to make the junctions easier. Here, observe lio\y tho Vec-hook is curved 
 inwardly a little, to join better with Emp. 
 
 " so much more important than those. To sign-phrase this speech- 
 phrase, it will be best to write so (Es^), and, as a sort of joining, lap much; 
 join Her (omitting its hook as readily supplied by the experienced writer 
 and reader) ; then add the modified important. Then, to give our pen a uc\v im- 
 pulse, disjoin titan those. 
 
 f in value. In which the first-position horizontal is brought down a little, 
 so that value may go in its proper position. 246, 1. See also in this Reader tho 
 Exhibit of PHRASE-SIGN POSITION, p. GS, II. 
 
 9 what I am {joins: to. To make the writing-phrase correspond to 
 the speech-phrase, use a form for / that will join between the two words what, 
 and am; Ketoid answers the purpose. "We must drop the ing-dot, and then the 
 to bsfore the infinitive say and to before the you (in the dative case). 
 
108 SECOND STANDARD-rilOXOGRAPnjC READER. 
 
 Christ addressing his Apostles said, ''As the Father sent me, so I 
 send you." 
 
 The first thing that strikes me is this sending. Was he not God, like 
 his Father ? Why does he acknowledge the inferiority of being sent ? 
 Could he not come himself? This is the language of the Holy Ghost, 
 the inspiration of the Holy Ghost through the pen of John, and every 
 word of the text I shall read borrows omnipotent importance from 
 the source whence it proceeds. "As the Father sent me." The Father 
 gives him a command, when one would suppose that he requires no 
 command. He receives this command in his mediatorial office. Man- 
 kind having sinned, and being all sinful and cast out, how could they 
 recover their position ? How could finite men pay an infinite debt? 
 How could fallen man restore himself? He had sinned against the 
 Father, and heaven was bolted against him, and he was excluded, a 
 rebel, banished, having lost all his position. Being in sin, he is not 
 acceptable in the sight of God. But the Son of God beautiful phrase 
 said: Father, I know that the blood of oxen cannot please you, 
 therefore I go. I will take man's flesh, his chains, liis rags all but 
 his sins, on my bare head before you, and I shall pay the whole debt. 
 I go at the command from my father ; I give you what he gave me. 
 He sent me into the world to preach against sin, to advocate sanctity, 
 to publish the gospel. I send you in the same office. Then as to the 
 authority so far as that goes, you have it. 
 
 Xn man can preach unless he has got a command from God the 
 Father. He sent Christ to discharge this duty, and he subdclegates 
 the power he receives himself. That is what I call the commission. 
 But you may say, where did these men who preach to you get the 
 knowledge to discharge the duty ? John xv. 15 : ;0 "All things what- 
 soever I have heard from my Father I have made known to you." 
 Recollect, every word of this must be weighed in its atomic value. 
 I do not like to be speaking Greek to you, but the Greek is, I will 
 make it" perfectly known to you. You havo all knowledge. You 
 know that warrant is from God, so far as it goes. The commission 
 comes from the Father certainly, and the knowledge comes from the 
 Father. Was this knowledge got from schoolmasters ? No. From 
 posture-masters? Certainly not. From elocutionists? Not at all. 
 They may advance the telling of the knowledge, but the whole of the 
 the knowledge is from above. I send you 
 
 10 John chapter 15 and verse 15 275. 
 
 11 I will make it. I usually vocalize Em ami Tec, when shortened for 
 male it and lake it, with a ; but I have always found them legible when the vowel 
 has bccu omitted. 
 
19 
 
 KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 109 
 
 with my own office, I give you my own knowledge ex- 
 quisite warrant, title. 
 Mark xvi. 15 : " Go ye into the whole world, and preach the Gospel 
 to every creature." He does not gay, " I hope you will go." Impera- 
 tive mood "Go." Where? Into the whole world. " I command 
 you to go 1 and preach ! " He does not say, "I hope you will preach 
 it will be a good thing to preach;" but he commands to preach. 
 What ? The gospel I have published. To whom ? To every creature. 
 You have my authority, fully given me by my Father. You have all 
 the knowledge you want- for the purpose 3 given from my Father. The 
 whole world is your diocese the field for your labors ; all mankind 
 your congregation. Go, therefore,- 1 in consequence of your commis- 
 sion 5 and your knowledge, into the whole world. Do not leave a 
 corner of the earth which shall not be the scene of your labors. The 
 boundlessness 3 of the whole horizon alone is the terminus of your ex- 
 ertions. Preach the Gospel to every creature. The Church, there- 
 fore, is commanded to send 7 missionaries all over the world. All 
 mankind are subjects of their official duties, and all mankind arc 
 clearly called upon to listen. The man who stays at home and reads 
 does not discharge his duty ; he is not listening to the official man. 
 
 !I command you to go. Written thus : Tetoid 1 , /; under which 
 write Ned", to imply com of command ; to which join Yob for Ynh (you); 
 
 19 
 
 then write Gay 4 for to go. 
 
 2 you -\vant.-Yuh2-Went. Observe how the hook of Went is made very 
 small to join with Yuh, and that the letter is shaped to suit the junction. The 
 beginner would consider many junctions difficult which would be easy to the 
 experienced writer. The beginner's difficulty is in not shaping the letters to 
 their junctions. 
 
 3 for the purpose. That is, f. p., for [the] purpose; similar to the com- 
 mon print ". g.," exempli gratia; and the "/i.e.," hoc est=the still used "i.e." 
 (id est), that is. 
 
 * go, therefore. 264, and R. 5, 2. As to the written pause before therefore, 
 we may omit it, iu order to secure the great saying of this mode of adding 
 the word. 
 
 5 in consequence of yonr commission. A beautiful phrase. En 1 
 plus Skens=tn [con]sequence plus Yay, [of] your ; Shen under to imply com of com- 
 mission. 
 
 11 boundlessness. 232, 7, and R. 1, c. This mode of expressing -lessness, and 
 also the mode of expressing -fulness, were introduced by the Author. 
 
 7 is commanded to send. Another beautiful phrase. Is (Iss 1 ) comm 
 (implied by writing Tinder)-anded(Ned 3 , present tense for past participle)-fo (in- 
 finitive particle omitted)-send (Send joined as a dependent infinitive). But why 
 not join in writing as in speech, the object of send, namely, missionaries? Becauso 
 it will not join easily ; and, of course, really difficult junctions do not favor speed. 
 
110 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 I do not care what he reads. He is not in the order.* We shall pres- 
 ently'J learn that it will not do. We have now gone so far as to show 
 the commission granted to vis, and the knowledge that is communi- 
 cated. "Go ye, therefore, and teach all nations." You are to do 
 the whole command you are to teach them. Do not allow any one 
 to teach them without your control. You are the shepherds. Allow 
 no man to feed your lamhs without your sanction. Do not ask leave 
 of the wolf to visit your flock. Do not ask permission of the wolf to 
 go into your fold. "Go and teach all nations, teaching them to ob- 
 st'rve all tilings whatsoever I have commanded you." I'y this time 
 I think everybody begins to sec that these men have the Gospel in 
 their mouths, and that all arc commanded to go and learn of them. 
 It would l>e alisurd to go and teach all nations 10 unless they were 
 called upon to learn from them, so that the command to go and teach 
 all nations is the same as commanding" all nations to learn from 
 them, for there cannot be teachers without learners they are roi rel- 
 ative words. It may, perhaps, be said that it is possible 14 for me to 
 go astray. No, I cannot as long as I hold 13 my place under the bish- 
 op, and he is in communication with the Pope. 
 
 Matthew xxviii. 19: "Go ye, therefore, and teach all nations, 
 teaching them to observe all things whatsoever I have commanded 
 you, and behold I am with you 11 all days, even to the consummation 
 of the world." Go, teach them ; I am not the teacher, but I am with 
 you while you arc teaching. He does not say I am with you in the 
 
 * Nerd 1 , for the conjunctive phrase in order [lo], may he advantageously used 
 for this phrase, in order. 
 
 9 presently. Express ly whenever it seems required for legibility ; Borne- 
 times in words in which it is commonly unwritten, as in this case. On the other 
 hand, ly is sometimes omitted as a superfluity or as an impediment, from words 
 in which it is usually written. 
 
 10 teacli all nations. As this phrase has occurred several times, we may 
 reduce it to its briefest consonantal expression namely, Tce'-Chel-Eushous. 
 
 11 is the same as commanding. IBS' (is) enlarged to add s of same, omit- 
 ting the as an impediment; adding Iss for as; then Eud:ing under for com- 
 manding. 
 
 12 it may perhaps be saul that it is possible. It will be seen to be 
 best to break this one speech-phrase into three writing-phrases, "it may per- 
 haps," "be said that," "it is possible." 
 
 M as long as I hold. Iss 2 (as) determines the position because it makes 
 long legible out of its position. 
 
 " and behold I am with you. Ketoid(and)-Bled (a word-sign forlehold)- 
 Tetoid-Em(7 am)-Weh-yeh(tw'M you). 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. Ill 
 
 present tense ; "I am always with you, not a year or two, 15 but until 
 the consummation of the world." This language 10 is exceedingly im- 
 portant. All mankind is your congregation, and the tenure of your 
 office until eternity begins until my Father seizes the pendulum of 
 time, and stops the last moment of time, and eternity begins. What 
 has the Father ever done like that? Compare that with the sun, the 
 moon, and the tides. I expect that this rule will be as far beyond the 
 Father's natural philosophy 17 as the soul is beyond the body. 
 
 Timothy ii. 7. St. Paul's sa id to Timothy, a bishop, "Timothy, I 
 am appointed a preacher and an apostle, a doctor of the Gentiles in 
 faith and truth." He had before listened to Christ's doctrine. I 
 may be asked, Did the Apostles understand Christ as speaking to 
 them ? Did they comprehend him perfectly in knowing that they 
 were appointed to this office? Yes. St. Paul said to Timothy, "I 
 am appointed a preacher [to the whole world, of course] and a doctor 
 in the faith 19 and truth." The priests may make a mistake in politics. 
 Probably they will, 
 
 20 
 
 because they arc not educated in politics. But they can- 
 not 1 make a mistake in faith. " I am with you." He 
 stands by our side. Now I come with double force to you. You take 
 that Gospel and read it' 1 at home, and you have no guarantee that 
 
 lf) not a year or two. Or is best omitted here. See OR ill the Staudard- 
 Phonographie Dictionary. 
 
 10 this language. Vocalization is occasionally applied to word-signs, to 
 insure legibility ; as hero we write tkis-'ang for this language, lest the lug should 
 be given its more common meaning, thing. 
 
 17 natural philosophy. The al omitted as unnecessary for legibility. See 
 NATURAL-LY in the Standard Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 is Saint Paul. The word "St.," quite legible in such phrases, may be best 
 adapted to the position of the name following, to help the legibility of the 
 latter. 
 
 19 in the faith. To be sure that this shall read " in the faith," write the by 
 Petoid, to secure a practical junction with Ef-Ith. 
 
 nn i they cannot. To insure the legibility of Kent, do not join it with 
 
 " they with such a smooth junction as you would join can ; but continue 
 
 the heaviness of Dhee to the bottom, and then you join Kent (cannot) as easily as 
 
 you would join the same to Dee. The lower end of tbe Dhee thus made is indeed 
 
 a straight line, and readily makes an angle with cannot. 
 
 2 and read it. A good instance of lapping instead of joining, where the lat- 
 ter would not answer. 
 
112 SECOND STANDARD-MONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 you cannot go astray ; but there is guarantee that the priest from 
 whom you are to learn cannot go astray. He is with him. He is 
 with me while I am talking. You come here to learn, and you have 
 a guarantee that I cannot make a mistake. This is the place where 
 the guarantee is given, and nowhere else. "Timothy, my associate 
 bishop, I am appointed a preacher." Paul was appointed by Christ, 
 of course. " I am appointed a doctor, too, but I am limited to faith 
 and truth ; I am appointed to discharge all the duties that concern 
 faith and truth. The Gospel, the fountain of truth, is my thesis." 
 Paul appointed others, and they others again, and they others again, 3 
 and here we are. "Timothy," he said again, "the things you have 
 heard from me before many witnesses, the same commend to faithful 
 men, who will teach others 4 also." The Father appointed Christ, 
 two ; Christ appointed Paul, three ; Paul appointed Timothy, four ; 
 Timothy appointed others, five ; and they appointed others, six ; and 
 BO on in succession down to us. 
 
 '2 Timothy iv. 1: "Timothy, I charge you before God and Jesus 
 Christ, who shall judge the living and the dead, and I charge yon by 
 his coming and by his kingdom, to preach the Word." " Preach" 
 imperative mood. " Be constant, in season and out of season, reprove 
 and rebuke, but do it in all patience." "I call upon you in the name 
 of the Trinity to recollect your primal duty, to preach." We see now 
 the original power communicated from the Father, communicated all 
 along by the regular 5 links of a chain. 
 
 3 and they others again. There is furnished here an example of pro- 
 gressive degrees of phrase-writing. A number of words which might be written 
 without lifting the pen may not be so expressed until it occurs a second time. 
 Then, not only may these words be expressed by a single phrase-sign, but con- 
 tractions may take place in the sign if it occurs frequently. This cannot be bet- 
 ter illustrated, perhaps, than by an example that occurred on a preceding page 
 the phrase Western Roman Empire. The first time this occurred it would very 
 probably be written Ways2-Ren-Ar-Men:Emp-Ray Empire being disjoined be 
 cause the junction might seem somewhat difficult. The next time it occurred 
 Empire would probably be joined. Then, the next time, to avoid the somewhat 
 difficult junction, Roman would be contracted to Ar ; and for such a phrase, oc- 
 curring several times, such a contraction would not impair legibility. But sup- 
 pose that it occtirs many times more it will very probably be contracted (in ac- 
 cordance with the principles of 237, R. 2, b) to Way (for Western)-A.i(foi Roman)- 
 Empffor Empire), i.e., W. R. Emp. 
 
 4 teach others. See DHB in the Dictionary ; see also in this Reader, p. 
 60, xii. 
 
 5 by the regular. The the may be omitted as both an impediment in join- 
 ing and as a word that may be readily supplied and therefore superfluously 
 written. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 113 
 
 2 Corinthians, v. 20 : " We are, therefore, ambassadors for Christ." 
 We stand in his shoes. Paul was a scholar' 1 before he was called. He 
 learned how to write well before the pen of inspiration was put into 
 his hands. "For Christ we are ambassadors." What a beautiful 
 phrase ! What is an ambassador ? The representative of the queen 
 or king, so far as the authority is communicated. "Go to America," 
 the Queen said to the ambassador, " and represent me. You cannot 
 declare war and make peace, but so far as I give you power plenipo- 
 tentiary, you have the power of the Queen there pro tanto. ' ' As am- 
 bassadors of Christ, we hold his place. We are all ambassadors, ex- 
 horting as if God spoke in our mouths. So we hold the place of Christ, 
 and our exhortation is the language and speech of God the Father. 
 There is no more presumption for the bishop to say that he occupies 
 such a position than for the chancellor to say, "I am chancellor;" 
 for the general of the army to say, " I am commander-in-chief ; " for 
 the man in the navy to say, "I am chief admiral aboard this licet." 
 I have the power ; I am the ambassador of Christ, and God speaks in 
 my mouth. Turn the whole Bible through, and you cannot find such 
 another 7 document. This is the fullest document in the whole Bible. 
 Here is text after text, title after title, power after power 8 an accu- 
 mulation- of titles and warrants for fear this great case should lose 
 any importance for want of the largest amount of accumulative evi- 
 dence. 
 
 Luke, x. 1C : "He that heareth you, heareth Me ; he that despiseth 
 you, despiseth Me." Now the Greek is better than the English. It 
 says, "he who hears you, hears Me." It is not " who understands 
 you, 9 understands Me." The Greek word afcouo signifies what falls 
 on the ear. So perfectly are you identified with me in my office. 
 
 21 
 
 The moment your words fall upon the ear of a man, he is 
 to take them as my words. Hearing and understanding 
 in Greek are two words. 
 
 6 a scholar. On account of the deep hook of Skier, we cannot easily preflx 
 a by Kotoid, ami lieuce use Tetoiil. Tetoid can IK it bo read as or here, because 
 when a, an, or and would bo preferably joined by Tetoid or should be written 
 separately. 
 
 ' such another. Let us here drop an, because In the way of lengthening 
 to add otlter. See DHR iii the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 s text after text, title after title, power after powe*. 276 ; p. 61, 
 
 xix. of this Header. 
 
 9 wlio xmtlerstamls you To add you here, we must drop tho En-hools 
 
114 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC HEADER. 
 
 QHOUUV 0[iuv, E\iov aMOuef xcii o afitruv v^iac,,^! aoErtr o fie 
 tpl aSc-ruv, aGe-rel TOV airocfTefXavTa ^.e. A 
 
 The moment your words barely fall upon the ear of a man, that 
 moment lie hears my words. He who despiseth you despises me. I 
 urn so identified with you 2 that my words are your words, and a con- 
 tempt of you is a contempt of me. 
 
 St. Paul uses a beautiful text, which you will not forget. "Faith," 
 he says, "comes by hearing." He does not say my faith comes by 
 understanding. If you look at that text, there will be found more 
 than at first 3 strikes the eye. Faith comes by hearing. How can a 
 
 implied in the Eus-circle in Ned-Stens, understands. So also drop n in undcrsta'ds 
 me. 
 
 21 
 
 1 Pronounced, according to the usual modification of the Erasmian 
 pronunciation, Ho akuron hu-nion, em-tu aknri ; ki lid ath-etOn Lu-- 
 mas eni-c atlreti ; ho-de em-e ath-eton, ath-eti ton apostilau-ta me. 
 
 No system of stenography can enable a reporter to take down accurately a pas- 
 sage as long as this, in a language with which he is not nearly as familiar as his 
 own ; and hardly then, if the reporter has not accustomed himself to writing it, 
 especially if it should be uttered rapidly. But a reporter who has some gem-i-al 
 knowledge of one or more foreign languages, especially if he has a quick ear for 
 discriminating sounds, may usually take a few words at the beginning, aud the 
 concluding word, aud thus be able to eomplete the extract by referring to the 
 proper books. 
 
 In this case, I very well knew that the speaker gave the Greek for Luke, x. 16, 
 which he had just before quoted, and upon referring to my Greek New Testa- 
 ment, I there found it ; and the Greek letters being quite familiar to both eye and 
 hand, it was easy to insert the quotation in my transcript. 
 
 The student will naturally ask, what would have been done if you had not been 
 so fortunate as to get a clew to the passage ? I will answer, that usually, unless 
 you desire and are able to be very accurate, you would omit such passages ; and 
 in the majority of cases, such omission would be no detriment to a report ; for, 
 often such passages are thrown in more for a display of learning than to add any- 
 thing by the way of idea or illustration. Take this very case. How mnch is 
 lost of real force of argument, or of idea, by omitting this Greek quotation, and 
 the sentences introducing it ? Thus 
 
 Luke, x. 16 : " He that heareth you heareth me ; he that despiseth you despis- 
 eth me." Now the Greek is better than the English. It says, " He who hears you 
 hears me." It is not "who understands you understands me." The Greek word 
 akouo signifies what falls on the ear. . . . " The moment your words barely 
 fall upon the ear of a man, that moment he hears my words." 
 
 2 with you. See Exhibit of Semicircles Enlarged, on p. IOC of this Header. 
 
 3 at first. This sign is formed thus : Tee 3 -pins first, the loop joined as usu- 
 al and not at angle as usual -with the loop for first. See FIRST in the Standard- 
 Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
KEY TO THE REPOKTJNO EXEKCISES. 115 
 
 man hear unless somebody 1 speaks to him? Faith does not come by 
 reading nor by reasoning No ; it comes from the speaking of the 
 accredited orator. 
 
 Galatians, iv. 13 : "I preached the Gospel heretofore,* and you re- 
 ceived me as the angel of God, even as Christ Jesus." That answers 
 all the objections you can propose. Did the Apostles understand what 
 Christ said ? Yes. But did the people understand ? Yes. Galatians, 
 iv. 13: "I preached the Gospel heretofore, and you received me as 
 the angel of God, even as Christ Jesus." 6 
 
 Now, you have the warrant given by the Father and by the Son : 
 you have Paul's assertion that the people of Galatia received him as 
 if Christ spoke. Now, have I got out of my way ? Have I said a 
 word too much when I said you were called upon to hear me as if 
 
 4 somebody. That is, Semb2, someb[ody]. As body is usually contracted to 
 bod (as in every-body, no-body, any l body, in our rs) would some have us write 
 Seni 2 -Bed for some body ? The d of body would be the impediment to easy phrase- 
 writing here ; and, therefore, let us drop the d of bod, and add the U by widening 
 the Em of some. 
 
 6 heretofore. Ret 2 -Ef-Ar would be the full form, the position ruij quir- 
 ing " the first stroke not horizontal " liet in this case to be written in tho po- 
 sition required by the accented vowel 6 in this case. Therefore, write Ret 2 -Ef- 
 Ar, heretovoiiE, dropping the Ar in the reporting style. By the same principle, 
 write llet'-Ef-Shel, artificial, dropping the cial in the reporting style. 
 
 6 I preached the Gospel Christ Jesus. When a reporter knows that ho 
 can have easy access to a work from which quotations are made, especially if the 
 quotations are long, and particular reference is made, it will be suUicient to take 
 the beginning and concluding words, and, of course, the reference to chapter, 
 page, or section, if such a relerence is given. The extracts can be afterward 
 found and inserted in the transcript. (6). If the quotations are short, and the 
 reporter wishes to save himself the trouble of reference, he may take the com- 
 plete quotation, (c). But where the same quotation is made several times, it 
 would not only be unnecessary to take it in full, but injudicious; for, the oftener 
 the quotation as, for instance, a text is repeated, the more rapidly, as a usual 
 thing, it is uttered ; and it may easily happen that it would be uttered so rapidly 
 that the reporter would fall so far behind the speaker in taking it down, that he 
 might lose the following sentence, (d). It is no discredit to a reporter that ho 
 cannot take down a long and rapidly-uttered passage, quoted from the distinct 
 memory or read from a book ; for, it may be uttered too rapidly to bo reported. 
 A practiced speaker can read with tolerably good articulation from 400 to 450 or 
 500 words in a minute varying, of course, with different individuals and the 
 different matter spoken. It is not a necessary part of the business of a reporter 
 :o insert such extracts, though it is usually done, when it can be conveniently, 
 the reporter being paid for them at the same rate as for other matter. 
 
 When the reporter intends to insert the quotations, if they are long, he should 
 usually take not only the beginning and concluding words, but a number of 
 words or sentences in the body of the quotation, for the purpose of more readily 
 
116 SECOXD STAXDAnD-PEONOGKAPHlC 
 
 Jesus Christ addressed you? 7 Not from any importance of mine, but 
 from the office I hold. What the people of Galatia did, the people of 
 Brooklyn ought to do. We have here the Galatian.s proving to your 
 face my proposition. They received Paul as the angel of God, even 
 as Christ Jesus. Would they not receive Timothy in the same way, 
 and the men appointed by Timothy, wherever that Cross is seen. 
 
 Mark, xvi. 16 : "Go, and preach the Gospel, and he that believeth 
 and is baptized shall be saved, and he that believeth not s shall be 
 condemned." 
 
 Here we have Christ saying, "Go and preach" two command- 
 ments "and he that believeth and is baptized shall be saved, and 
 he that believeth not shall be damned." " Do you say that if the 
 people believe the Gospel in the mouth of this man, that they are 
 saved, and that if they believe not they shall be damned ?" Yes. 
 Can there be 9 any mistake in their believing ? No. How could God 
 attach damnation as a penalty, unless they were wrong in rejecting 
 
 finding or identifying the extract. This will be the more necessary when the 
 reference to page, etc., has not been given ; and it is sometimes more neces- 
 sary when the reference has been given ; for the reference is not unfrequeutly 
 wrong. 
 
 i Jesus Christ addressed you. A speech-phrase. How shall we best dis- 
 pose of it in writing? Here J. C.= Jay-Kay, as a familiar and distinct form in 
 religious matter, may be as safely joined as the subject of the verb, as would a 
 pronoun. In order to join you to addressed, drop the ed as an impediment, and 
 join Vuh as shown in the engraving. 
 
 8 believeth not. This phrase may be written as here, Bel 2 -Ith-Net that is, 
 with the customary word-forms simply joined, only taking care to shape them so 
 as to sharpen the required angle. But the phrase recurring (as below) or the 
 angle being thought too difficult, simply express the consonants of eth not in the 
 briefest manner, namely, by Thent ; in the same way as we make the word-signs 
 for may not, Ment 2 ; are not, Arnt 2 , or Kent* ; will not, Lent' ; cannot, KenU ; have 
 not, Vents (or Vee 2 -Net) ; there ought not, Dhreuti ; they are not, Dbrent 2 ; Uiere 
 would (or had) not, Dhreut 3 ; tell me not, Tel 2 -Ment ; why not, \Vayiit 1 ; your not do- 
 ing so, Yaynt 2 -Dee[ing]-so. See postpositive phrases under NOT in the Standard- 
 Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 9 can there be. Ken 2 being can we cannot use lengthening to add tlir; 
 but, to use this desirable principle, let us drop the n of can, and write ca' there be, 
 Kaydher--Bee. In could thr, we drop the impediment to lengthening, namely, 
 the d, and then write Kaydher, could thr, but putting it in the third position to 
 imply its vowel, 60. To such lengthened signs we may add a circle, loop, or 
 hook, as required; as in Kaydherf 2 , can therefore; KaydherP, could tlterefore ; 
 Kaydhern 2 , ca[n] tfiere no\t] ; Peedhern 2 , upo[n] their own ; Kaydbern 2 , rather [iha]n; 
 Embdherft, may be therefore] ; Gaydherf 2 , go therefore. This is the only reasona- 
 ble use of the lengthening principle that is as to hooks, etc., following the 
 lengthened stroke. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXKUCISE& 117 
 
 it ? Could that faith be fallible ? No ; how could eternal fire be at- 
 tached to disbelieving it, if it were uncertain or erroneous? There- 
 fore, it is a clear case that 10 since Christ attaches eternal damnation 
 to the man who does not believe my words, that my words must be 
 us infallible as his own existence. How could He punish you by an 
 eternal penalty, if my words could possibly lead to error ? How could 
 He attach lasting punishment, in His imperial anger, for not believing 
 my words, unless my words were beyond all cavil, perfectly, consti- 
 tutionally, and metaphysically infallible ? Eternal damnation, there- 
 fore, being the penalty attached to any one not believing my declar- 
 ation, 
 
 22 
 
 proves that my words must be as infallible as the very 
 
 with me, but do not reject what I say. Am I talking anything but 
 what is in the Gospel ? 
 
 Matthew, xviii. 17 : "He that will not hear the Church, let him be 
 as the heathen and the publican." If he will not hear the Church, 
 I command you 1 to look upon him 2 as a heathen and a publican a 
 man of the most atrociously bad morals. The man who will not 
 hear the Church that sole crime constitutes him per se a man desti- 
 tute of all religion, a man of the most degraded character. 
 
 Matthew, xvi. 19 : " Peter, who do men say that I am? They say 
 that you are Christ. Blessed art thou, Simon Barjona, because nei- 
 ther flesh nor blood told you that, but my Father who is in heaven." 
 Simon was his name, but after he fell everybody doubted him. Oh, 
 they said, Peter can never be depended upon ; he betrayed his Master. 
 You recollect the text. Peter, said Christ, Satan attempted to take 
 you from me, but I prayed that your faith shall never fail. Your 
 name was Simon ; I now call you Peter Petros, a rock 3 within a rock. 
 
 1 therefore, it is a clear case that. To get a convenient writing phrase 
 for this speech-phrase, let us reject the slight pause as an impediment, and omit 
 a, not because an impediment, but as easily supplied and we have a beautiful 
 phraae-sign, Dher 2 -Fets-Kler-Kays-Dhet ; that is, four strokes for a phrase requir- 
 ing seven times as many letters in longhand. The number of strokes in those 
 longhand letters is quite a different matter. 
 
 of) 1 1 command you. TetoidH^-commfimplied by writing under):End l 
 
 uu (and)-Yeh(j/o). 
 
 2 to look upon him. The n of upon omitted so that him (the object of the 
 verb look upon) may be joined. 
 
 3 a rock. Observe how the engraving teaches to sharpen the angle before 
 and after Ray. Ray when not connected with any character showing its direc- 
 
118 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Peter, you will yet betray me, and the world 1 will think 7011 are a 
 coward, 5 and not to be depended upon ; but I want to show you that 
 I can raise a man of the most despicable character into the most ex- 
 alted position of a human being. 6 I will now satisfy the world by 
 changing your name. I will lift you up and call you Petros, a rock 
 within a rock. You can never be touched by the waves that beat 
 against the rock. You are in the rock. I am the rock. 1 eter, thou 
 art Peter ; I give you the keys of all my possessions. I give the whole 
 flock into your hands; 7 feed the lambs, the little children, and feed 
 my sheep, the parents, secondly. The whole flock, the sheep and the 
 lambs, are under your control, and 1<> ! I am with you all the days, 
 even to the consummation of the world, and the gates of hell shall 
 not prevail against you. H 
 
 Peter, I have given that statement to all the bishops through Paul. 
 I said I would teach 9 them. I am now with you particularly. I give 
 
 tion, must, for distinction's sake, be written more slanting than Chay say at an 
 angle with the line of 30 degrees. But in other cases, more or less slanting ac- 
 cording to ease of junction. 
 
 ' 4 and the world. Reject the as easily supplied, and also as an impediment 
 to writing the phrase, and write Ketoid-Eld 2 , and [the] world. This secures Kid 
 in its position. 
 
 5 will think you are a coward. How shall we dispose of this speech- 
 phrase? Write in the order : Lay2-Ith-Yuh Ray-Tetoid ; and for greater legibility 
 put coward, Kary-Red, in the third position, that is, with the first stroke not hori- 
 zontal through the line. It is not the Kay being below the line that makes such 
 a form third position. Why not join the a to the following word as usual ? Be- 
 cause Tetoid prefixed to Kay Red 3 , would be in position of Tetoid 4 , to a. 
 
 of a human being. Observe that nearness here implies of: that Men is 
 not in the fourth, but in the third position, and is read human ; and that being 
 (written Bee in this phrase) is perfectly legible without the Ing usually required. 
 
 " into your hands. As Ends for hands will hardly join to Yay, let us try, 
 as in many other cases, writing, in the briefest practicable way, the consonants 
 of Tay-Ends, namely, by Yaynds=y nds=your hands. Does the pupil say that all 
 such devices would have to be memorized in addition to the "Lists" of word- 
 signs, contractions, etc.? By no means. The principles exemplified by this 
 Reader will enable you with a pleasurable spontaneity to form thousands of 
 phrases you never before saw, perhaps, and to see that the " Lists " are so found- 
 ed on rule or reason as to be regarded as natural, according to the Hand-Book 
 system, rather than as " Lists " of arbitraries. 
 
 * against you. Try joining these words without any omission, and say 
 what consonants are in the way. Evidently the n and t, Omit these, and then 
 yon can write Gays-Yuh, agai's' you. Observe that the circle here is the simple 
 circle and not the Ens-circli-. 
 
 9 I said I would teach. Would is here joined as a hook, upon the princi- 
 ple of joining it to the horizontal ond-tick. See 201, H. C, o, which, to be sufflci- 
 
KEY TO THE E2POKTIXG EXERCISES. 119 
 
 you a promise by yourself. I give you supreme authority over the 
 whole Church. Here are the keys of the whole kingdom of heaven. 
 You have all the keys and all the flock, and lo ! I am with you al- 
 ways, to the consummation of the world. Peter, there shall be but 
 one fold, and one shepherd, even as there is 10 one faith, one Lord, one 
 baptism. 11 There shall be but one fold and one shepherd, and you 
 are the shepherd over all my flock. The oneness of faith is the 
 same as the oneness of God. There is no change in God, and there is 
 none in faith. God the same yesterday, to-day, and forever ; the 
 same in faith. God, one ; faith, one. No other idea' 2 in the whole 
 universality of human thought can tell you what the oneness of faith 
 is except comparing it to the oneness and unchangeableness of God 
 himself. "Lo! I am with you always 13 and the gates of hell shall 
 not prevail against you." I therefore put my document out of my 
 hand, and I ask you is the death of Christ itself put 
 
 in stronger language than that ? No. Is it oftoner ex- 
 pressed? No. Is it clearer? No. If you cannot be- 
 lieve that, therefore, hov,r can you believe 1 in the death of Christ, or 
 
 cicntly comprehensive, should read "Tho reporter joins a brief Way like an Eu- 
 hook to tho ticks and dashes iu tho direction of Pec, Kay, or Hay to add what or 
 would; thiis, PentouU, of what; Pentoid 2 , <o wAa; Beudoid 1 , ail would; Keiitoid 1 , 
 and w'tat ; Kentoid 2 , and would (sometimes, ia phrase-writing, I would); Rontoid-. 
 he would." 
 
 1 as t>ere is. To harmonize, as fir and is thr with was thr, substitute Zoo 
 for tho circle ; and add tor by lengthening. Thus you will securo a beautiful 
 series : Zeedher 1 , is thr ; Zeedher 2 , was thr ; Zeedher 3 , as (or has) Ihr. There are 
 occasional instances where the Dhcr-ticli may be advantageously joined to Iss foi- 
 l's thr, has tlir. Seo DHB, THEIB, THEY ABE, THEBE, and OTHEB, in the Dictionary. 
 
 11 baptism. Tho word one is here omitted twice, and a space left for it. As 
 It ia not a "clauso" or "a few words" omitted each time, neither a dasli nor 
 comma is substituted ; a little more space than usual between words serving to 
 suggest the omitted word. Seo 276. 
 
 12 no other idea. Another being written Endhcr 2 , tho consonant of an 
 lengthened, wo write Eudher 3 , no other ; Endher 1 , any other, in thr. 
 
 13 Ix> ! I am \vitli you always. This is a good illustration of tho gradual 
 agglutination of words ia phrase-writing. The stenographer, perhaps, breaks up 
 such a phrase into several parts; as, "Lo! /-am. with-you always." Then, lo-I- 
 am-with->jou. Finally, always may bo added. 
 
 2r i how can you believe. How shall wo dispose of this speech-phrase 
 J in writing? limn, of course, we shall not write by tho Old word-sign, 
 on, which is left to stand in the corresponding style, being the vowel part of the 
 word, suggestive, and for that style sufficiently brief; but not answering well 
 
120 SECOND STANDAED-PHONOGUAPHIO HEADER. 
 
 his life, or resurrection ? What do you depend on for salvation ? The 
 death of Christ. Is it clearer than the document I have read? No. 
 Is it fuller? No. It is one plain, legal, constitutional, did.-irtir doc- 
 ument. Do you believe it as firmly as the cross? I certainly do. 
 Therefore, instructed according to all this testimony, 2 the testimony 
 of God the Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghost, you must believe me 
 or any man in my place. It is a plain statement clear, constitu- 
 tional language. I therefore submit to you Is the death of Christ, 
 or his resurrection, or his cross, told with a more accumulated evi- 
 dence than the clear infallibility of the Catholic Church ? You say, 
 certainly not. You believe, then, we are infallible? I do. Now, I 
 conclude my argument. I call the Pope, and I put him in a largo 
 chair, and I say, Sir, you will please take the presidency of this meet- 
 ing. Then I call all the bishops, and I put them in one large con- 
 gregation before the Pope. I say there is Peter, and here arc Paul 
 and the apostles and all the bishops of the Church. Then recollect 
 the promise that he is with them. The Father has given a particu- 
 lar promise. The Father has said it,'- 1 the Son has avowed it, and the 
 Holy Ghost declares it. Now, I call upon that whole assembly to tell 
 me what is the faith. They do ; and when they have got up a docu- 
 ment and signed it, I believe that is infallible as surely as Christ is 
 alive. And if you can put that out of my head, I do not believe one 
 word of the Book. 
 
 for a reporting style. Nor will we write it by the " heavy mfur h," because of its 
 absurdity ; nor by the Pitmauic Iss-Cher for h, because not only absurd, but vio- 
 lating every principal purpose of shorthand. But let us use the Standard-Pho- 
 nographic A-tick. As the word he is represented by the A-tick in the second 
 position, let us, for the sake of legibility, put the A-tick for how iu the third posi- 
 tion ; then add can by Kay (omitting the En-hook as an impediment here to join- 
 ing); join Yen for you, to which you may easily join Bel for believe. 
 
 4 according to all tills testimony. Kred 1 =according ; to which add to all 
 by its Standard-Phonographic sign Pletoid (that is, the tick for to, with the El- 
 hook adding all); then add the rest of the phrase. 
 
 2 the Father has said it. The principal subjects joined are pronouns, 
 because of their frequency and distinctiveness of form, and the need of their 
 being written with great speed. But other words in the subjective relation, may 
 be joined when sufficiently distinct by form or by recurrence ; and, of course, 
 when easily joinable. Here, for instance, the familiar word Father (=God) is 
 being spoken of (i.'., is in the subjective, or nominative case) ; to this we add 
 has by Iss ; we enlarge the Iss to add the * of said ; and we shorten the d of said 
 to add it. Under the same principle we join in this sentence, Son to has-avoioed- 
 it; and Hay 3 -Gay (Holy Ghost) is joined to declares it. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 121 
 
 THE AMERICAN BIBLE SOCIETY. 
 
 [An Address by the Rev. Dr. William J. Sassnelt, of Alabama, delivered at the 
 Academy of Music, at the celebration of the Forty-Fourth Anniversary 
 (18fiO) of the American Bible Society. Reported in full by Andrew J. 
 Graham, for the Society.*] 
 
 THE Rev. WILLIAM J. SASSNETT, D.D., of Alabama, offered the fol- 
 lowing resolution : 
 
 " Resolved, That this Society is entitled to the hearty co-operation* 
 of every philanthropist and Christian, because, in the principles upon 
 which it is based, and in its grand design, it prominently' J represents 
 those great central ideas which most concern the highest and best 
 interests 7 of the human race." 
 
 Sir, I offer s this resolution, because I believe it expresses a great 
 truth in connection with the enterprise which it is the object of this 
 occasion to serve, 9 a truth which ought always to be clearly set forth 
 and urged whenever we attempt to announce to the world the 
 grounds upon which this enterprise rests its claim to public sympa- 
 thy, confidence, and co-operation. 
 
 Sir, the only conflict 10 in the world 
 
 * The officers of tho Society, in the pamphlet containing the Anniversary ad- 
 dresses, credit the reporting in the following words : "We are indebted, for tho 
 excellent reports of several of theso addresses [all the unwritten ones], to tho skill 
 and fidelity of tho reporter, Mr. Andrew J. Graham." 
 
 c to tho licarty co-operation. Put the hook of Ilay in the fourth posi- 
 tion to imply to, and supply the, to which add hearty co-operation 
 
 c prominently. See Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, ADMONISH. 
 
 7 and best interests. Hero you could omit the t of best and Bees 2 might be 
 misread base. 
 
 8 I offer. Fcr 1 for offer is hero vocalized, to distinguish it from form (Fer 1 ); 
 though there is no special need of its being vocalized. 
 
 1J to serve. Here the Iss of serve may bo put in the fourth position to imply 
 the innnitivo particle to. 
 
 10 only conflict. Here con may be implied by writing under. This implica- 
 tion, however, would not bo used when tho following word would run too far 
 below the line, or when you particularly desire tho following word in its posi- 
 tion. 
 
122 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 24 
 
 is between ideas good ideas and bad 1 ideas, true ideas 
 and false ones. 2 
 
 The American Bible Society is based upon 3 and represents ideas 
 ideas vast, all-comprehending ; as wide as is the sphere of human in- 
 terest, as enduring as human destiny. 
 
 It is because it does represent these ideas, and for their vast dynam- 
 ic and aggressive operations, that I shall claim, to-day, that this 
 Institution is one of the grandest agencies of usefulness that the world 
 now affords ; that it is an honor to the American people ;' and that it 
 deserves the countenance and the co-operation of every man and wo- 
 man who wishes to turn his or her influence to the very best account 
 in advancing the happiness of mankind. 
 
 What, now, are these ideas? 5 To some of them, at least, I propose 
 to call the attention of this assembly to-day. The first great idea 
 upon which the American Bible Society 8 is based is this, that if the 
 
 24 
 
 and bad. 259, II. 1, 6. 
 
 8 and false ones. As Ketoid for and could not be quite conveniently 
 prefixed to Fel and Thel and their mates, use Tetoid instead ; aud, therefore, 
 disjoin or preceding them. 
 
 3 based upon. We drop the cd=t of based, BO that we may, as is desirable, 
 join upon. 
 
 4 American people. If this phrase were occurring often, I should omit 
 one of the hooks ; that of American (Em-Ken), of course, rather than of people ; 
 lor this can, on account of its larger number of consonants, best suffer contrac- 
 tion without impairing its legibility. 
 
 5 these ideas. With such frequent use of idea-s as in this speech, wo may 
 safely omit the diphthong when it is in the. way of joining, as it is here. 
 
 6 American Bible Society. The engraving of this speech will finely illus- 
 trate progressive contractions. When this phrase occurred above, it was writ, 
 ten in full, with tho exception that the settled contraction (Em-Ken) for American 
 was used. In this case the principle of 237, R. 2, 6, is acted upon in writing 
 Bee for Bible, and Es for Society, the latter being written through Bee, to secure 
 greater legibility. Let me write as though I were describing the actual, the 
 \vouderJully-rapid and marvelous operations of the mind in reporting. " This 
 phrase will probably occur many times in this speech. The next time it occurs 
 I will fully apply tho principle fcr forming special contractions (237, R. 2, 6). 
 writing Em for American, Bee for Bible (to be expressed by widening Em) and Kg 
 for Society. " Suppose that the form ErnbfEs has been employed one or more 
 times, tho Es, for the sako of legibility, being written through Emb ; the prac- 
 ticed reporter will next seek to save tho lifting of tho pen, and will join Es to 
 Emb, (rusting that memory and the context will enable him to read correctly 
 this very brief contraction, by which he will save as much as tho writing of Bible 
 and Society every time the phraso "American Bible Society " occurs. 
 
KEY TO THE nEPORTHCa EXEBCISES. 123 
 
 world is ever redeemed it must be by external, supernatural agencies. 
 There have 7 always been two leading opinions or theories in the world 
 in reference to religion. The one is, that the world contains or em. 
 braces* within itself- 1 all needed elements for its own development, 
 and progress, and salvation ; and that whatever has ever been achieved 
 of good, and whatever has pertained to the world's progress, is duo 
 alone to these elements embodied within its own organization. Tho 
 other is, that the world has within itself, that man has within him- 
 self, no good, and that all that is redeeming and saving must coma 
 from a higher and supernatural source ; and that whatever exists, 
 that whatever may exist, whatever may have the appearance of im- 
 provement, of growth and progress, outside of these agencies and ele- 
 ments, but leaves man upon the same 1 " dead level of moral depravity 
 and alienation from God. These two theories, we say, have ever 
 been in conflict ; and perhaps this conflict was never waged with more, 
 violence than in the present day. The activity of the human reason, 
 the degree in which all those fields of thought have been occupied 
 which come under the supervision of the mere reason, the activity 
 which is given to human elements, has developed a vain philosophy, 
 in the form" of rationalism, naturalism, 12 and secularism, 13 which is 
 at this time imperiling the faith of God's people, antagonizing tho. 
 divine and supernatural as regards our faith, and as regards what pro- 
 motes the weal of our race. If there ever was a time when God's 
 people should fall back upon the supernatural, and should express 
 their faith in God and his sovereignty ; if there ever was a time when 
 they should bring out this faith in a spiritual 14 and personal God, and 
 
 * there have. Dherf 2 ia a word-sign for there have, introduced into Stand- 
 ard Phonography, in accordance with the license of 182, E. 1, 6. 
 
 * or embraces. As and could here be written by Eetoid (as is best when it 
 Is easy), we know that Tetoid hero is or. 
 
 9 within itself. See the Standard- Phonographic Dictionary, tinder ITSELK 
 
 10 upon the same. Let us here write the by Petoid so that same may join 
 easily. 
 
 11 in the form. \Ve may omit the here as it may readily be supplied. If the 
 writer desired ho could write Petoid for the the and not break up the phrase. 
 
 12 naturalism. This presents one of the several applications of the rule to 
 tarn the simple circle in the most convenient way. To write It on the concava 
 aides of both of the letters, is obviously easier than to write on the back of the El 
 as prescribed by the Old-Phonographic practice. 
 
 1 3 and secularism. Here write Tetoid for and as tie horizontal tick would 
 COt be quite easy. 
 
 win a spiritual. -P. 168, R. 10. 
 
124 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 rely upon agencies that are alone spiritual and supernatural for the 
 accomplishment of these great results, 15 now is that time. If there 
 ever was a time when we should cling to those institutions whose 
 design is to hold up the supernatural and the divine in opposition to 
 a vain, worldly philosophy, now is that time. I glory in the Ameri- 
 can Bible Society because it is such an Institution, and that, as far as 
 it speaks at all, it speaks for God a personal God for the supernat- 
 ural, for the divine, for the spiritual, in all the agencies which look 
 to the growth and the salvation of man. Let us cleave to it, there- 
 fore." If all else were banished, if it were to lose all other agencies, 
 still, as far as the American Bible Society lives, and speaks, and has 
 influence in the world at all, it is for the truth, for evangelical truth, 
 for a spiritual religion, for the Bible in opposition to the tide of secu- 
 larism and a vain, wicked philosophy, that is now doing so much to 
 damage the faith and practice of God's people. 
 
 Another idea upon which the American Bible Society is based is, 
 that if the world is ever 181 Christianized it must be by the active in- 
 strumentality of those among whom God's oracles are deposited. 
 While the Society clings to the supernatural, while it recognizes the 
 fact that the world is redeemed and saved only through the agency 
 of God a personal, spiritual God yet at the same time it does not 
 hold that it is by an invisible, miraculous agency that the world, af- 
 ter all, is to be redeemed and saved, to the exclusion of the human ; 
 but that God expects every man and woman to contribute to the 
 great work of redeeming the human race. The American Bible So- 
 
 i- these great results. The essential principle of 171, 1, 2, 3, and 4, of the 
 Compendium is that An initial circle implies an Ar-liook when tontttn differently 
 from the simple circle. No case of joining a Sper Rign to a preceding curve was 
 there specified, because there if no instance of it in a simple word ; but such 
 joining is sometimes useful in phrase- writing, as in the present phrase-sign. In 
 this sign, Iss must be understood to imply an Ar-hook (in accordance with the 
 principle just mentioned;; for otherwise it should have been on the upper side 
 of Get, in accordance with the rule tor writing the circle between two strokes. 
 27,4. 
 
 is -whoso. In the Old Phonography tclio, vhoff, and wliom were written re- 
 spectively Jedoid 2 , Zee 11 , Em 3 . In Standard Phonography this confusion is re- 
 moved by writing who and whom by Jedoid'2. and forming a sign for whose by the 
 general rule for writing derivative sign-words. Please read p. 142, E. 5. 
 
 17 to it, therefore. 204, R. 5, 2. This instance of the advantageous com- 
 bination of two of the peculiar principles of Standard Phonography ought not to 
 bo pafsed over without remark. Compare it with the Old Phonographic espres- 
 Bion, Petoid2-Tee Dher^-Ef. See Part V. of the Hand Book, S 11. 
 
 i* is ever. 2iG, 4. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 125 
 
 ciety looks abroad ; and while it does not controvert the 19 question 
 or the position as to whether the 20 heathen are to be saved outside of 
 religious life, the advantages and teachings of the Bible, or not, 21 
 yet it proclaims that more heathen will be saved, under any and all 
 circumstances, 
 
 25 
 
 with the light of the Bible than without it. It claims 
 that it would lead them to a higher 1 standard- than they 
 have under heathenism. It claims, too, that the salvation which 
 would bo realized under the teachings of the Bible is a nobler and 
 broader salvation, brought about under the full development of God 
 Ahuighty's agency 3 for the world's salvation. It claims, too, as a 
 matter of some consequence, to banish from heathen lands the cruel- 
 tics, the immoralities, and depravities that prevail, and to let in 
 among them the 1 light, knowledge, and happiness which flow from 
 the prevalence of a lofty Christian civilization. Hence it is that they 
 arc eager to disseminate Christianity in heathen lands. The Bible 
 Society is founded upon the idea of aggression in these quarters ; and 
 the Bible Society looks around and sees these dark places that arc in 
 
 19 and -while it does not controvert the. The practiced reporter may 
 imply contra-o, etc., as well as con-m, by writing the remainder of the word par- 
 tially under the preceding, as in this phrase-sign. 
 
 20 as to whether the. Waydher i =<o whether, to which add as by Iss 2 . 
 
 21 or not. The defect of the Old Phonography iii providing only a compara- 
 tively slow expression for the rapidly-spoken phrases or not, but not, is removed 
 in Standard Phonography by adding an En-hook (for not) to or (Tetoid 1 ) and but 
 (Tetoid-). Soe p. 90, 12 ', of this Reader, as to the liability of such, signs (as 
 Tentoid, etc.) conflicting with other signs. 
 
 n " J to a higher. I* being a word-sign for high, wo add Est for highest, 
 >*J In the cs (where legibility is the greater need), join Ar to high (i') for 
 
 higher. The reporter may employ the same form, or write Ar 1 , omitting the vowel. 
 
 But the vowel is preferable where the word is out of position, as here. 
 
 - standard. 23G, 4. 
 
 3 God Almighty's agency. To sernre a desirable, writing-phrase for this 
 speech-phrase, omit from Bedoid'-Mets (Almighty's) the Bedoid and join agency. 
 
 4 among them the. Why not join the to among them? Because among them 
 is not related to, or phraseographioally connected with the ; "the" here is a part 
 of the phrase and to let in the; and "among them,'' as shown by the obvious pauses 
 of the voice (although no pauses are written), is parenthetic ; and such parenthet- 
 ic phrases may frequently t.-ike two or more positions ; as, " In the next place, 1 
 will remark that" or, " I will, in the next place, remark that " or, "I will re- 
 mark, in the next place, that ." 
 
126 SECOND STANDAKDrPnONOGEAl'HIC READER. 
 
 our cities and towns, these precincts of deadncss and darkness where 
 there is no God recognized, and where the people are sunken in their 
 ignorance and depravity, and feels that if these people are ever en- 
 lightened and redeemed, 3 it must be through the instrumentality of 
 those outside of them whom God has enlightened, and with whom 
 He lias deposited his Sacred Oracles. Hence it is that the American 
 Bible Society is engaged in the work of translating the Bible into all 
 languages ; and 0, how it presents itself to my mind, that from this 
 Society a Bible is to go out adapted to all people" in all climes and all 
 circumstances a Bible translated for the hordes of Asia. Africa, and 
 South America, and the islands of the sea our own Bible translated. 
 so as to be accessible 7 to all these people. The Bible Society is 
 aggressive in its relations in other respects. Look at its system of 
 colportage, with agents scattered all over this land ; and that is 
 
 one reason why I have loved the 9 Bible Society so long. I have 
 
 % 
 
 5 and redeemed. Why not read Tetoid here as or? Because and has the 
 preference in joining. We use for and the horizontal tick when it joins easily 
 and legibly ; otherwise use the secondary form ; and remember that where and 
 would necessarily be joined by Tetoid, that Tetoid 1 for or must be disjoined. The 
 disjoining of or in such cases is suggested by a slight voice pause occurring after 
 or, while and ADDS or ands the following word, and there is usually no voice- 
 pause following it. See examples of the same distinction in "and feels that" a 
 little before the phrase commented on. 
 
 6 to all people. How beautifully works here the Standard-Phonographic 
 principles of varied modes of expression for frequently-occurring sign-words, 
 such as all, of, to, or, but, on, should, etc. If we had but one possible representa- 
 tion for each of the sign-words alluded to, many rapidly-uttered speech-phrases 
 would have to be slowly written by the reporter. In the first of the three phrases 
 occurring together here, we add all by a small El-hook on a tick ; and so in "and 
 all circumstances," while in " ire all climes," we use a new principle introduced by 
 the Haml-Book, namely, using a large El-hook on En. 
 
 " accessible. In the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, access has its posi- 
 tion noted thus : " rs, KaysesV to insure the distinguishing of it from Kayses 2 , 
 exercise. If these words be regarded as word-signs, then an added Bee for ble or 
 bility should NOT take them from their position ; and we should write Kayses 2 - 
 Bee, exercixible f-ility); Kayses 3 -Bee, accessible f-ility). But if you prefer to regard 
 exercise and access as NOT sign words, then, under the general rule of word-posi- 
 tion, the "first stroke not horizontal," namel-, Bee in exercisible and accessible, 
 would rest on the line ; Kayses-Bee 2 , being either EX'ercmfcfe or accEss-iWe. But 
 Kayses 2 -Bee, exercisible, and Kayses^-Bee, accessible, under dws rules of position, 
 secure a complete distinction. See, in this Reader, pp. 63-64, the Exhibit of 
 Reporting-Style Position. See first paragraph of p. 64, and on p. 65 see "Remark 
 2," quoted from the Hand-Book, 261, R. 2. 
 
 8 I have loved the. When the Vee-hook of Teftoidi (for /flare) will prevent 
 the formation of a desirable phrase-sign, the hook (for ftare) may be omitted, aud 
 ftare be supplied by the context, especially if it be made a rule that Tetoid 1 for / 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 127 
 
 Been' those agents moving about here and there, 1 " over those plains 
 and mountain sides, carrying the Word of God, and scattering it among 
 the destitute of the land. I love the Bible Society because I see that 
 it is aggressive, that it is missionary, and that it has planted itself 
 upon the true missionary principle of the Gospel that of carrying, 
 by its own active efforts, the Bible into all lands and countries. 
 
 Again, we could not get" along, and I tell our people so, in our 
 missionary operations without the Bible Society. We send our mis- 
 sionaries to China, to Turkey, and elsewhere over the earth ; and 
 what 12 can we accomplish there, 13 but for our 14 reliance upon the 
 American Bible Society ? It is our strong earthly arm of support. 
 And so in reference to our missionary fields among these thinly-popu- 
 
 is followed by hive, WHENEVER SOME OTHEB DIRECTION OF THE /-TICK MIGHT HAVE 
 BEEN AS CONVENIENTLY EMPLOYED. Hence, Tetoid in this phrase-sign is to l)o 
 read / have, because / without have might have been even more conveniently writ- 
 ten by Petoid. (6). But observe that this rule does not apply in the phrase- 
 signs TetoicU-Wuh, I would ; and Tetoid^Retoid, I should. 
 
 9 I have seen. (a). Have in this phrase must and may readily be supplied 
 to complete the sense, and is omitted under the principle of 250, 3. (6). There is 
 no difficulty in supplying have preceding ANY past participle whose outline differs 
 from the past tense (or time), as do the following: 
 
 Arisen 
 
 Driven 
 
 Laden 
 
 Stolen 
 
 Awaked 
 
 Eaten 
 
 Lain 
 
 Striven 
 
 Beaten 
 
 Fallen 
 
 Risen 
 
 Sworn 
 
 Been 
 
 Flown 
 
 Seen 
 
 Taken 
 
 Bitten 
 
 Forsaken 
 
 Shaken 
 
 Thrown 
 
 Blown 
 
 Frozen 
 
 Slain 
 
 Told 
 
 Borne 
 
 Gone 
 
 Smitten 
 
 Torn 
 
 Broken 
 
 Grown 
 
 Sown 
 
 Woven 
 
 Chosen 
 
 Hidden 
 
 Spoken 
 
 Written 
 
 Drawn 
 
 Known 
 
 
 
 (c). BUT OBSERVE, that have should not be omitted when it can be conven- 
 iently expressed by a hook, as in writing / have chosen, Teftoid^Chays-En ; / have 
 taken, Teftoid^Ten ; / have known, Teftoid^Ncn ; I have gone, Teftoid l -Gen. 
 
 i" here and there. See, in this Reader, Exhibit of Phonographic Phrase- 
 Writing, B, II., 1. 
 
 11 we could not {ret. See Introduction of this Reader, p. CO, xi. 
 ls and what. See p. 76, note 13, , of this Reader. 
 
 13 can we accomplish there. 169, R. 12. See, also, p. 86, 9, of this 
 Reader. 
 
 11 for our. The general rule is that when our is added by an Ar-hook, the 
 word to which it is added should retain its position ; thus, Beri, by our; Ter', at 
 our ; Cher*. ?o/n'c/i our. But in a few oases the new sign takes the position of the 
 added word for the sukc of distinguishing it from some other sign, as Fcr 3 , for 
 our, to distinguish it from For 2 , from. 
 
128 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 lated sections of our country, and in the dark places of the land, wo 
 could not achieve anything without the agencies which are furnished 
 from the American Bible (Society. Therefore it is, 15 that I regard this 
 Society as based upon a great idea, the missionary idea, the idea of 
 aggression, the idea of putting into the hands of God's people a Bible 
 to be carried anywhere on the face of the earth. And in this view 
 how the importance of the American Bible Society is magnified 
 
 Look around. ' For the first time in the history of this world, the 
 bars of intolerance everywhere upon the face of the earth are broken 
 down. In Europe, by reason of international association and commer- 
 cial communication ; in Asia, China, Japan, the islands of the sea, 
 anywhere and everywhere over the face of the earth, the Bible and 
 missionaries may now have access. Why should not this excite with- 
 in us a desire to do more than we have ever done, that we may make 
 our labors in this respect commensurate with our responsibilities ! 
 Oh ! if there ever was a time when God's people should be aroused, it 
 is now. The world is open to us ; the Protestant nations of the world 
 have acquired an ascendancy over the balance of mankind, such as 
 gives us unlimited access to all portions 17 of the race. The old, effete, 
 worn-out religions arc actually turning loose their 18 millions to our 
 embrace, and they are ready to receive the Word of God, and all that 
 is necessary is to furnish this agency with the means, and soon all 
 over the earth the Bible of God will circulate. 
 
 Another idea upon which the American Bible Society is 
 based is, that 1 if the Christian religion is to 2 save the 
 world, the Bible is the grand instrumentality by which this work is 
 
 is therefore it is. P. 61, xvi. of this Reader. 
 
 i" look around. This phrase may be expressed by an occasional phraseo- 
 graphic principle, namely, writing the consonants of the phrase in the most 
 speedy manner, without reference to the forms of the separate words ; as, Lay 3 - 
 Krent, look around; Tend 3 , at hand; TensS, at once; Telsts, at least; TeeS-Nert, 
 at any rate. 
 
 17 to all portions. This phrase is constructed in accordance with the prin- 
 ciple of But it (Tetoid2-Tee). Pletoid^-Pee is distinguished from Pels t> y the fact 
 that the El-hook is barely above the line, whereas on Pel* it would be considera- 
 bly higher ; for half of Pel 3 would bo above the line. 
 
 is turning loose their. Omit the ing-dot as an impediment to a desirable 
 phrase here, and join loose their. 
 
 f^n l is that. Here it is convenient to join to is the conjunction that. 
 
 " is to. IsB'-Petowl, ts to, is written very easily thus, with the advan- 
 tage of putting save in its position. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 129 
 
 to be accomplished. No matter what other means 3 may bo relied 
 upon, and there should be other means, 4 there must be church organ- 
 ization ; there must be ministers ; there must be prayer and faith ; 
 yet, after all, 5 God expects U8 S to employ and rely upon the Bible, as 
 one of the chief agencies by which this great work 7 is to be accom- 
 plished; and I tell you that 1 * we honor God most when we honor his 
 Bible most ; when we rely upon his Word most, when we bring it out* 
 and give prominence to it in all our church movements and evangel- 
 ical enterprises, we honor God most, and put ourselves where we open 
 most of the channels through which 10 God's grace, and love, and 
 mercy shall flow out upon the world. Now, I believe in employing 
 all other instrumentalities that arc recognized as right and proper. I 
 believe that it is right to have" a religious literature. I believe that 
 we should rely upon these subordinate agencies ; but I am not sure 
 that 1 '- in our reliance upon these, we have not too much excluded the 
 Bible as the grand instrumentality in the conversion of the world. 13 
 
 s what other means. P. CO, xiii. of this Reader. Here tins rapid means of 
 expressing other not only secures speed iu writing this word, but avoids two lift- 
 ings or inconvenient junctions that would otherwise have been required. 
 
 4 and there should T>e other means. lu this phrase other might have 
 been joined in the. Old Phonograph y by Dlier ; but the novel Standard-Phono- 
 graphic principle of lengthening to express other secures a great gain. See DHB 
 in the Standard -Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 5 yet after all. To secure this phrase, drop the slight pause before tho 
 parenthetical " after all." 
 
 6 God expects ns 244, R. 3, 1 ; 182, R. 2. 
 
 " this great work. See p. 124, note 15, of this Reader. 
 
 8 and I tell you that. And is joined by Ketoid to / (written by one of its 
 joining forms Tetoid best here); to which yon join tho verb tell; to which you 
 join you (the indirect object, or dative); to which join that (the conjunction). 
 
 when wo bring it out. When-we-brwg-it-out (shortening tho it to add t 
 
 for out, rendered more certain by vocalizing). 
 
 10 through which. Observe the required shape to distinguish Ther--Chay 
 from Therdhei-2. 
 
 i' I believe that it is right to have. Retoid-BeP (T believe what ?) Dhet- 
 Tees-Ray-Tee (that it is rjV/Mj-Vee-hook (have, the to being supplied). 
 
 i'- but I am not sure that. But what ? / (Ketoid) am not what ? Sure 
 (joined easily by a little offset for each of tho hooks); to which join the conjunc- 
 tion (hat. 
 
 13 in the conversion of the world. To secure for this speech-phrase an 
 easy writing phrase, wo raise tho I'H, to keep Vershoii 1 (conversion) in its assigned 
 position, and join Eld for world; having omitted the and of the as impedimenta 
 and as readily supplied. 
 
130 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 I am not so sure but that we ignore 14 and disregard this, God's own 
 light, too much in all our efforts to save the world. 1 * The church 
 must embody it. Not that it should rely less upon other means 10 and 
 and agencies which it employs, but that it should use this 17 more. I 
 would to God 1 ' that all our denominations were more active in the 
 circulation of the Bible. I would that they felt more that it is God's 
 Word, 19 and that, whatever other means they may employ, this is 
 the light of heaven, and the instrumentality which God recognized in 
 the accomplishment of this grand design. 20 Now, the American Bible 
 Society is based upon this grand idea. u Its whole effort is to circu- 
 late God's Word ; in so far as it has any design, any efliciency at all, 
 it is to give prominence to the Bible ; it is to give it a worldwide cir- 
 culation. And if the views I have presented- 2 in regard to it be true, 
 
 14 ignore. In the second position, because the accent is on the 6 not i. But 
 we write Noras 1 for ignorance, and Nerut 1 for ignorant, because in these words the 
 accent is on i, a first-place vowel. 
 
 15 to save the world. Imply to by putting save in the fourth position ; 
 omit the as an impediment ; and join world ; thus writing four words (twelve vo- 
 cal elements) by two strokes. 
 
 i upon other means. P. 169, R. 12. See Standard-Phonographic Diction- 
 ary, Dan. 
 
 17 use this. Keep on the heaviness from the middle of Zee to the middle of 
 Dhee ; which makes the combination easier than if you write the Zee ending 
 light, and the Dhee beginning light. 
 
 18 I would to God. This, and thousands of similar phrases exclamations, 
 modifying clauses, etc., which are rarely found iu books, but which are fre- 
 quently introduced into extemporaneous discourses, and spoken with great ra- 
 pidity are expressed in Standard Phonography with ease and rapidity, which 
 iu the Old Phonography were not only expressed with confusing slowness, but 
 not unfrequently with considerably less speed than other portions of speech less 
 rapidly uttered. 
 
 19 I would that they felt more that it is God's Word. This speech- 
 phrase might be nisely written thus: Tetoid l -\Viih (I-viould) Dhet'-Dhee-Felt- 
 Mer-Dhet{tta<-///y felt- 7norc-Vi.a,'):Tep$--Geds Word (it-is- God s-Word). The first that, 
 not very easily joined to would, is put with the following word ; and the second 
 tliat you will feel must not be joined with more unless it is joined to felt. This 
 fiat depends upon the verb felt, and is the representative of the following words, 
 it is God's word. 
 
 20 this grand design. See p. 124, note 15, of this Reader. 
 
 - 1 this grand idea. As the i of idea will not join with grand, drop it, and 
 write it sepaartely. 
 
 "I have presented. See note 18 on p. 105 of this Reader. To secure a 
 writiag-phnM for this speech-phrase, omit the Vee-hook. supplying it by the 
 context. As I present would be written Petoid'-Perib-Ent, the use of Tetoid rather 
 implies have. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 131 
 
 then is the American Bible Society an important agency, one that we 
 should all love, and shoiild co-operate with one which we should 
 seek to develop, and make more efficient than it ever has been in all 
 the past. I have had my heart- 3 often glow with enthusiastic delight 
 when traveling up and down the- 4 coimtry, going into log cabins 25 to 
 preach, and finding a Bible, and upon opening it, seeing the imprint 
 of the American Bible Society. It is this agency, I tell you, which 
 gives prominency to the Bible over American lands. Depend upon it, 
 if you were- 6 to shut out the American Bible Society, and the circula- 
 tion which it gives to the Bible, and banish it from the land, awful 
 would be the vacuum. It does more to give prominence to the Bible, 
 to bring out a pure evangelical religion, to resist the tide of infidel- 
 ity and secularism, I verily believe before God, than any other one 
 distinct, isolated agency in this country.' I love the Society, because 
 I have seen its fruits away off yonder ; I have seen what it has done 
 in circulating the Bible among the poor and destitute, by means of the 
 efficient agency system which it has employed in those dark and desti- 
 tute places. I feel, before God, that if 3-011 have money, and means, 
 and influence, and want to do good, and lay up treasure in heaven; if 
 you want to make an impress for God, in your day and generation, 
 stand nobly by the American Bible Society. 
 
 Another idea upon which the American Bible Society is based is this, 
 that the Christian religion is the world's great civilizer ; and the great 
 blunder of the world is in trying to find out the best means to govern 
 men, whereas the true idea should be to teach men to govern them- 
 selves. We look around 27 over the country ; we look at our states- 
 
 23 I have had my heart. Here the curves for my and heart should be con- 
 siderably curved, to sharpen and nuiko easier the angle this rather than write 
 heart with the occasional form Ret. 
 
 21 up and down the. Omit the and (Ketoid here) as quite superfluous in 
 this phrase. If correspondingly written in longhand, the reader would readily 
 supply the and. Especially easy is it to supply words, such as and here, which 
 are usually but slightly spoken. 
 
 -' Ing cabins. The combination Gay-Kay or Kay-Gay is comparatively diffi- 
 cult, and in phrase-writing the reporter may usually obviate the difficulty by 
 omitting one of the consonants ; writing, for instance, El-Gay-Bens (i.e., log-'ab- 
 inz) for log cabins. 
 
 "" if you were. A distinction might be made between you were and you 
 would, by writing Yeh-weh for the former and Yuh-wuh for the latter. But this 
 distinction is of little consequence, since the context will suffice to distinguish 
 them if both are written alike ; and besides, to write them both alike (Yuh-wuh 
 or Yeh-weh, according to convenience) is following the analogy- of Waywehi for 
 we were or we would; Wuh-wuh 1 for what would, what were. 
 
 27 we look around. Wen-hook in first position for we ; add Lay-Krend for 
 
132 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC EEADER. 
 
 men, our legislators, and political philosophers, and we see tlicni 
 moving heaven and earth to control men ; but the American Bible So- 
 ciety seeks to reverse the policy, and proceeds upon the opposite idea, 
 that of training and leaching men to govern themselves that of in- 
 fusing the elements of intelligence, knowledge, wisdom, and virtue, 
 by which they can. regulate and direct themselves and their own con- 
 duct in life. Now, I hold that this is a great idea, important to be 
 looked to. A great drawback 
 
 27 
 
 upon our civilization, in these dark places, these pre- 
 cincts of our country, is that they arc made Tip of men 
 so depraved, so wretched, so ignorant as to be incapable 1 of Kelf-gov- 
 ermuent. 2 Educate and elevate the mind, so that they can judge and 
 determine for themselves, and all is well, and peaceful, and happy in 
 society. Now the Christian religion we hold accomplishes this ob- 
 ject. It teaches men that the body was made for the soul. It teaches 
 men that the doctrine of their immortality, and that the great end of 
 life, is to subject their lower nature to the higher nature. The Chris- 
 tian religion, I boldly maintain, is the author of all that is truly good 
 and benevolent in human nature ; that outside of the teachings of the 
 Christian religion all is selfishness ; that our ideas of charity, and true 
 benevolence, and love for our race, we get only in the Christian re- 
 ligion. It infuses in its ethics the true idea, regulates the conscience, 
 the interior man, and so enables him to govern himself. Now the 
 American Bible Society acts upon the idea that the great honor of this 
 country is the schoolmaster and the preacher ; not so much govern- 
 ment, law, and legislation. The Bible Society holds itself aloof from 
 other objects and plans ; but it seeks to elevate the individual man, 
 to give the Bible a wide circulation among the poor and the ignorant, 
 to train them for God and eternity. Remember that when you are 
 helping the 3 Bible Society, you arc helping on your race in the true 
 
 look around ; in which, to sayo disjoining, we write Ic-rnd with the most available 
 form, Kreud. In similar manner dispose of at our iu second phrase following. 
 
 Q w i incapable. The Corresponding-Style contraction, Kay -Bel 2 , for cnpn- 
 
 I ble, may itself suffer contraction in the Reporting Style, being written 
 Kay -Bee", the affix-sign for-6/e being used because more rapid than Bel. This 
 plan of writing -ble by the affix-sign may be adopted by the reporter in many 
 cases where, in the Corresponding Style, Bel would be and could be conveniently 
 employed. 
 
 2 self-government. P. 113, K. 14. 
 
 * whs-ii you arc helping the. See p. 59, (4), of this Reader. 
 
KEY. TO THE KEPOBTINa EXERCISES. 133 
 
 way of progress, elevation, and salvation. When you help on other 
 causes, it may or may not have this effect ; but, depend upon it, just 
 in proportion as you sustain the American Bible Society, you sustain 
 those elements and agencies which look toward the real, positive pro- 
 gress of your race ; you are doing that which elevates the mind, which 
 improves the conscience, which makes men capable of self-government 
 and advancement toward true civilization ; for there is no political 
 economy, no true political philosophy, no true government, or system 
 of morals, but such as Hows immediately out of the teachings of tho 
 gospel of Jesus Christ. Religion is not merely intended to save the 
 Koul in heaven, but to elevate the human race, and give it a loftier 
 civilization even here, and we should look upon it in this light ; and 
 because the Bible Society, without hindrance, without modification, 
 without let, without restriction or qualification, is consecrated to this 
 one end, I love it, and pray for it, and co-operate with it. 4 
 
 Allow me, as I have never had the pleasure of meeting with you 
 upon tliis platform before, and as I have come a long way, to present 
 one more idea. The next idea upon which the American Bible Society 
 is based, and which it represents prominently, is that of Christian un- 
 ity the entire oneness of God's people everywhere. Look at its or- 
 ganization. When was there ever a time when I met my brethren as 
 I meet them here to-day brethren of all the glorious old communions 
 that I have been hearing about, and thinking about, and praying 
 about so long? Oh, brethren! my heart is glad to meet you here 
 upon this platform to-day. The organization embodies representatives 
 from the prominent churches of our land. Its basis is such that all 
 love it, though we may to some extent put different constructions 
 upon some parts of it ; we all recognize it as the same 5 Holy Book 
 as coming from God the grand supernatural light, to teach a be- 
 nighted world the way to God and heaven. Upon that platform we 
 are all united. We are all united in the enjoyment of its effects ; for 
 your heart glows with gratitude and enthusiasm, as mine does, when- 
 ever I see the displays of God's work anywhere. We glory in the ef- 
 fects wrought by the American Bible Society. If it has been any- 
 where the instrumentality of bringing some poor unlettered man or 
 woman to God, we rejoice in it, no matter where it is, in what part 
 
 * with it. It is desirable that with it shall be written Dhet 1 , in analogy with 
 for it, if it, etc. To more readily distinguish it from that (Dheti), it may be writ- 
 ten with the bottom of the Dhet resting on tho upper line, or Dhet (i.e., Dhct 
 zero), as in the engraving. 
 
 G us the same. Better omit the as a hindrance and enlarge Iss 2 , to add tho 
 s of same ; then vocalize with a, to aid tho reading. 
 
134 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 of the country 1 ' it is. AVhenever we hear that good has come from this 
 Society, we all delight and rejoice in it. Brethren, in this day of 
 mutual antagonism, of strife, of divisions, 7 and to some extent^ sec- 
 tarian bitterness, I rejoice 
 
 OO that there is a platform upon which we can all stand ; I 
 >O rejoice that I can meet my brethren 1 here of the various 
 denominations of the country ; that here we arc all one, all alike 
 standing on the same common foundation ; I rejoice in this platform. 
 Coining, as I do, from Alabama, I rejoice to meet upon this platform 
 my brethren from the great State of New York, 2 from New England, 
 and the Northwest, and to feel that 3 here we are one, bound by the 
 same love to God and the same love to man, and destined to the same 
 common heaven, and with the same common Bible. I rejoice to meet 
 them where I believe there is a cementing and uniting power in the 
 American Bible Society. I feel it, and know it ; and here, my breth- 
 ren, standing upon the same common platform, 4 with the same com- 
 mon Bible, and destined to the same common heaven, can we not 
 have, and will we not have, the same common country. I feel and 
 
 6 in what part of the country. En 1 , in, shortened to add t for what; then 
 add Tret lor part ; oinit of the (as readily supplied), and add Kay for country. 
 
 1 of divisions. As there is an obvious pause V>efore this of, we write, and 
 do not imply it by writing divisions near the preceding word. 
 
 8 and to some extent. Omit the slight pause before the parenthetic ex- 
 pression, to some extent, Sem'-Stent, and prefix Ketoid for and. 
 
 _ Q i my brethren. 24G, 1. 
 
 2 from the great State of New York. A preposition, from, with 
 an object of seven words. HOW shall we produce a corresponding writing-phrase? 
 Fer2, from (omit Vie as superfluous, that is, needlessly written); add Grets, 
 great; join State by Iss-Tet (an optional form where the more regular Steh-Tee 
 cannot be easily used); omit of; join En-Yay for N. Y.=New York. 
 
 " and to feel that. Here (since Tetoid prefixed to Fel4 wonld be read as 
 but) prefix Ketoid as and to Fell (to feel)', then add Dhet for the that, called a " non- 
 junction," as bere it introduces, or stands for, a sub-sentence, which here ex- 
 tends to the following period-mark. 
 
 < upon the same common platform. P. 160, R. 12. Form is usually 
 contracted in the Reporting Style of Standard Plionography, Em being omitted. 
 See INFORM, UNIFORM, REFORM, MULTIFORM, TRANSFORM, DEFORM, PERFORM, 
 PLATFORM, etc., in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. These, in compliance 
 with the great principle of UNIFORMITY observed throughout Standard Pho- 
 nography, have analogous contractions. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 135 
 
 believe that wo will press onward in the great work of spreading 
 God's religion over all the face of the earth. These are aggressive 
 ideas ; they are wide, all-comprehensive, dynamic ideas, and we 
 should adhere to the American Bible Society, because it is based 
 upon and represents these aggressive ideas. 
 
 Brethren, I love to feel, when I am engaged in any cause, that it is 
 an expansive cause, and expanding world-wide, all-embracing ; that it 
 has love, and mercy, and hope. I love to think that it has a plat- 
 form, whereon all the lovers of the good and true can stand. And 
 it is for these reasons, among others, 5 that I love the American Bible 
 Society, and I shall carry home with me a strong affinity 3 and love 
 for it, because, since coming up here, I see elements of development, 
 of progress, of love, of expansive benevolence, such as enlist me, 
 more than ever, in this glorious cause. May God help you, and the 
 great city of New York, to stand by this, your glorious institution, 
 that reflects so much honor upon you 7 all over this land. May God 
 help you to sustain it, that its influence may go out all over this land, 
 
 5 among others. See Dim, in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 6 affinity. The cases in which contraction is resorted to in the Reporting 
 Style of Standard Phonography, in writing words ending in -ty, may be specified 
 as follows : 
 
 1. In many words the consonant (t) of the termination -ty is expressed by 
 shortening a letter ; thus, Eut 2 -Gret, integrity ; Pet-Blet, compatibility ; Tee 2 - 
 Tclt, totality ; Iss-Velti, civility ; Per-Shelt, partiality ; Fet 2 -Elt, fatality ; Pet'- 
 EH, futility ; Bret-Let, brutality; Kel-Met, calamity; Vees-Net, vicinity; EP- 
 Not, affinity ; Plent 3 , plenty ; Chert 3 , charity ; Pret 2 , pretty ; Bent 3 , bounty ; 
 Kleti, quality ; Gleti, guilty ; Flet', faulty ; ThreU, authority ; Meti, mighty ; 
 Sens-Ret, sincerity ; Met-Ret 3 , maturity ; Em-Jert 1 , majority ; Eta^Nert, minor- 
 ity ; Slay-Bret, celebrity ; Ef-Kelt, faculty ; Pers 2 -Pret, prosperity ; Emter 2 -Let, 
 materiality ; Fer^Let, formality ; Lay 2 -Kelt, locality. 
 
 2. The termination -ty is frequently omitted when the preceding part of the 
 word is sufficient to characterize it, especially when a rather difficult junction 
 would bo avoided ; thus, A T eld l (i.e., valid 1 , validity ; Ray 2 -Ped (i.e., rapid), rapid- 
 ity ; Kay-Ped 1 (i.e., cupid), cupidity ; Tcei-Mcd, timid-ity ; Emteru = (i'.e., matern), 
 maternity ; Fcrtern 3 (i.e., fratern), fraternity ; Ner l -Em (i.e., enorm), enormity ; 
 Lay l -Brr-l (i.e., liberal), liberality ; Rel 1 , reality ; Merl 2 , morality. 
 
 3. When -ty forms a part of the termination I t-j or r-t'j, (1) these terminations 
 are (a) either implied, by disjoining the preceding letter, as in the Corresponding 
 Stylo (232, 8), (fc) or, what is more usual in the Reporting Style, absolutely omit- 
 ted, the preceding letter not being disjoined: thus, Efsi-Bee, feasibility; Sens-Bee 2 , 
 sensibility ; Fels--Bee, flexibility ; Per 2 -Bee, probability ; Pei^-Pee, property ; 
 Pees--Teo, posterity ; (2) or, if more convenient, the principle of specification 1 
 or 2 is employed, as in writing prosperity, majority, minority, locality, family, ma- 
 teriality. 
 
 * upon you. P. 1G9, R. 12. 
 
13C SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 and that it may go onward, extending further and further, 8 until, in 
 its benevolent embrace, it covers the whole earth. 
 
 POLITICS. 
 
 SPEECH OF MR. GAULDEN, OF GEORGIA- 
 Delivered in the Baltimore Democratic Convention, in 1860. 
 
 MR. PRESIDENT' AND GENTLEMEN OF THE CONVENTION : I come here 
 from the State of Georgia, indorsed by that State Convention and by 
 the Convention at Charleston. 10 This ought surely to give me a 
 right to be heard before you ;" and though I have not joined my 
 fortune 13 in the State of Georgia either to the House of York or to the 
 House of Lancaster,' 3 I feel that I have a right here to speak to the 
 great Democratic party 14 of the United States. I have been pained, 
 as a citizen of these United States, to sec the elements of disruption 
 and disorganization which seem to prevail in the midst of this most 
 intelligent assembly. I have felt 15 that the experiment of the capa- 
 
 s further and further. 270, c. 
 
 9 Mr. President. The word president here Is contracted to pres., under the 
 principle of 237, R. 2. 
 
 10 at Cliarleston. Cherlst is a special contraction for Charleston. 237, R. 2. 
 
 11 before you. P. CO, iv. 4. 
 
 12 my fortune. 246, 1. 
 
 13 Lancaster. 236, 4. Kay or Gay may very frequently be omitted when 
 coming between Ing and other letters ; as linguist, El-Iugst ; sanguine, Sing-en 2 ; 
 links, El-Ing[Kay]-Iss. 
 
 w Democratic party. This phrase will occur several times in the course 
 of this speech ; and it will fairly be entitled to a special contraction. But I have 
 given it here, as it would probably be written when first occurring. (6). The re- 
 porter who seeks to save himself unnecessary labor will very shortly after com- 
 mencing to report a convention, a law case, a debate, and even shorter matters, 
 devise special contractions for phrases which he perceives will be of frequent 
 occurrence, unless the ordinary expression should be sufficiently short. See 237, 
 R. 2. 
 
 15 I have felt that the. Have is implied here in accordance with the prin- 
 ciple of p. 123, note 8, of this Reader. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISE?. 137 
 
 bility of man for solf-government was about to prove a failure here, 
 and that the Genius of Liberty was about, shrieking, to leave the 
 world. But I trust that this may be the darkest hour just before the 
 day ; and that from these elements of discord the representatives of 
 the intelligent American people here assembled may be able to de- 
 vise a plan upon which the great Democratic party of the United 
 States may be united, and that we will yet add another 16 victory 
 
 OA to the many we have already achieved. 
 
 LJ<U I am an advocate for maintaining the integrity of the 
 National Democratic party ; I belong to the extreme South ; I am a 
 proslavery man 1 in. every sense cf the word aye, 2 and an African 
 slave-trade man. 3 [Applause 1 and laughter.] The institution of slav- 
 ery, as I have said"' elsewhere, has done more to advance the prosper- 
 ity' and intelligence of the white race, 7 and of the human race, than, 
 
 10 add another. To secure a very quickly written sign for this speech- 
 phraso, omit the an as a hindrance, and then lengthen Doe 3 , add, to add dhr foe 
 otlitr. See, in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, DHR 2 and 3, c. 
 
 t){\ i In the days of slavery, the word slavery was of such frequent occur- 
 rence as to deserve a special contraction. It may bo written Slav, as 
 in pro-slavery, Per 2 -Slay ; anti-slaver ;/, En-Tee^J?lay ; slave Slates, SlayStets ; slav- 
 ery in the Territories, Slay 2 En-Tret Rays ; stave-breeding, SIay 2 -Bred:('iug ') ; slare- 
 trailing, Slay 2 -Tred:('iug ') ; slaveholder, Slay 2 -Laydcr ; slave-State, Slay 2 -Stct ; 
 slavery extension, Slay 2 -Sten. 
 - aye. 102, R. 3 ; 08 ; 102. 
 
 3 African slave-trade man. African, in accordance with tho priuciplo of 
 special contraction (237, It. 2, fcj, is here contracted to For. 
 
 4 applause. This sign for applause is distinct from Phonography, and has 
 the advantage of being quite rapid, and at the same time constructed upon a plan 
 which may bo followed in indicating cheers, hisses, etc., the first longhand letter 
 of the word being written, and the pen swept around it, as iu the case of a in tho 
 engraving. (6). The modifiers, "great," "immense," "tremendous," "pro- 
 longed," etc., may be sufficiently indicated by writing the letter largo ; "great 
 applause," for instance, by a made quite large and, of course, with the lino 
 around it. (c). In transcribing, the words applause, etc., should be treated as in- 
 dependent senti'iioos, and enclosed in brackets to distinguish them from (ho 
 words of tho sp< -alii r ; thus : [Applause.], but without the period if introduced 
 in t'ae roiddlo of a sentence. Generally, for the better appearance of typography, 
 and because tho " caso" is not fully supplied with brackets, the curves are used 
 instead. 
 
 6 I liavc salil. Have is implied hero. See p. 123, note 0, cf this Reader. 
 
 c prosperity. This word might bo written Pers-Peo ; but, to distinguish. U 
 from prof p<-:!, Pcrs 2 -Pco, it is belter to write it in this manlier, 
 
 7 -wlilto race 103, R. 1 ; Ii3, R. 1, b. 
 
138 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 all else together. I believe it to be founded upon the law of Nature, 
 and upon the law of God ; s I believe it to be a blessing to all races. I 
 believe that liberty would not truly exist in this Western world'* ex- 
 cept by maintaining the integrity of the great National Democratic 
 party. 10 [Applause.] As for this "Irrepressible Conflict" party," 
 with their serried ranks now ready to march down upon us, '* I have 
 no faith in it, because it is founded in anarchy, in everything anti- 
 republican, in everything that is opposed to human progress ; while I 
 understand the idea of the great National Democratic party to be 
 non-intervention in its broadest sense. 13 [Applause.] Now, niy North- 
 ern friends, 14 I do not know that I can do anything in Georgia 
 to reconcile these matters ; but whatever I can do, 13 1 will do. [Ap- 
 plause.] 
 
 I say that our friends in Georgia, who are crying out for protection 
 to slavery in the Territories, are advocating a mere theory, a mere ab- 
 straction, a thing that is not and cannot be. They would do much 
 better if they would demand protection from the General Govern- 
 ment, 1 " and have a line of police established along the border of the 
 Slave States, to catch and hang the thieving Abolitionists who are 
 stealing our niggers. [Laughter and applause.] This is a means of 
 protection. Why? Because it is practical. [Renewed laughter and 
 
 s law of God. 182, R. 1, 6. Notice in the engraving how an Ef-book is 
 made on curves somewhat longer than an En-hook. It may be distinguished 
 from the En and Shon hooks thus : Regard the En-hook as an unclosed Iss ; the 
 Ef-hook on curves as an elongated En-hook rather, as ail unclosed Steh-loop ; 
 the Shon-hook as a:i unclosed Ster loop. 
 
 o "Western world. Tho En-hook is omitted to secure a desirable phrase- 
 Bign. P. 109, R. 12, I. 
 
 10 great national Democratic party. En is here used for national. 
 The whole phrase-sigu transferred to the common print is "Great N. Dem. P." 
 237, R. 2, 6. 
 
 11 irrepressible conflict party. This is a special contraction. If very 
 frequent, Ar simply would be written for irrepressible. 
 
 " npon us. P. 182, R. 2. 
 
 is broadest sense. 23C, 3. 
 
 11 my Northern friends. Ner is here used for JYbrf.Vrr, i:i rvcrorclaro 
 with the principle of special contraction. 237, R. 2. 
 
 is but whatever I can do. Tef for whatever ia here joined to Tetoid 2 (for 
 but). See p. 78, n. 17, of this Reader, where it is shown that the plan of joining 
 Tee to but was originated by the author. (l>). /is omitted here, as it may bo in 
 many other cases where some pronoun must bo supplied, and where the context 
 directs what one. See under / in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 16 from the general government. Jay here stands tor general, under the 
 principle of cpccial contraction. 237, R. 2. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 139 
 
 applause.] Here is my old native State of Virginia 17 the slave-trad- 
 ing and slave-breeding State of Virginia 18 [Laughter.] 
 
 DELEGATE FROM VIRGINIA" I call the gentleman to order. He casts 
 an imputation upon Virginia by calling her the ' ' slave-breeding State 
 of Virginia." 
 
 MR. GAULDEX 20 Well, I will say the slave-breeding State of Georgia, 
 then. I glory in being a slave-breeder 21 myself. [Loud laughter.p 2 
 I will face the music myself, and I have got as many negroes as any 
 man from the State of Virginia. And as I invited the gentlemen of 
 this Convention at Charleston to visit my plantation, I will say again, 
 that if they will come to see me, I will show them as fine a lot of 
 negroes, and the pure African, too, as they can find anywhere. And I 
 will show them as handsome a set of little children there as can be seen 
 [laughter], and any quantity of them, too. [Renewed laughter.]- 3 
 And I wish that Virginia may be as good a slave-trading and slave- 
 breeding State as Georgia ; and in saying that I do not mean to be 
 disrespectful to Virginia, but I do not mean to dodge the question at 
 all. 
 
 Now, I want no office ; I never asked any ; I did not ask the State 
 Convention to send me here ; but I am here to tell the truth to you 
 all, and this is my idea of non-intervention. I want the State of Vir- 
 
 17 State of Virginia. In some cases, as in this, it is better to express of by 
 a hook than to imply it. 
 
 19 slave-breeding State of Virginia. 237, R. 1, 6. See p. 103, n. 4, of this 
 Reader. 
 
 19 Delegate from Virginia. It seems natural to commence the words of 
 a speaker with a paragraph ; but for the reporter such a practice is not best, es- 
 pecially in the case of one speaker interrupting another; for, too much time would 
 be consumed in carrying the pen back to commence a paragraph. (6) It is best 
 usually, in case of a change of speakers, to phonograph the name of the speaker, 
 inclosing it in a circle ; (c) or, if there could be no confusion as there might bo 
 if two speakers had the same initial write the first longhand letter of the speak- 
 er's name, usually inclosing it. In this phrase-sign from, is omitted, under the 
 principle of 250, 3. 
 
 20 G. G. is here written for Gaulden. Of course, in transcribing, Mr. should 
 be prefixed. See preceding note. 
 
 21 slave-breeder. The formative of an 'actor 'may frequently be omitted. 
 P. 142, R. 5 ; p. 194, R. 7. 
 
 22 loud laughter The modification of loud is indicated by making the sign 
 of pleasantry or laughter larger than usual. See p. 137, note 4, of this Reader. 
 
 23 renewed laughter. I see no particular necessity of inserting renewed 
 here. It was probably clone by the reporter to avoid the monotony of the repeti- 
 tion of the word laughter. 
 
140 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 glnia, if she has negroes, to have as many as she pleases. If yon want 
 slavery in the State of Massachusetts, I want you to have it. If you 
 want slavery in Indiana, and Ohio, and Wisconsin, and Minnesota, in 
 God's name have it. It is your right to have 34 slave?, and just as 
 many or as few as you please ; I will never join any party which de- 
 sires to force slavery anywhere, or to keep it from any place. [Ap- 
 plause.] I believe that is regulated by the law of God, of Nature's 
 God, and all history proves that to be so, and all that I ask is "hands 
 off, " leave it to the people of the States and of the Territories to set- 
 tle that matter for themselves under the Constitution of the United 
 States. 23 [Applause.] 
 
 And now, while I am up, I want to put my veto upon one thing. 23 
 I know that I am not going to be applauded 27 in what I say ; 28 but 
 seed sown in good time will bring forth fruit ; and though you may 
 say now that I am wrong, yet I think I shall live to see the day when 
 the doctrines which I advocate to-night will be the 
 
 30 
 
 doctrines of Massachusetts and of the North ; for 
 
 " Truth crushed to earth will rise again ; 
 
 The eternal years of God are hers ; 
 'While error, wounded, writhes in pain, 
 And dies amid her worshipers." 
 
 I say I go for non-intervention in the broadest sense of the term. I 
 say that this whole thing should be taken out of the hands of the 
 (Jen oral Government. I say it is 1 all wrong to be spending two or 
 three millions of dollars 2 annually from our pockets, and sacrificing 
 
 = l it is your right to have. Have, is added here by the Vee-hook, in ac- 
 cordance with the method of writing hope to have, Pel 3 . To must be supplied to 
 complete the construction. 
 
 -' under the Constitution of the ITnited States. One of the Tees of 
 Constitution is here omitted to secure this sign. 230, U. 
 
 =5 upon one thing. P. 1C9, R. 12, b. 
 
 -~ I know that I am not going to he applauded. The affix-sign 'ing' 
 is omitted in writing going (237, II. 1, b), to secure tlio advantage of phrase-writ- 
 ing. This phrase would have beru written in the Old Phonography, Retoid'-En 
 Dhet Petoid'-Meut-Gay:' ing ' Bee 3 Pel'-Ded. Compare the two expressions. 
 
 - = in what I say. P. Cl. xvi. of this Reader. This phrase, so eisily and 
 beautifully expressed in Standard Phonography, would have been written in the 
 Old Phonography, EU.I AVuhi Retoid'-Es. 
 
 ~ 1 1 say it is. P. 01, xvi. 
 
 o U 
 
 : two or three millions of dollars. See, iu this Reader, p. 79, 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 141 
 
 thousands of lives upon the coast of Africa, 3 in that terrible clime, 4 to 
 prevent our going there to get a few negroes. If it is right for us to 
 go to Virginia and buy a negro, and pay $2,000 3 for him, it is legally 
 right for us to go to Africa, where we can get them for $50. [Applause 
 and laughter. ]* Here is the condition we are placed in, and you may 
 as well come to your senses and face the music. 
 
 There are 2,000 of our negroes now down at Key West, begging and 
 pleading not to be sent back. If they should be sent back, what would 
 be the result ? One half of them would die before they got there, and 
 the other half would be turned upon the coast of Africa, upon the 
 coast of Liberia, among strangers, to be eaten up by cannibals, or be 
 caught and sold again, or die of starvation ; and this you call human- 
 ity. I say it is piracy. I say that our Government is acting against 
 right and reason in this matter. And if the Southern men had the 
 spunk and spirit to come right up and face the North, I believe the 
 Northern Democracy 7 at least would come to the true doctrine of 
 popular sovereignty and non-intervention. [Applause and laugh- 
 ter.] 
 
 Think of it ! Two thousand of these poor barbarians from Africa, 
 caught within the last four weeks, and kept upon that miserable island 
 of Key West, dying there from disease and starvation, and what do not 
 die" are to be sent back by our Government at an expense of one or two 
 millions, though they are pleading and begging not to be sent back and 
 landed upon the coast of Africa. It is cruel, inhuman, wrong, and I 
 appeal to the good sense of the American nation against it. Look at 
 John Bull. 9 He has bound us to catch all we can and send them 
 
 note 3. The word millions is here represented by Ems, under tlao principle of 
 special contraction. 237, R. 2. 
 
 3 upon the coast of Africa. To avoid breaking up this phrase, omit tho 
 t of coast and leave of the to be supj)lied. 
 
 * in that terrible clime. A slight saving is hero effected over the Corre- 
 sponding Style by writing ' bio ' by the affix-sign (Bee) instead of Bel. See, in 
 this Reader, p. 101, note 5. 
 
 6 $2,OOO. 274. 
 
 6 Applause and laughter. The signs for applause and laughter are hero 
 written without lifting the pen, constituting a sort of phrase-sign. It illustrates 
 a reporter's care to effect every possible saving of labor. 
 
 ' Northern Democracy. Northern is here contracted to Ner, in accordance 
 with the principle of special contraction. The phrase-sign, transferred to tho 
 common print, is "Nor. Dem." 
 
 8 and what do not die. See, in this Reader, p. 118, note 9. 
 
 9 John Bull. This is a special contraction. This sign, transferred, is " 3. 
 Bull." 837, B. 2. 
 
142 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 back at an expense of $25 per head. We send them back. But 
 what does John Bull do ? When he gets them he apprentices them 
 out again, and makes slaves of them. That is the hypocritical treaty 
 that you arc bound by. And yet I hear no Southern voice or North- 
 ern voice raised against this aggression upon the law of nature and 
 of nature's God. But I intend to raise my voice against it, humble 
 as it is. 
 
 Now this may be a secondary question before us to-night. The great 
 point is harmony and union in the great Democratic party. Let us 
 whip the Black Republicans ; 10 let us win the fight ; and when we have 
 settled these things, let us act together and all will be right. [Ap- 
 plause.] 
 
 NO LAW FOR SLAVERY. 
 
 [Speech of Gerrit Smith at the State Anti-Slavery Convention, in Milwaukee, 
 June 17th, 1857.] 
 
 I HAVE not come here to denounce slaveholders, nor to say that 
 they are worse than other men. If they are worse, it is owing to the 
 misfortune of their circumstances. If, as many suppose, they are the 
 very worst of men, it is because they arc the subjects and victims of 
 the very worst education. 
 
 That the slaveholder is to a large extent unconscious" of the wick- 
 edness 12 of his relation is beyond controversy. Deplorable, however, 
 as is this unconsciousness, it happily leaves room in him for goodness. 
 Virtues the slaveholder can certainly have. 13 Washington 14 was a 
 slaveholder, and strikingly were the nobler virtues grouped 
 
 10 Black Republicans. Bel 3 is hero written for Slack, in accordance with 
 the principle of general contraction (237, R. 2). If the phrase were occurring fre- 
 quently, in accordance with the principle of 237, R. 2, b, it would bo written 
 BeP-Rays; i.e., "Bl. Rs." 
 
 11 unconscious. The prefix-sign for uncon- is here joined, and the final s is 
 omitted, as in many other words ending with the sound shus. See, in this Read- 
 er, p. 74, note 3. 
 
 '2 wickedness. 237, R. 1. 
 
 13 can certainly have. P. 109, R. 12. This phrase, in the Old Phonogra- 
 phy, would have been written Ken 2 Iss-Ret^-En-El Vee 2 . 
 
 14 Washington. This word is too long to write in full, and the best con- 
 traction is Ishi-Ten. 
 
31 
 
 KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 143 
 
 in him. We must dismiss 1 our prejudices against the 
 slaveholder and do him full justice. In innumerable in- 
 stances is he graced with beautiful traits of character. 2 Of course this 
 could not be, did he know the wickedness of his relation. 3 Were he to 
 know that, and yet to continue in the relation, 4 to see his sin and yet 
 to cling to it, his whole soul would be so debased that nothing 5 virtu- 
 ous, nothing generous could spring up and live in it. Unconscious- 
 ness of his wrong explains the possibility of his goodness. 
 
 That the slaveholder should persist in remaining a slaveholder 
 ought not to surprise us ; nor ought we to regard him as pre-emi- 
 nently wicked for such persistence. Think how rarely, 7 even among 
 ourselves, a man becomes, 8 in the full and emphatic sense of the 
 word, an Abolitionist. All over the world a new education is needed 
 an education into a simple, honest love of manhood, and into a 
 deep and abiding reverence for it. Hitherto, at the North 9 as well 
 as at the South, our schools and churches have not been such as to 
 impress men with the dignity and grandeur of their 10 common nat- 
 
 n A x we must dismiss. 236, 3. 
 
 2 beautiful traits of character. 171, 3. This phrase, in the Report- 
 ing Style of the Old Phonography, would havo been written Bet2-Fel Trots 2 1'et- 
 oid!-Ker-Kay. 
 
 3 wickedness of his relation. Wickedness is here contracted, as afew lines 
 before ; his is added by a circle, of being implied. 
 
 * in the relation. In relation is distinguished from in real-ity by the En in 
 the former being brought down so that Rel may rest on tho lin*% while in the 
 other phrase Rel is above the line. 246, 1. 
 
 B that nothing. A needless fear on the part of the Old-Phonographic pub- 
 lishers caused them to prohibit the joining of letters in many cases, where they 
 might have been joined with ease, and with advantage in respect of speed, To 
 make the junction easy between Dhet and En, it is only necessary to curve both 
 Dbet and En more than usually. 
 
 6 explains the. (a) The plan of omitting initial Kay in many such words 
 as exist (Ses-Tee 2 ), experience (Sprens 2 ), explain (Splen 2 ) an omission correspond- 
 ing to the rapid and defective utterance of these words, i.e., almost 'zist, 'sperience, 
 'splain was first presented in the Hand-Book. It is no valid objection to such 
 contractions that they do not save much ; it is conceding that they save some- 
 thing, and that, without some countervailing disadvantage, they are useful. 
 Their advantage is that they save time in the omission of a letter, and also by fa- 
 cilitating phrase-writing. (6). As to joining the in this case, see 187, B. 1. 
 
 i how rarely. See pp. 59-60, iv., 2, of this Reader. 
 
 8 a man becomes. 244, R. 3, (1). 
 
 9 at the North. 237, R. 2. 
 
 1 of their. See p. 79, note 1, in this Reader. 
 
144 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER, 
 
 ure." In every part of our country the work is still undone of bring- 
 ing men to believe that 
 
 "The one solo sacred tiling beneath tlio cope of heaven is mau.">2 
 
 Open the eyes of the slaveholder to the greatness and glory of man 
 even of the most bruised and battered specimen of man and he is at 
 once an Abolitionist. The like discovery can alone transform the 13 
 non-slaveholder into an Abolitionist. All those before whose heaven- 
 anointed vision stand revealed the divine image and the moral sub- 
 limity of man all those, and none others," are Abolitionists. As im- 
 possible would it be for him who is blessed with this revelation to op- 
 ].i-:.-s or despise his brother, as to pour contempt upon the pyramids 
 among the works of men, or upon Mont Blanc 15 among the works of 
 God. 
 
 Nor have I come here to oppose the doctrine of "compensation" 
 a doctrine so unwelcome to the mass of Anti-Slavery men. On the 
 contrary, were the slaveholders to emancipate their slaves, T should 
 be glad to have the nation give five hundred millions of dollars to (he 
 emancipators, 13 and bestow something on the emancipated also. In- 
 
 11 common nature. (a) The word-sign for common was first presented in 
 the Hand-Book, (b) Common was previously written 'com ':Eu v . 
 
 12 man." The quotation marks (") are placed at the end of this quotation., 
 l>ut not at the beginning, where it is sufficiently indicated by the words intro- 
 ducing the quotation. 
 
 13 transform the. Standard Phonography beautifully exemplifies the great 
 law of UNIFORMITY in accordance with which it was constructed, iu the con- 
 tractions for words ending in form-ed; thus, form-ed, Fer 1 ; conform-ed, ' con ': 
 Per 1 ; deform-ed, Deel Fer ; inform-ed, En-Fcr 1 ; j>frfurt,i-etl, PerFur ; reform-ed, 
 Ray'-Fer ; transform-ed, Ter& 2 -Fer ; uniform, En-Fer 3 ; multiform, Melt- Fer. 
 
 1 ' and none others. In a few cases the Dher tick is written upward, as in 
 this phrase-sign. With a pencil it will be easy to make it, and even with a pen it 
 will not be so difficult that its use will not be advantageous. 
 
 '" >Iont Blanc. The foreign pronunciation of this word is Mo, Bla ( (,) sig. 
 nifying the nasalization of the preceding vowel (see Hand-Book, p. 203, 11). For 
 the method of stenographically indicating nasalization, see Haud-Book, p. 203, 
 12, 1 and 2. These words might have been written Ment 1 Bel 2 -Ing-Kay, as if 
 pronounced Mont Blank, the letters being interpreted by general English analo- 
 gy, as is usually done in phouographing foreign words and names. See, in this 
 Reader, p. 98, note 15. 
 
 16 emancipators. (a) In many cases, when a verb, as emancipate (Em-Ens- 
 Pet), ends with a shorleucd straight-line, and the actor, as emancipator, is formed 
 by the addition of the consonant r, the reporter may write for the 'actor' tho 
 form for the verb, (t) But if, in order to avoid confusion, as of emancipated and 
 emancipator, some other mode of writing tho actor must be adopted, the reporter 
 may lengthen the stroke, as in writing emancipator, Eni-Ens-Peeter. See, in this 
 Reader, p. CO, xii. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 145 
 
 deed, inasmuch as the North has sought her own commercial gains 
 and her own political and ecclesiastical advantages, in allowing, not 
 to say encouraging, the South to extend the area of slavery and mul- 
 tiply her investments 17 in slaves, 18 I do not see how she could he hon- 
 est, and yet leave the South to hear alone the whole pecuniary loss 
 of emancipation. Such loss there would be. I admit that time 
 would turn it 19 into great gain. But, for the present, it certainly 
 would he loss. 
 
 To my enumeration of the things for which I have not come here I 
 will add hut one more. I have not come to oppose the dissolution 40 
 of the Union. Nay, I am free to declare that if the South or the North, 
 the East or the West, desire to secede 21 from it, 22 I would 23 have no 
 force employed to prevent the secession. 24 Let the seceder go in peace, 
 
 i" investments. 237, R. 1, b. 
 
 is in slaves. P. 108, R. 10. 
 
 9 would turn it. See, in this Reader, p. Cl, xvi. 
 
 2" dissolution. Dissolution ia written Dees-Elshon, to distinguish it from 
 desolation, Dues--LayKhou. 
 
 21 desire to secede. The word secede and its derivatives may bo advanta- 
 geously written in accordance with the novel, Standard-Phonographic principle 
 of using an initial large circle. In this case, in connection with the principle of 
 implying to by joining, a phrase-sign is secured which is considerably shorter 
 than the Old expression of this phrase Dees-Ar Petoid 2 Es 2 -Sdee. 
 
 "- from it. P. 01, xvi., of this Reader. The Old-Phonographic expression 
 of this phrase was Fer 2 Tee 3 . 
 
 23 1 would. The advantage of a stenographic device may not when consid- 
 ered alone, be very apparent. It might, for instance bo objected that Tetoid for 
 / was but a little briefer than Petoid-Retoid. But it might be replied that the 
 aggregate saving of a number of little contrivances of frequent use would bo 
 considerable. And if these devices, in addition to securing a briefer expression 
 for certain words, obviate frequently the loss of time in lifting the pen, their val- 
 ue is greatly enhanced. This phrase-sign is a good illustration of this idea. First, 
 Tetoid for / is nearly twice as rapid as Petoid-Retoid. Secondly, the lifting of tho 
 pen which would have been required if the latter form for 7 had been employed, 
 is obviated by Tetoid. So that there is effected a gain over the Old Phonography 
 of more than 100 per cent. 
 
 21 employed to prevent the secession. (a) To is implied here by join- 
 ing. The is omitted, and to be supplied, (b). I have found it very useful in var- 
 ious kinds of reporting, especially legislative, to write session by Issesh-on, or by 
 enlarging the final circle of a preceding word, and adding the Eslron-hook; thus, 
 end of the seision, Endseslron 2 ; at the session, Teesesh-on 3 ; this session, Dhceses 2 - 
 Eshou ; next session, Enses 2 Eshou ; at the last session, Tee 3 -Layses-Eshon. Seces- 
 sion may be added to a preceding word (without a, final circle), as in this case, ia 
 an analogous manner. 
 
14G SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 followed with our blessings and not with our curses. At the same 
 time, let me declare that I am the friend of the Union ; would not 
 have it dissolved, but would have it endure forever. What is more, 
 I should be glad if, with the consent of all parties concerned, 25 it 
 could spread over all North America, " G and carry its superior vigor, 
 intelligence, and civilization to peoples who are perishing for need 
 of them. 
 
 Having now said for what I did not 27 come, I will proceed to say for 
 what I did come here. It was for only one thing ; and that is, to Ic- 
 seech you to know no law for slavery,- 8 and to trample underfoot whatever claims 
 to be a law for slavery. Possibly, however, there are persons in this as- 
 sembly, who would stop me on the very threshold of my argument 
 by telling me 29 that the Constitution is for slavery. But what if it 
 is? What if, 
 
 from beginning to end, it is all for slavery? That decs 
 not make slavery a law. That docs not make the Con- 
 stitution a law for slavery. That but proves that Ihc Constitution 
 
 20 of all parties concerned. Throe novel, Standard-Phonographic princi- 
 ples and devices combine in this case to produce a remarkably condensed expres- 
 sion of these four words : 1. The addition of all by an El-hook to Petoid 1 (of). 
 2. The formation of phrase-signs, even iu case of necessary disjoining, commenc- 
 ing the disjoined letter near the preceding, overlapping them. (See p. 102, note 
 2, of this Reader.) 3. The use of a new word-sign for party (Pee). Compare this 
 expression with the Old-Phonographic expression Petoid 1 Bedoid 1 Pee-Ray-Tees 
 Sarned*. 
 
 23 over all North America. The Old-Phonographic expression of this 
 phrase would be Ver 1 Bedoid 1 Ner-Itk Em-Ray-Kay. 
 
 27 for what I did not. (a) What is here added by shortening the sign 
 (EC 2 ) foTfor. See p. Cl, xvi., of this Reader. (6) The practiced reporter may, in 
 some phrases, omit /, BATHER THAN DISJOIN THE LETTER FOLLOWING rr, writing, 
 for instance, Fet 2 -Dent, instead of FetS-TetoidiDent 1 , for for what I did not. (Sen 
 the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, under the word /.) There is an in- 
 stance of the application of tbis plan in the following phrase-sign for for wliat I 
 did come. 
 
 "-' no law for slavery. Slay being used as a (special) word-sign for slavery, 
 this phrase-sign falls under the general principles of phrase-writing even as to 
 using, for sake of convenience Sel instead of Slay ; for it is allowable and not un- 
 frequent to change the direction of a letter having two directions, or to change 
 the outline of a word (sometimes even of a sign-word), in order to secure a phrase- 
 sign. For instance, in Tces 2 -El-En-Ef, it is a well known fact, not only is the hook 
 of the word-sign of well (Wei 2 ) omitted, but the stroke is written downward. The 
 hook of known is also omitted so that fact (Ef) may be joined, 
 
 M by telling inc. 237, R. 1, 6. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 14? 
 
 itself is no law. The first thing in regard to any statute, constitu- 
 tion, 1 or decree is not to determine by means of it what other things 
 are or are not law, but whether itself is or is not law. Preliminary 
 to applying the- yard-stick 3 to the measurement of the cloth is the 
 inquiry whether it is a yard-stick whether it is a true measure. 
 
 The Constitution cannot be a law for slavery. It cannot be, if for 
 no other reason than that, so far as it may be for slavery, it is void. 
 Just so far 4 it is void for absurdity. Not less, but infinitely more, 
 absurd would the Constitution be in declaring man a chattel than in 
 declaring wood stone or stone wood. But surely 5 you would not s 
 regard as law the declaration that wood is stone or stone wood. How 
 much less, then, should you suffer the declaration that man is a chat- 
 tel to command your respect and obedience ! 7 We are surprised and 
 
 32 
 
 1 a law the Constitution. In this case a long dash is substituted 
 
 for the repeated words, tiiat does not make. 276, a. This is a novel and 
 valuable characteristic of Standard Phonography. 
 
 2 to applying: the. The Old-Phonographic expression of this phrase would 
 be Petoid 2 Pel 3 :' ing ' e 1 i.e., two strokes, two dots, and three liftings, while the 
 Standard-Phonographic expression requires but two strokes and one lifting, and 
 has the merit of greater legibility. 
 
 3 yard-stick. In this contraction stick is represented by the Steh-Ioop (st). 
 The character of the discourse here hardly justifies the use of this sign as a special 
 contraction. It is rather an instance of the use for general purposes, by the expe- 
 rienced reporter, of contractions which would b employed by the beginner for 
 special purposes only. The experienced reporter, in the course of his practice, 
 will so thoroughly memorize many contractions invented for special purposes, 
 that ho may safely introduce them into any kind of reporting, especially if they 
 arc sufficiently suggestive not to depend much upon the context for legibility. 
 
 * just so far. The principle of 236, 3 allowing the omission of t when it 
 occurs between s and another consonant is almost as applicable and serviceable 
 in phrase-writing as in the writing of single words. See phrases commencing 
 with JUST in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 6 but surely. The Standard-Phonographic principle of enlarging a small 
 Ar-hook to add I may bo advantageously employed to add the termination ly to 
 sure, Sher 2 ; Sherl 2 , surely ; and near, Xeri ; Kerli, nearly; but never when the 
 sign thus produced would have some other and conflicting value ; and hence 
 Merl 1 should not be used for merely ; for this use might conflict with the use of 
 that sign for immorally. 
 
 6 you would not. See p. CO, x. of this Reader. 
 
 7 and obedience. (a) The general rule which I have observed in devising 
 a contraction for a word and as many of its derivatives as can safely be represent- 
 ed by one contraction, is to go only so far in their expression as they coincide, 
 and sometimes to stop short of that if the words are very long, and a suggestive 
 contraction can be secured without. To illustrate, disobedient, disobediently, and 
 disobedience, being of different parts of speech, can safely bo represented by one 
 
148 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 amused by the historical fact that a Roman challenged for his favorite 
 horse the honors due only to a man. But wherein is it more absurd 
 to count a horse for a man, as did the Roman, than to count a man 
 for a horse, as does the slaveholder. 
 
 It is claimed that the Constitution is a law for slavery on the ground 
 that it is a bargain between the whites and blacks for making one the 
 slaves of the other ? But such a bargain would be void for lack of 
 mutuality and consideration. It is not credible that the blacks 5 came 
 into it ; and if they did, it is not possible that they received an equiv- 
 alent, or, indeed, any return whatever for consenting 9 to be reduced 
 to slavery. Such a reduction does of itself incapacitate for receiv- 
 ing any, even the least measure of compensation. In the very selling 
 of his manhood, the seller puts it out of his power to receive the 10 pur- 
 chase-money. He cannot be paid for making himself a chattel. Ev- 
 ery attempted bargain for unmanning himself is necessarily void. 
 Perhaps it will be said that the bargain in question was not between 
 the whites and blacks, but between the whites and the whites the 
 
 contraction ; for, the context will determine -whether the contraction should be 
 read as an adjective, an adverb, or a noun. These three words coincide in the 
 syllables, disob&d, which is all that ia necessary to express, to suggest these words. 
 These syllables are expressed by Deesi-Bed. (6) It sometimes happens that, while 
 a word which is formed by prefixes (as dis-obedient from obedient) can be contract- 
 ed, the primitive word cannot, because the expression of the common part of the 
 primitive and its derivatives (as Bed for OBEDient-ly-ce) is not sufficiently sug- 
 gestive, and may have some other and conflicting use. (c) Vocalization, howev- 
 er, as Bed(p) 1 lor obedient, may render the contraction sufficiently suggestive, and 
 therefore allowable. 
 
 s blacks. This is a special contraction, formed in accordance with the prin- 
 ciples of 237, R. 2. 
 
 9 for consenting. P. 112, R. 7, 6. 
 
 10 puts it out of his power to receive the. (a) The sign for it is short- 
 ened to add out (see p. 61, xvi. of this Reader) : of is implied, as is very frequently 
 the case before his ; his is added by the small circle (Iss) ; and to between power 
 and receive is implied by joining, (b) It may be observed here that to, in such a 
 case, is not implied without any reierence to the context ; for a junction in one 
 case may imply nothing, in another case of, and in another case to. The same 
 principle of legibility and distinction applies here that was defined on p. 76, note 
 13, c, namely TVhen the same thing (letter, word, or principle, 110 matter what) 
 has different uses (as the joining has, as jnst mentioned) the uees must be so dif- 
 ferent that one could not reasonably be substituted for the other in any case, (c) 
 This phrase Put* it out of his power to receive wonld very probably have been 
 written in the Reporting Style of the Old Phonography, Pets' Tee* Tee' Petsoidi- 
 Pee-Ar Petoid2-Rays-Vee i.e., nine strokes and four liftings ; while the Standard- 
 Phonographic expression requires but five strokes and not one lifting, i.e., gains 
 100 per cent, over the Old expression. 
 
KEY TO THE REFUTING EXERCISES. 149 
 
 whites of the North and the whites of the South. But quite as em- 
 phatically, in such case as in the other, would the bargain lack valid- 
 ity. For, certainly it is not competent for two parties to annul the 
 rights of a third. They may enter into a compact to confirm, but not 
 to destroy, his rights. To say that the Constitution is a bargain be- 
 tween two descriptions" of persons to take away all the rights, ay, 
 even all the manhood, of a third, is to say that the Constitution is 
 the guiltiest and foulest of all conspiracies, and at the very furthest 
 remove from all possibility of being law. 
 
 But to return to my declaration, that even if the Constitution were 
 from beginning to end in favor of slavery, 12 it nevertheless could not 
 be a law for slavery. Do not understand me' 3 to admit that it is in 
 
 n between two descriptions. This same sign might in som other case 
 be written for "between all descriptions ; " but the context here makes the use 
 of it for "between two descriptions " safe and allowable. The following words 
 "all the manhood of a third " would not accord with reading this sign "be- 
 tween all descriptions." That "between two descriptions" is the proper reading 
 is also inferrible from the fact that the preceding sentence is speaking of two par- 
 ties annulling the rights of a third. The words, " To say that tke Constitution is a 
 bargain," etc., commencing this sentence, show that the speaker is continuing 
 the discussion of the question of " a bargain between the whites of the North and 
 the whites of the South," mentioned in the fourth sentence preceding ; and men- 
 tioned or adverted to in every sentence following that, up to the word in which 
 this phrase-sign (Bet l -Wen-Bedoid-Skershons) occurs. I give the few preceding 
 sentences as a specimen of the discriminating criticism which is now and then 
 required in reading notes not tha't it takes the practiced reporter a hundredth 
 part of the time to settU such a question as I have consumed in setting forth the 
 reasons in favor of the correct reading of the phrase-sign, which is the subject of 
 this note. The exercise of discrimination which will be demanded through a 
 few years' practice of reporting is better calculated, in my opinion, to develop a 
 fine critical sense, a minute knowledge of language, an ability to determine from 
 what a speaker lias said what lie should say, than any other study, not even ex- 
 cepting that of the classics. There is a close similarity between the mental exer- 
 cise required by the study of the classics and that demanded by the study and 
 practice of reporting ; but the reporter's profession (which calls for constant 
 study) more imperatively requires that beneficial mental exercise which is in- 
 duced by classical study ; and his reputation as a reporter and his income de- 
 pending upon the earnestness and carefulness with which ho pursues his profes- 
 lon, he has greater inducements to call forth his utmost power than are usually 
 :d to classical stndnnts. There is the additional advantage that the con- 
 tand varied accumulation of knowledge necessitated by the pursuit of his 
 ission sustains and adds to his native and acquired intollpctu.il power; 
 while the modicum of valuable knowledge secured by the many months of study 
 required for the attainmpnt nf a barfly tnlrrable knowledge of the classical lan- 
 guages is a meaner compensation for the toil. 
 
 12 in favor of slavery. 240, 1. 
 
 1 3 do not understand me. P. 169, B. 12, b. 
 
150 SECOND STAtfDAKD-PHONOGRAl'HIC READER, 
 
 favor of it. Most emphatically do I deny that it is. Such denial is 
 due to truth and to the memory of the men who adopted the Consti- 
 tution. 
 
 The Constitution is not for slavery, 14 unless they who adopted it 
 meant it to be for slavery. Eut there can be no evidence that they so 
 meant, unless there is evidence that they saw slavery in the Constitu- 
 tion. 15 When the masses vote for a paper, it is never to be alleged 
 that they vote for crime in it, unless the crime is on the face of it, 
 and they are thereby certainly apprised of what they are doing. 
 Hence we do our ancestors great and cruel wrong when we charge 
 them with having established the superlative injustice of slavery in a 
 paper which, at the most, but covertly alludes to it. If slavery is 
 openly there, then blame them ; but not if it only hirks there. It is 
 worthy of mention that the courts concur with common sense in hold- 
 ing that no law is to be interpreted in behalf of palpable 1C injustice, 
 unless such injustice is expressed 17 in irresistibly clear terms. Says 
 the Supreme Court of the United States : " Where rights are infring- 
 ed, where fundamental principles are overthrown, where the general 
 system 18 of the laws is departed from, the legislative intention 
 must be expressed with irresistible clearness to induce a court of 
 justice 
 
 to suppose a design to effect such objects." 2 Cranch, 
 390. Surely, he must be quite ignorant of the spirit 
 which prevailed among the American masses at the close of the Revo- 
 lutionary War, who believes that a Constitution expressly and clear- 
 ly for slavery would have been adopted by them. 
 
 w Constitution is not for slavery. The frequent occurrence of this word 
 brings it under the phrase-writing principle of 244, K. 3, 1 namely, "A common 
 substitute, or a iiouii of frequent occurrence, is frequently joined to a following 
 verb." 
 
 15 in the Constitution. The first t of Constitution is omitted here (in accord- 
 ance with 236, 3, 6), in order to secure the advantage of phrase-writing. The same 
 principle is followed in writing unconstitutional. See this word in the Standard- 
 Phonographic Dictionary ; also the Compendium, p. 113, R. 15. 
 
 16 palpable. See p. 101, note 5, of this Reader. The form given for this 
 word in Isaac Pitman's Vocabulary is Pec-Lay-Pee-Bel. Standard Phonography 
 mates a considerable gain over the Old Phonography by its improved outlines in 
 many cases where no now principles are involved except the principles of analogy, 
 uniformity, and speed, which for the first are fully developed (or applied) in 
 Standard Phonography. 
 
 17 is expressed. P. 132, R. 4 ; 246, 1. 
 
 is general system P. 169, R. 12, I ; 237, R. 2. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 151 
 
 But it is said that they who framed the Constitution intended it to 
 be for slavery. What if they did ? The Constitution is not what the 
 handful 1 who framed it, but what the masses who adopted it, in- 
 tended it to be. A deed of land is not what the scrivener, but what 
 the grantor and the grantee meant to have it. 2 
 
 I am not willing, however, that the framcrs of the Constitution 
 should be misrepresented or dishonored. I see not one particle of 
 evidence that they meant to establish slavery, or even to spare it for 
 another generation. They put into the Constitution 3 many powers, 
 any one of which is capable of being 4 wielded for the immediate and 
 entire 5 overthrow of the whole system of American slavery. 7 Did 
 they qualify them so as to exempt slavery from their operation ? This 
 they certainly would have done had they been intent to establish 
 slavery, or even to prolong its life beyond a few years. 8 But they did 
 it not. 9 They did not say, "No person except a slave," but "No 
 
 nn l handful. P. 194, E. 9. 
 
 2 meant to have it. To is implied here by joining, and it is added to 
 have by shortening its sign. The best expression ia the Old Phonography for 
 this easily and rapidly uttered phrase would be Ment 2 Petoid 2 -Vee-Tee ; i.e., four 
 strokes and one lifting ; while the Standard-Phonographic expression requires 
 but two strokes and no lifting ; i.e., is more than twice as fast as the Old expres- 
 sion, and yet probably not faster than the utterance would be. 
 
 8 into the Constitution. The is omitted here under the principle of 250, 3, 
 and the first t of Constitution is omitted (in accordance with 236, 3, b), to secure a 
 desirable phrase-sign. 
 
 * is capable of being. See p. 101, note 7, of this Reader. If the usual form 
 for being were Bee-Ing, the Ing would be omitted in such a combination as this, 
 because of its difficulty. If the usual form were Bee:ing (i.e., with the dot 'ing'), 
 the dot might be omitted in such a phrase, under the principle of 237, E. 1, b. 
 
 * entire. Enter* as a word-sign for entire, and Enteri-EI for entirely, were 
 first presented by the author. The Old-Phonographic outlines were En-Tee-Ray, 
 entire; En-Tee-Ray-Lay, entirely. "Entirety" will be written by the derivative 
 word-sign, Enter!-Tce. P. 142, E. 5. The Old-Phonographic form for this word 
 was En-Tee-Eay-Tee. 
 
 6 overthrow. 229, E. 1, a. 
 
 ~ American slavery. This is a special contraction, formed in accordance 
 with the principle of 237, E. 2, b. 
 
 * beyond a few years. 246, 1. 
 
 o but they did it not. The best Old-Phonographic expression for this phrase 
 would have been Tetoid2-Dhee-Dee-Dee (or Bed) Tee2 Net*. The Old Phonography 
 would have done better with the more usual form of expression but t/tey did not 
 do it (or do so). But Standard Phonography is as well adapted to extemporaneous 
 speech as to the studied composition of books. It not ia Standard Phonography 
 
152 SECOND STANDAIiD-PHONOGUAPHIC READER. 
 
 person shall be deprived of life, liberty, or property -without clue pro- 
 cess of law." They did not say, "The right of the people except 
 slaves, ' ' but ' ' The right of the people to keep and bear arms shall 
 not be infringed." It is superfluous to remark that the masters will 
 throw down their whips whenever Government shall obey the 
 Constitution and protect the slaves in taking up their 10 muskets. The 
 framers of the Constitution" did not say, "The right of the people 
 except the slaves," but "The right of the people to be secure in their 
 persons," etc., 12 "shall not be violated." Nor did they confine Con- 
 gress to color or condition in obtaining recruits for the army and 
 navy. I need not say that slavery would come to a speedy end were 
 Congress to go among the blacks as freely as among the whites to 
 supply the army and navy with officers and privates. It is only by 
 observing in every direction the policy of proscribing, degrading, and 
 outraging the black man 13 that slavery can be maintained. Again, in 
 forbidding attainder, the framers of the Constitution did not except 
 slavery, which is the worst possible 14 form of attainder. Nor did they 
 
 is represented by Tent. It could not be joined to Ded ; yet to avoid tho loss of 
 time of writing it iu its proper position when staudiug alone (i.e., on tlie line), 
 it is made to overlap the Ded as a substitute for joining. 
 
 10 in taking up their. 237, K. 1, 6 ; 264. 
 
 11 the framers of the Constitution. 1G4. To secure a desirable sign for 
 this phrase, which it now appears will probably occur frequently iu this part of 
 the speech, the s of framers is omitted, and the first t of Constitution, in accordance 
 with 236, 3, b. 
 
 12 etc. (a) The common " & " is a contraction lor the Latin ET (and), the 
 left-hand portion being E and the right-hand portion being intended for the up- 
 right portion of T, which is made into T by the concluding stroke ; I say conc/ud- 
 ing stroke, for the proper and easiest way of making this sign is to commence 
 with the right-hand stroke, as though making a v backward, and making a circle 
 at the top of the left-hand side of the v, to run a line across the two strokes ; 
 which line may be joined, in rapid writing, with the following word, or with the 
 following letter, as in writing " <c." (6) The expedient &" may properly be 
 written (if written correctly) for and in all cases in transcribing, except, of course, 
 at the beginning of a sentence, (c) The contraction "&c." or "etc." (which 
 last is the form now usually adopted in books) is a contraction of the Latin it 
 eel-era. (See Webster's Unabridged Dictionary, under ET CJETERA.) It is some- 
 times pronounced "et setera," or (being translated) "and so forth." In either 
 ca.se the reporter may write Tees2-Ter (i.e., et set-era), (d) If any person should 
 wisli a greater distinction between the phrase et cetera (Tccs 2 -Ter) and it is truf. 
 (also Tees 2 -Ter) than the non-conflicting uses of the si^n, it may be secured by 
 writing the more frequent et cetera with Tces 2 -Ter, with the Ar-hook implied (171, 
 2), and it is true with Tees-Iss-Tcr, i.e., with a distinct Ar-hook. 
 
 13 black man. Bel 3 for Hack is a special contraction. 237, R. 2. 
 
 n worst possible. The t of worst is omitted here, in accordance with 236, 3, 
 in order to secure the advantage of a phrase-sign. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 153 
 
 provide for the defeating of the writ of habeas corpus ra by allowing the 
 plea the entirely effectual plea of property in man. They provided 
 for the suspension"* of the writ in certain specified cases ; but slavery 
 is not one of those cases. Well did Professor Christian say, " It is this 
 writ which makes slavery impossible in England." 
 
 When I said that the frainers of the Constitution put many powers 
 into it that could be used effectually for the destruction of slavery, I 
 hope you did not understand me to claim that such use of them was 
 their purpose. All I claim at this point is, that inasmuch as it was 
 understood on all hands that slavery was to cease in a few years, no 
 care was taken, and no disposition was felt, to protect it from being 
 swept away by the principles and provisions of the Constitution. 
 
 Am I asked why the frainers of the Constitution did not in terms 
 provide for the abolition of slavery, I answer that, in the first place, 17 
 inasmuch as slavery was dying 18 and doomed, this was not thought to 
 be necessary ; and that, in the second place, 19 they were not willing to 
 
 15 habeas corpus. This is a contraction formed in accordance with the prin- 
 ciple of 237, R. 2, b, Hay standing for habeas and Ker for corpus. But it may be 
 used as a general contraction. 
 
 16 suspension. The publisher of Standard Phonography, in devising con- 
 tractions, has constantly kept in view the principle of making ANALOGOUS 
 CONTRACTIONS FOR ANALOGOUS WORDS ; so that one contraction familiarized 
 usually indicates or suggests the contractions for analogous words. Many contractions, 
 for instance, are formed in analogy with the contractions for apprehensive sion 
 (Preu 3 ) ; apprehensible (Prens 3 ) ; as Ses-Peu 2 , suspension-sive ; Steu 2 , extension- 
 Bive ; Stens 3 , extensible ; Speu 2 , expensive-ness ; Spen 3 , expansive-sion ; Spens 3 , 
 expansible ; Dee Klen, declension ; Rays-Pen, responsive ; Rays-Pens, responsi- 
 ble-ility ; i.e., contractions of words ending with nsion-sive-siveness, terminate 
 with an En-hook ; while the contractions of words ending with nsible-ility, 
 terminate with the Ens-circle. 187, R. 2, a. Compare the Old-Phonographic 
 Kays-Pens, expensive ; Rays- Pens, responsible. If you make a contraction for 
 responsive (Rays-Pens) in analogy with that for expensive (Kays-Pens), it conflicts 
 with responsible. Kays-Pens 3 expansive (in analogy with expensive], would 
 conflict with Kays-Peus 3 , expansible (in analogy with responsible). So Analogy, 
 Uniformity, Consistency, being sacrificed at the outset, had to be sacrificed to 
 the end. 
 
 17 in the first place. This phrase-sign, though employed in any kind of 
 of reporting, is formed in accordance with the principle of 237, R. 2, 6 Ef stand- 
 ing for first and Pel for.ptace. 
 
 18 slavery \vas dying. The frequent use of the word slavery in this speech 
 brings it under the principle of phrase-writing expressed in 244, R. 3, 1. 
 
 19 in the second place. This phrase-sign, though properly used in all 
 kinds of reporting, is formed in accordance wich the principles of 237, R. 2, b 
 Skay (i.e., sec.) standing for second and Pel for place, (b) Other signs for corre- 
 sponding phrases may be formed in like manner, as En-Ith-Pel, in the third place 
 
154 SECOND STANDARD-PBOXOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 let posterity learn from the pages of the Constitution that their coun- 
 try had ever been disgraced with slavery. The silence of the Consti- 
 tution respecting slavery shows far more loathing and shame of it 
 than could any express condemnation of it, however emphatic. 
 
 But it is said that there is history to prove that the framers of the 
 Constitution were willing to let slavery continue. I admit it. What 
 is more, I admit that there arc clauses in the Constitution which con- 
 tribute proof of the truth of this history. Nevertheless, to go into 
 history for the sake of interpreting these clauses in behalf of crime is, 
 as we have already seen, wholly unwarranted by the rules of interpret- 
 ation. It is its letter, and not its history, that is the Constitution. 
 For the sake of argument, however, I will admit that these clauses 
 refer to slavery. 
 
 But for how long was slavery 50 to continue ? Only for some twenty 
 years were they willing to let it 
 
 34 
 
 continue. And what is 1 more, the mass of it was rea- 
 sonably expected to be of the comparatively mild type 
 
 of house and farm slavery, and not of the severe type of plantation 2 
 
 slavery. 
 
 ItU standing for Hard; Eni-EP-Ith-Pel, in the fourth place with Ith to distin- 
 guish it from in the first place ; En-Ef-Ef-Pel, iu the filth place ; En-En-Pel, in the 
 next place ; En-El 2 (tor last)-fel (or Nels-Pels") in the last place. 
 
 2 was slavery. 244, E. 3, 4. 
 
 O 4 l and -what is. Ketoid(awd) TVuhi(!e'iat joined as a hook) is distinct 
 "4 from Tetoid'(or) V?\ih(wltal). The Wuh-hook may be made into a circle 
 to add i.t, etc. 
 
 - plantation. This may be regarded as a special contraction. The full form 
 would be Plen-Teeshon. (6) Generally, in Standard Phonography, when the 
 same sign stands lor a primitive word and one or more derivatives, some or all of 
 them being contracted, that sign is written in the proper or assigned position of 
 the primitive, whatever may be the accented vowel (i.e., the proper position) of 
 the derivatives ; thus, Es l Em, assirnilate-d ion ; Plent 3 , plant-ed-(er)-ation ; 
 Kay-Pee2, capacious-ty ; Deet-Klen, decline-able-ation ; Dees 2 -Pet, despot-ic-ical- 
 ically ; Dee2-Men, diminish-ed-ution ; Dee3-Men, admonish-ed-ition ; Dee 1 -Men, 
 dom-inate-d-ion-nt ; Kays 2 -Entcr, eccentric-al-ity ; Kays-Eel, exclaim-ed, exclam- 
 ation-tory ; Fels 2 -Bee, flexible-ihty ; Feri-Jed, frigid-ity ; Jay 2 -Ger, geography- 
 ical-er; Pee^Kret, hypocrite-ical ; En-Dren l , indoctrinate-d-ion ; Eu-Sper 1 , m- 
 spire-ation ; Ent'-Ket, intellect-ual-uality ; Ent'-Med, intinudate-d-ion En-Vet 1 , 
 iiivito-d-aticn : Em-Jay 3 , majesty -ic ; Em-Thed 2 , mcthod-ic-ical, Methodism; 
 Eru-Thedst 2 , Methodist-ic-ical ; FeH-Ger, photography ic-ist-er ; Pers'-Pet, pre- 
 cipitate-d-iou ; Eay-Fet, relute-d-ation ; Kay'-Pet, repeat-ed ; repetition , Ray- ! - 
 Pet, repute-d-atiou , Ray-Pod, rapul-ity-ly. (c) This general principle corre- 
 
KEY TO THE EEPOETING EXERCISES. 155 
 
 I said that the framers of the Constitution expected slavery to con- 
 tinue for only some twenty years. 3 The historical truth that, in this 
 country* as well as in England, 5 the cessation of the African slave- 
 trade was looked to as the cessation of slavery itself, is undisputed. 
 Now history is confirmed at this point by the migration and impor- 
 tation clause of the Constitution that clause protecting the trade for 
 only twenty years. But that slavery itself was expected to continue 
 only so long is manifest from the fact that this protection, brief as it 
 was, was to be enjoyed only by the then existing States. 6 But if the 
 new States (and remember that the Constitution expressly provides 
 for their admission) 7 were not to be allowed to participate in the Af- 
 rican slave-trade, it was because they were not to be allowed to have 
 slavery. Having slavery without recruiting it from Africa was a 
 thing not then thought of. If, however, the new States were denied 
 
 spends to the general rule of position applying to derivative word-signs. See 
 261, E. 2. It serves to distinguish many contracted outlines, which by the gen- 
 eral rule of position would occupy the same position, and hence bo undistin- 
 guished except by meaning (or the context), (d) The suggestiveness (i.e., legi- 
 bility) of contractions for derivative words is favored by placing them in the 
 position of the primitive ; for, the primitive word being first read or suggested, 
 that and the context will at once indicate what derivative is to be employed. For 
 instance, Em-Thed 2 will easily be read as, or suggest, method, and t/iat, if it be not 
 the required word, will suggest, in connection with the context, the proper word 
 for the place, namely, methodic, methodical, methodically, or Methodism, (e) When 
 the proper position of a primitive word and that of the derivative words would 
 be different, as of refute^) and refutation^), and the corresponding position of the 
 two words would be the same, they are both placed in that position (as Eay2- 
 Fet, refute-d-ation), unless a different position is required for distinction's 
 sake ; as Eay3-Pet, repute-d-ation, to distinguish these words from EayS Fed, 
 rapid-ly, rapidity (which is in conformity with the rule), and Eayi-Ped, repeat- 
 ed, repetition. 
 
 3 twenty years. See Hand-Book, p. 199, b. 
 
 4 in this country. -The word-sign Kay2 for country was first introduced by 
 the Hand-Book. 
 
 6 in England Ing-end 1 (i.e., Eng'nd), as a word-sign for England, was in- 
 troduced by the Hand Book. It is distinct from the sign for English and thing 
 (Ingi), and is more suggestive in phrase-writing, especially when brought out of 
 its proper position, than the Old sign (Ingi). 
 
 existing States. 237, E. 1, 6. 
 
 7 ( ). The reporter should endeavor to indicate parentheses as often as pos- 
 sible. If not indicated, they are apt frequently to cause difficulty in reading ; 
 for, if the reader shoiild not at once observe the parenthesis, and read it with 
 suitable inflections, the idea not being received, the sentence would appear con- 
 fused, and nnich time would be lost in arriving at the correct reading. 
 
15G SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGltAl'llIC READER. 
 
 the right to have slavery, it follows that the old States were not to 
 be allowed to establish it, since that would be to allow an inequality 
 of rights between the new and the old States." No one claims that 
 such inequality exists in the contemplation 9 of the Constitution. 
 
 Another proof that slavery 10 was allowed only a brief duration is to 
 be found in the Ordinance for the Northwest Territory. That and 
 the Constitution were framed at nearly the same time," and to some 
 extent' 2 by the same men. The Ordinance provides for the recapture 
 of fugitive servants; and, inasmuch as it speaks expressly of slavci-v, 
 we will assume that fugitive slaves are included. But the Ordinance, 
 like the migration and importation clause in the Constitution, confines 
 its benefits at this point (if benefits they may be callfdi to the old 
 States. It was only those who had escaped from "any one of the 
 original States" that might be recaptured. Hence, like that clause, 
 the Ordinance also shows that the new States were not to have 
 slavery at all, and that the old States were not to have it after the 
 few years allowed them in which to bring it to a peaceful and gradual 
 close. 
 
 But I may be asked why, since the Ordinance and the migration 
 and importation clause both prove so clearly the policy and purpose 
 of .abolishing slavery, there is nothing in the fugitive servant clause 
 of the Constitution to prove the like policy and purpose. Why does 
 not this clause, like that in the Ordinance, limit the right of recapture 
 
 8 and the old States. The is omitted here, and and is adapted to the position 
 of old. (b) The practiced reporter may thus usually dispose of the phrase anil the, 
 thus saving many a lifting of the pen without at all impairing legibilitj-. 
 
 9 in the contemplation. 250, 3. This phrase-sign might be read in con- 
 templation, instead of "in the contemplation." In all such cases of omissions and 
 possible double readings, either the intended sense is not affected by the omission 
 of a word, or the context, carefully considered, will show that a word needs to be 
 supplied. 
 
 10 that slavery. 244, R. 3 (6). 
 
 at nearly the same time. This phrase would very probably have been 
 written, in the Reporting Style of the Old Phonography, Tee :1 Neri-El f- 1 (i.e., a dot 
 above the line) Sem2 Teei ; i.e., with five strokes, one dot, and four liftings : while 
 the Standard-Phonographic expression requires but fotir strokes and no dots and 
 no liftings : i.e., is nearly 100 per cent, faster than the Old expression. (6) Same 
 time may usually be written Semt, without vocalization (with a), and be distin- 
 guished from some time (Semt), provided the preceding the is expressed, as in this 
 phrase-sign. 
 
 12 and to some extent. And (Ketoid) is here prefixed to Sem 4 , to some. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 157 
 
 to "the original States?" )3 The simple and sole explanation is that this 
 clause in the Constitution docs not refer 1 * to slaves. 
 
 The fact that this clause does not limit its uses to the old States 
 utterly forbids the putting of a pro-slavery interpretation upon it. If 
 the Convention intended to have it apply to slaves, why did they not 
 qualify it so as to make it correspond with the Ordinance and the mi- 
 gration and importation clause ? 
 
 Again, the language of the fugitive servant clause in the Constitu- 
 tion makes it wholly inapplicable to slaves. The persons referred to 
 in this clause are debtors. Service is due from them. But the slave, 
 being a mere chattel, and, therefore, incapable of making a contract, 
 can owe nothing. Says Justice Best : "A slave is incapable of com- 
 pact. ' ' The slave codes 15 all declare that he can own nothing. I6 But 
 manifestly, he who can own nothing can owe nothing. " 
 
 And there is still one other reason why we should believe that the 
 framers of the Constitution did not intend to help slavery live, and 
 why we should believe that they committed themselves to no guiltier 
 policy guilty I admit it was than that of allowing the dying demon 
 a few years in which to die. It is, that to believe the contrary involves 
 them in the grossest hypocrisy. They began the Constitution with 
 the solemn declaration that they intended it to "secure the blessings 
 of liberty ;" and when they had finished it, and were about to sub- 
 mit it to the people, they unanimously struck from it the word "ser- 
 vitude," and supplied its place with "service," for the avowed 
 reason that servitude denotes the condition of slaves, and service 
 the obligations of freemen. For one, 18 1 am not prepared to call them 
 hypocrites, as all virtually do who impute to them pro-slavery 
 purposes, 
 
 13 to the original States. P. 169, R. 12, 5. 
 
 14 does not refer. To make the junction easy, make Net quite curved, and 
 Bay more slanting than usual in the word refer. 
 
 is slave codes. 182, R. 1, 6. 
 
 10 nothing:. Isaac Pitman has sometimes written this word Ending, and to 
 prevent clashing with anything, the latter word (or phrase) was written Eu-Ith- 
 Ing. This plan did not produce satisfaction, and no other mode of remedying 
 an obvious difficulty having presented itself, he wrote Ending, anything, and En- 
 Ith-Ing, nothing. This trouble is easily disposed of by providing nothing with a 
 needed contraction, En-Ith 2 . 
 
 i' nothing. To indicate a paragraph to bo made in the transcription, the 
 period mark is doubled. 
 
 18 for one. As one is somewhat emphasized here, it is better to write the 
 phrase Ef-'-Weu, rather thau Feu 2 . 
 
158 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 35 
 
 I will, at this stage 1 of my remarks, speak of the pro- 
 slavery interpretations of the Constitution by anti-slav- 
 ery men. Coming from such a source, they are peculiarly pernicious. 
 The mass of the American people- are worshipers 3 of the Constitu- 
 tion. They recognize no higher authority. For anti-slavery men, 
 therefore, to tell them it is pro-slavery, is to bring them under a 
 mighty influence to uphold slavery. 4 Most lamentable, therefore, 
 is it that so many of these sincere lovers of freedom should be taxing 
 their 3 ingenuity 3 to prove that the Constitution is 7 pro-slavery. 
 
 Freedom can bear any other opposition better than* this, which she 
 encounters in the house of her friends. She can bear to be opposed 
 by the current religion of the country, for the people are fast losing 
 all respect for a conventional and spurious religion, which mixes it- 
 self up with slavery, 9 instead of sternly demanding its extinction. 10 
 She can bear to be opposed by the Democratic party, which, Ahab- 
 like, has sold itself to work evil, or by such Republicans as use free- 
 dom to serve party. But the one thing that freedom cannot bear 11 
 is to have anti-slavery men, anti-slavery leaders, the most distin- 
 guished 12 and influential anti-slavery newspapers, at work to rob the 
 poor and powerless slave of the Constitution, and give it to the 
 proud and powerful slaveholder. Oh ! if there is anything that be- 
 longs to the slave, it is this paper, which our fathers 13 would not 
 consent 14 to stain with the word "slavery," and which they were 15 
 
 n f i at this stage. This common phrase needs a phrase-sign, which is 
 
 00 secured by changing lor the purpose the usual form of stage (Steh-Jay), 
 as in the engraving. 
 
 2 American people. P. 1C9, R. 12, 6. 
 * worshipers.-?. 194, R. 7. 
 
 4 to uphold slavery. 244, R. 3 (4). 
 
 5 taxing their. See the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, DHB, 5. 
 
 6 ingenuity. P. 135, note 6, 1, of this Reader. 
 
 1 Constitution is 244, R. 3, (1). 
 
 8 better than. See this Reader, p. CO, xiii. 
 with slavery. 244, R. 3 (5). 
 
 10 extinction. See this and the related words in the Standard-Phonographic 
 Dictionary. 
 
 11 freedom cannot bear. 244, R. 3 (1). 
 
 12 most distinguished. 236, 3. 
 
 1 3 which our fathers. See this Reader, p. 61, xv. 
 i would not consent. P. 112, R. 7, b. 
 
 15 and which they were. See DHB in the Standard-Phonographic Dic- 
 tionary ; and also p. 60, xii. of this Reader. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 159 
 
 determined should go down to posterity with a clean and fair face for 
 liberty. 
 
 I have said 13 much to you in praise of the Constitution. Let it not 
 be 17 inferred, however, that I claim for it the first place in your hearts. 
 Among all State papers, such pre-eminence 18 belongs to the Declara- 
 tion of Independence. They greatly exaggerate the 13 merits of the 
 Constitution who see in it the origin of the Union. As it does itself 
 declare, it was made "in order to form 23 a more perfect Union." The 
 Union already existed. It had been entered into even before 1776. 2I 
 It was, however, the Paper of that memorable year the noblest po- 
 litical paper ever sent over the world that was the first to set forth, 
 formally and authoritatively, the reason why the American Colonies 22 
 should become one nation, and the first 23 thus to set forth the sublime 
 and mighty principles which were 24 to vitalize and forever govern 
 that nation. This is the paper which deserves to be called the first 
 Constitution of our country ; for it is the first in the order of time 
 and the first in the degree of authority. One of the eminent states- 
 men (General Root) of my State pronounced it "the 25 fundamental 
 law of the land ;" and another (John C. Spencer) declared it to be 
 " above al! 2J Constitutions and all laws." The Federal Constitution 
 
 10 I have said. See this Reader, p. 127, notes 8 and 9. 
 
 i" I*t it not be. Tents, it not, is a valuable word-sign, first presented by 
 the Hand Book. See phrases beginning with LET IT NOT in tho Standard-Phono- 
 graphic Dictionary. 
 
 ls such pre-eminence. Pre-eminence is written in full, as in the engrp.v- 
 ing, and thus distinguished from prommence-y and permanence-y, which are con- 
 tracted. See these words and EMINENCE iu the Dictionary. 
 
 19 exaggerate the. Isaac Pitman gave Kays-Jay-Ret as the outline of tbis 
 word. See this Reader, p. 143, note 6. 
 
 33 in order to form. See this Reader, p. 22, note 23. 
 
 21 '76. See this Reader, p. 81, note 5. 
 
 22 American colonies. P. 1G9, R. 12. 
 
 -'' and the first. See this Reader, p. 150, "note 8. 
 21 which were. See this Reader, p. 70, note 11. 
 *5 pronounced it the. 23G, 3. 
 
 -6 above all. See this Reader, p. CO, xiv. The principle of adding all and 
 will by an El-hook, or of are, were, or our by an Ar-Ifook, is, of course, as applica- 
 ble within a word, as in this case, as in those words to which an El-hook or Ar- 
 hook is prefixed, as Bel 1 , by all; thus, Bee 2 -Vel, above all ; Schel 2 , suck will; Bee 2 - 
 Ycr, above our ; Scher 2 , such. are. 
 
1GO SECOKD STAXDARD-PHOXOGRAMTIC READER. 
 
 should be interpreted in the light of the Declaration of Independence. 27 
 But, alas! in these degenerate days, that Constitution, with all its 
 pro-slavery interpretations, is blindly worshiped, and the great and 
 heavenly principles of the Declaration of Independence are ridiculed 
 as "a fanfaronade of nonsense," and as "glittering generalities." The 
 Constitution, instead of being used to disparage and make void the 
 Declaration of Independence, should rather be viewed as supplement- 
 al to it, and as serving to carry out into*' detail the broad and pre- 
 cious principles of that first and greatest Constitution. Our fathers 
 could have had 23 no possible right to contravene or slight those prin- 
 ciples. Had they, when making and adopting the 30 Constitution, 
 been guilty of overlooking or in any wise dishonoring them, they 
 would therein have been guilty of the most infamous treason 
 toward all their countrymen who had expended treasure or periled 
 life to establish them, and also toward the good Lafayette and the 
 other gallant foreigners whom those principles had attracted to our 
 shores. 
 
 I spoke of the principles of the Declaration of Independence. Prom- 
 inent among them is that which asserts that "all men arc created 
 equal." This principle is the very soul of the Declaration of Inde- 
 pendence ; and being therefore the very soul of the Constitution, it 
 instantly annihilates all possible pro-slavery interpretations of that 
 instrument. I do not forget that, according to Chief Justice Taney's 
 recent discovery, black men did not come within the scope of this 
 principle, and were not a part of "all men." 
 
 36 
 
 Nevertheless, they were men, and they voted and fought 
 by the side of those who affirmed that ' ' all men are cre- 
 ated equal." Why, then, does the Chief Justice exclude them? The 
 words of the Declaration of Independence do not intimate their ex- 
 clusion. What rules of interpretation are there to authorize him to 
 go away from the plain meaning of these plain words for the purpose 1 
 
 "' Declaration of Independence. This, like any other similar phrase, as 
 soon as it appears likely to occur often, is contracted under the principle of 237, 
 R. 2. 
 
 2S carry out into. See this Eeader, p. 61, xvi. 
 
 -3 could have Had. P. Gl, xvi. of thifi Reader. 
 
 30 when making and adopting the. See this Reader, p. 77, note 4. 
 
 Q/ * for the purpose. This phrase-sign, thongh properly employed in 
 
 JW any kind of reporting, is formed in accordance with the principle of 
 
 special contraction (237, R. 2, I), the being omitted, under the principle of 250, 3. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 1G1 
 
 of fastening the crudest wrong upon the black man, and of involving 
 the fathers in the deepest and basest and most hypocritical injustice ? 
 There are none. 2 In gross violation of the rules of legal interpreta- 
 tion, at the expense of blackening the fame of the fathers, and at the 
 expense of outraging all tho rights and murdering all the manhood of 
 his equal brothers, 3 has the Chief Justice undertaken to show that our 
 fathers, when speaking of " all men," did not mean all men. And all 
 this has he done, notwithstanding the fathers spoke so evidently with 
 philosophical precision, and notwithstanding, too, that they spoke with, 
 religious solemnity, 4 and called God to witness their 5 sincerity. But 
 our fathers knew as well as we do that all parts of the human brother- 
 hood are equally dear to the great heart of their common Maker. 
 Were they, then, such brazen-faced hypocrites as to dare appeal to His 
 knowledge of their conscious rectitude, when all the while they were 
 guilty of the mental reservation which the Chief Justice imputes to 
 them ? guilty of deliberately excluding a portion of their fellow-men 
 from the equal rights of all men? nay, guilty of denying that God 
 has sent that portion into the world with rights 7 equal to those of 
 other men ? 
 
 The Chief Justice admits that s "All men " " would seem to embrace 
 
 2 there are none. Are, in phrase-writing, is frequently expressed by Ray ; 
 but when written alone, and generally when commencing phrase-signs, the most 
 convenient sign is Ar. It is the most convenient also because of allowing short- 
 ening for the derivative sign-word art, and lengthening for tho addition of dKr. 
 See DHB in the Dictionary. It would not be allowable to shorten Ray when alone 
 for art; and it allowable, tho sign wonld not be suggestive. Tn Standard Pho- 
 nography it would be allowable to lengthen Ray for ace thr, but Raydber, though 
 allowably used after another word for these words, would not, when aloue, be so 
 suggestive as Ar-dher, nor so convenient for joining with a following word. 
 Therefore, tbe general use of Ray for are, when standing alone, cannot be ap- 
 proved. 27, R. 2, 6. 
 
 3 equal brothers. 246, 1. 
 
 4 solemnity. See this Reader, p. 135, note G. 
 
 5 to witness their. See this Reader, p. CO, xiii. 
 God has sent 2-11, R. a (1). 
 
 i with rights. With as well as we may be joined to Em, En, Ray, Lay, by 
 the Way-hook, as in this case. P. 168, R. 3. 
 
 s admits that. Tho rule of 27, 4, of turning the circle between two strokes 
 in tho most convenient manner, is complied with in this caso by writing it as in 
 the engraving though it might be nearly as easy to write tb.e circle on the back 
 of Dhct ; which method some writers may prefer. 
 
162 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 the 1 whole human family." 10 " Seems, madam ! Nay, it is." He 
 also admits that the words " would be so understood if used in a simi- 
 lar" instrument at this day." Important admission ! Entirely fatal, 
 as we shall see, to his attempt to pervert their significance ! For that 
 the statesmen of this day have a broader, juster, and more fraternal 
 sense of human rights than had the 12 statesmen of that day, is a deep 
 delusion. All false is it that the statesmen of that day were so bigot- 
 ed as to forget, and that the statesmen of this day are so catholic as to 
 remember, that Africans are men. 
 
 Who was the first President of the United States ? An open Aboli- 
 tionist. For Washington not only emancipated his own slaves, but 
 confessed his 13 anxiety to vote for the emancipation of other men's 
 slaves. 
 
 Who was the most intellectual among the great men of the Revo- 
 lution ? This honor would probably be accorded to Alexander Ham- 
 ilton, who said : "The sacred rights of mankind are not to be rum- 
 maged for among old parchments or musty records. They are written 
 as with a u sunbeam in the whole volume 15 of nature, by the hand 
 of the Divinity itself, and can never be erased or obscured by 
 mortal power. All men are by nature entitled to equal privileges. 
 Natural liberty is the gift of the beneficent Creator 16 to the whole 
 human race." 
 
 Who was the pre-eminently practical and common-sense 17 man of 
 the Revolution? Perhaps Benjamin Franklin. l8 Nevertheless, scarcely 
 
 9 would seem to embrace the. See this Reader, p. 76, note 13. 
 
 10 human family. P. 169, R. 12, 6. 
 " in a similar. P. 168, R. 10, a. 
 
 i- than had the. See this Reader, p. 61, xvi. 
 
 confessed his. 244, R. 3 (4). 
 
 n as with a. 245. 
 
 ls whole volume. 1 04. 
 
 ic beneficent Creator. See BENEFICENT in the Standard-Phonographic 
 Dictionary. 
 
 17 and common-sense. Though in most cases of joining TetoiiU for either 
 or or and. the context would make the necessary distinction, yet, for distinction's 
 sake, it is well not to join or to a following stroke, when and would necessarily be 
 joined in the same way. Or can be safely joined, of course, in all cases whero 
 and might be joined by Ketoid. 
 
 '' Kenjamin Franklin. Franklin is contracted to Fcr-Klen, in accordance 
 with a general principle (236, 4) ; but Benjamin is represented by Bee, in accord- 
 ance with the principle of special contraction (23 7 , P 2). Of course, such a con- 
 traction for such a familiar name may be used in any kind of reporting. 
 
1CEV TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 163 
 
 was the Constitution, of which he himself was a, framcr, adopted, ere, 
 as President of the Pennsylvania Abolition Society, he petitioned 19 
 Congress to abolish slavery. His petition said that the power of Con- 
 gress should be exercised impartially in behalf of "all descriptions of 
 people, without distinction of color. " 
 
 Who was the first Chief Justice of the United States? John Jay, 
 the President of the New- York Abolition Society the man who said : 
 ' ' Till America comes into this measure (the abolition of slavery) , her 
 prayers to heaven will be impious." 50 Moreover, it was he who said 
 that one reason why the word ' ' slaves ' ' was not put into the Con- 
 stitution was, that ei slavery is ' ' repugnant ' ' to that part of the Declar- 
 ation of Independence which says, "All men are created equal." In 
 other words, John Jay said that "all men," in that instrument, in- 
 cludes Africans. Roger B. Taney says it does not. 22 "Which is the 
 better authority? 
 
 Chief Justice Taney has four reasons for his conclusion that, in the 
 days of the Revolution, "all men" did not mean all men. 1st. The 
 Constitution is for slavery.- 3 
 
 37 
 
 But, as we have seen, 1 it is full of powers for killing, and 
 has none for saving, slavery. It is ashamed to mention 
 the hateful 2 word. His three other reasons are : 1st. The whites of 
 that period u-ould not intermarry icith the blacks. 2d. Nor consent to serve 
 with them i?i the militia. 3d. Nor consent to the naturalization of alien blacks. 
 But will the whites of this period ? Oh no no more than the whites 
 of that. Poor Chief Justice ! Greatly do you need to improve your 
 logic! 1st. You admit that, 3 in our day, "all men" includes Afri- 
 cans. 2d. Yoxi admit it because of our greater respect for their rights. 
 
 13 he petitioned. See Standard -Phonographic Dictionary under ANCIENT. 
 
 20 impious. Tliis word is vocalized with yii for i-u, to distinguish it from 
 Empsi, impossible. Both words being of the same purt of speech, one would, be 
 liable to be read for the other, if written alike. 
 
 21 -was that. 217. It should bo observed that the joined ends of Zee and 
 Dhct are not tapered. To taper them would lose the advantage of joining. 
 
 -2 it does not.- 23, 244, R. 3 (1). 
 
 " Constitution is for slavery 244, R. 3 (1) and (5), 
 
 jj~ ! as we have seen. 245. 
 
 2 hateful. P. 119, R. 8. 
 3 you admit that. P. CO, xi. of this Reader. 
 
164 SECOND ST.OttURD-PHOSOGRAPinC READER. 
 
 But this respect is, in fact, immeasurably less than it was 4 in the Rev- 
 olution ; and hence, in the Revolution, far more emphatically than it 
 does now, did ' ' all men ' ' include Africans. 
 
 What, however, have these prejudices, or, indeed, any other of the 
 prejudices of the whites against the blacks, to do with the question of 
 citizenship? The mutual prejudices of Catholics and Protestants are 
 strong. Nevertheless they let each other vote and be citizens. 80, 
 too, the whites, notwithstanding their prejudices against the blacks, 
 let them vote and be citizens. This is true now. More emphatically 
 true was it in the times of the Revolution. The articles of Confedera- 
 tion betrayed this prejudice in the use of the word "white." Never- 
 theless they accorded citizenship to the blacks South Carolina and 
 Georgia alone voting against it. 5 How absurd to doubt that it is ac- 
 corded in the Constitution, which contains not the word " white ! " 
 
 But I must hasten to the end of my words. I said that I came here 
 to beseech you to know no law for slavery, but to trample under foot 
 whatever claims to be a law for slavery. I honor your intelligent 
 Judiciary for declaring the Fugitive Slave Act unconstitutional. I 
 honor Wisconsin for standing bravely by her brave Judiciary. A good 
 and glorious example is all this. But I am here to call on you for a 
 still better and more glorious example. Wisconsin both her people 
 and her judges must know no law, nor admit the possibility of any 
 law, for slavery. A statute may be in favor of slavery ; a constitution 
 even the idolized Federal Constitution may be in favor of slavery ; 
 but the voice of all Wisconsin must be, that slavery is too repugnant 
 to justice and humanity, to reason and religion, to be capable of wear- 
 ing any, even the least, semblance of law. 
 
 A blessed result of your disowning the lawfulness of slavery will be 
 releasing your conscience from all obligation to re-plunge into the hell 
 of slavery your poor brothers and sisters, who have come up out of it 
 with their scarred bodies, and, by the help of the friendly North star, 7 
 worked their danger-crowded way as far as your borders. Wherever 
 
 1 less than it wits. The direction of even word-signs whoso stroke is El or 
 Lay is sonietinn * changed for convenience of phrase-writing, as Layshon in 
 changed to Elshon in the very next phrase. It is added to than by l\alvin;_'. 8 'e 
 p. 01, xvi. of this Reader. See LESS in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 5 against it. See phrases beginning with. AGAINST in the Standard-Phono- 
 graphic Dictionary. 
 
 6 that it is accorded. Kred for accorded is here vocalized with a for the 
 Bake of greater legibility. 
 
 7 North star In this special contraction, Aort/i is expressed by Xcr, and the 
 consonants of star by the Stcr-loop. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 1G5 
 
 the conscience is so perverted as to admit this obligation, alas! how 
 baleful must be its influence upon the whole character ! How such a 
 conscious obligation must shackle all manly freedom ! How it must 
 debase and sink the nature that has fallen under it! So long as this 
 soul-shriveling obligation remains in the public conscience of Wiscon- 
 sin, so long the religion of Wisconsin cannot be the generous and en- 
 nobling religion of Jesus Christ ; cannot be characterized by the bold- 
 ness, honesty, and impartial love of the true religion. Young as your 
 State is, you nevertheless have a University at your seat of govern- 
 ment, well endowed, prosperous, and with a ripe scholar at its head. 
 It was my good fortune to spend a day with him during the past week. 
 I know the great worth of this cherished friend of my youth and man- 
 hood. But I also know that if the Fugitive Slave Act, or any pro- 
 slavery interpretations of duty, shall be allowed to continue to exert 
 their withering influence upon the moral sense and public sentiment 
 of your State, this Institution, notwithstanding its great advantages, 
 cannot fail to suffer immensely 
 
 in common with all your educational and religious inter- 
 ests ; ay, and with your material interests also. The 
 highest culture of the understanding cannot be reached where the 
 people receive the behests of slavery as law. Wisconsin manhood can 
 never realize the beau ideal of manhood until it shall have been aroused 
 to throw off from its conscience, indignantly and forever, all obliga- 
 tion to do what is mean and cruel and wicked. And when, I ask, is a 
 man doing what is mean and cruel and wicked, if it is not when he 
 permits himself to be transformed into a bloodhound, 1 to bay upon 
 the track of innocent human prey ? 
 
 Among the most valuable results of your ignoring all law for slavery 
 will be the preparation of your way to grow in the knowledge of true 
 l aw a knowledge inferior to no other in its happy influence upon the 
 character. To whatever extent you are now guilty of recognizing in 
 slavery the name and obligations of law, and of thus according to the 
 very worst thing the name and obligations due to the very best, to 
 that extent do you now trifle with, and twist, and blunt your moral 
 nature. But when you shall have come to identify law with right, 
 nnd to acknowledge nothing to be law which is not right though I 
 readily admit that there are many violations of right, and therefore 
 many illegalities, 2 which it is better to bear with than resist then 
 
 ~ _ i bloodhound. 25. 
 
 2 aiegralities. See this Reader, p. 135, note 6. 
 
1GG SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 you will have entered a law-school 3 in which wisdom and goodnec? 
 grow as constantly as do folly and wickedness outside of it ; 4 a law- 
 school in which, under the teachings of true law, the mind expands as 
 rapidly as it becomes dwarfed when under the influence of those con- 
 ventional legalities which lack all the great elements and all the soul 
 of true law. 
 
 I have done. I came here, as I have repeatedly told you, to ask 
 you to know no law for slavery. There is no remedy for slavery hut 
 to deny its legality. Do what you will against slavery, you will only 
 be helping it, so long as you acknowledge it to be law. In vain will a 
 man talk, and pray, and labor for the prevention of forgery, perjury, 
 theft, and murder, if nevertheless he admits in their behalf the plea 
 that they are sacred, obligatory law. Once, however, declare it an 
 outlaw, and make your declaration sincere and effective by refusing to 
 vote for any man who recognizes its legality, and then slavery will 
 have nothing to do but to die. 
 
 The abolition of all American slavery ! 5 How joyful 6 the anticipa- 
 tion of an event which shall terminate wrongs so sad, miseries so un- 
 utterable ! Thrice blessed, then, the slave, whose weary bondage 
 will at last be ended ! Even still more blessed the liberation of the 
 slaveholder ; for, the sorrows in which slavery binds the 7 slave are as 
 nothing compared with the sins in which slavery binds the slave- 
 holder! Thrice blessed, then, our nation, when delivered from its 
 great curse and peril ! Thrice blessed, then, and no longer thrice 
 cursed, its influence upon the other 8 nations of the earth! Safe, 
 then, the Union purchased with precious blood ! Indivisible, then, 
 our beloved country, when slavery shall be blotted out, and when all 
 the great beneficial 9 interests, no longer hindered by that one terri- 
 ble, 10 destructive, and disuniting interest, shall be left free to work 
 harmoniously and mightily in binding North, and South, and 
 East, and West in a peaceful and loving fellowship, never more to be 
 broken ! 
 
 3 a law-school. In many compound words, the elements of which it is de- 
 sirable shall be united in their forms as they arc joined by the voice, the form of 
 one or the other of the elements is changed BO as to admit of their being joined, 
 as in this word, law-school ; in writing which, school is changed from ita usual 
 outline (Skel), which would not join with Lay (law). 
 
 * outside of it. It is here added by halving, of being implied. 250, 3. 
 
 5 of all American slavery. American tlavery, in accordance with the prin- 
 ciple of special contraction, is represented here by Em for American and Slay for 
 tlavery. 
 
 "joyful. P. 110, K. 8. 
 
 bintfs the. 1ST, 11. 1. 
 
 8 upon the other. 264, R, 4. See the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, 
 tinder DHB. 
 
 9 beneficial. See this word in the Dictionary. 
 
 10 terrible. See this Reader, p. 101, note 5. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 167 
 
 LAW REPORTING. 1 
 
 ME. EDWARD SMITH SWORN. 
 Direct Examination. 
 
 OQ Q- 2 What is your occupation ? 3 
 
 A. 2 Civil surveyor ; have been so since 1831. * 
 
 Q. In this city ? 5 
 A. Tcs, sir. G 
 
 OQ l I-aw Reporting. See an article on the subject of " Phonography in 
 Ji/ Law Courts,'' in Odds and Ends, p. 181. 
 
 " Q and A. It is best to begin every question with the letter Q, written 
 small, as in the engraving, for the sake of speed. Close at the end of the question 
 write a for the double purpose of denoting the termination of the question (i.e., 
 as a period) and the beginning of tho Answer. A small q at the end of the Answer 
 has a corresponding use. There is thus saved the necessity and the loss of time 
 of making a period, or of commencing a new paragraph with every question and 
 answer. 
 
 (6) In transcribing testimony, place Q. and A. just at the loft of a lino (either 
 ruled, as in " legal cap," or iormed by folding tho paper, as lawyers sometimes 
 do) about one inch from the left-hand side of the page, or perhaps a little more 
 in case tlie manuscript is to be stitched or bound at the side. This margin should 
 be considerable, so as to allow of annotations at the side. However, in case of tho 
 report being bound (as other books usually are) at the side, room in the margin 
 need not be left for annotations ; for, they can then be placed on the opposite 
 page, which should be blank. 
 
 (c) Ease of reference to testimony is favored by leaving an extra Hank line be- 
 tween an Answer and the following Question. 
 
 (d) The letter Q is to be placed before every sentence to which the witness ro- 
 sponds as to a question ; i.e., before every real question, even though it should 
 not have tho form of one. 
 
 (e) In transcription, it is unnecessary to write the interrogation point (?), for it 
 would be superfluous, the sign of a question (Q) having already been written at 
 the beginning. 
 
 3 What is your occupation. Tho word your is omitted here, undei the 
 principle of 250, 3, in order to secure the advantage of a phrase-sign. See this 
 Reader, p. 75, note 10. 
 
 * 1831. Soo this Reader, p. 83, note 2. In law-reporting there is no need of 
 placing an apostrophe or stroke bel'oro tho last figures of dates. 
 
 6 in this city The circle of Dhees might have been enlarged to express the 
 first sound of city ; but one * may bo omitted safely, and with an advantage as to 
 speed, in accordance with p. 1C4, R. 8. 
 
 6 Tes, sir. This very valuable word-sign, especially for the reporting of tes- 
 timony, was first presented by tho Hand-Book. 
 
168 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Q. Have you made a map showing where a line forty-eight feet 
 
 west of the westerly line of West-street 7 will come ? 
 A. I have. 
 
 Q. Is that it? 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 The diagram here shown to the witness was marked "Exhibit 
 No. 4. "* 
 
 Q. Did Mr. Smith make this ? 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Cross Exami?iation. s 
 
 Q. At whose request did you make the map in question? 
 A. At the request of the plaintiffs in the suit. 10 
 
 Q. What data did you make your estimates upon? 
 
 A. There is no" estimate made about the map ; it is a simple sur- 
 vey showing where a line forty-eight feet west of the westerly 
 line of West-street would cross these premises what portion 
 would be taken in ; showing an absolute fact. I can go on and 
 describe the process if that is what is wanted. 
 
 ~ West-street. The t of TFcst is omitted, in accordance with 23C, 3 ; and 
 then one of the Es-souuds is omitted under the license of p. 194, R. 8. 
 
 8 Kxhibit No. 4. It is well for the reporter of testimony to insert in the 
 margin of bis notes the number of the Exhibits, as in the engraving, so that he 
 can readily refer to the testimony concerning them ; and also in the margin of 
 the transcript, for the ready reference to them by the lawyers, or other persons 
 making use of the report. 
 
 9 Cross-Examination. It i8 well, if there is sufficient time, to write "C. E." 
 for Cross-Examination, as iu the engraving, at the beginning of the notes of the 
 cross-examination. But if there is iiot time, go on, even without any break, sim- 
 ply writing " xq "before the first cross-question; as " Rdq " is written before 
 the first question on the Re-direct Examination, and " Ilxq" before the first ques- 
 tion on the Rf.-cross Examination. (V) Before every question by the Court, write 
 "qc ; " and " qj" before every question by a Juror. 
 
 10 plaintiffs in tlie suit. 187, K. 1. 
 
 11 there is no, etc. The distinct affirmations of a witness, which iu ordin- 
 ary matter would be regarded as separate sentences, are usually iu reports of 
 testimony separated by semicolons (;) instead of periods ; though, if these sen- 
 tences were quite independent, I should conform to the ordinary rules of punc- 
 tuation, and separate them by periods. It is advisable to punctuate quite freely 
 iu taking the words of a witness, because there is more difficulty frequently than 
 most other kinds of reporting in determining the correct punctuation ; upon 
 which, perhaps, iu testimony very much may depend. 
 
KEY TO THE EEPOETTNO HXERCISES. 169 
 
 Q. Are there any estimates of distances m the map? 
 A. There are measurements in the map. 
 
 Q. Upon what data did you make your measurements? 
 
 A. On the known fact that West-street is seventy feet wide at right 
 angles ; and I was instructed to ascertain where a line forty- 
 eight feet from the westerly side of West-street would intercept 
 these stalls as they are called. 
 
 Q. And that is the line in red? 
 
 A. One red line shows the westerly line of West-street ; the other, 
 the forty-eight feet, 
 
 Q. And the first red line looking westerly chows the westerly lino 
 
 of West-street as it is at present ? 
 A. Yes, Bir. 
 
 Q. And the other red line parallel with it shows where forty-eight 
 
 feet west of thc~wcsterly line of West-street would come ? 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 He-direct Examination. 
 
 Q. Did you at any time make a map showing the amount of surface 
 
 filled in between Yesey and Dcy ctrccts, west of West-street ? 
 A. I did. 
 
 Q. Have you that map? 
 A. I have it here. 
 
 The map was here marked by the Referee "Exhibit ITo. 5." 
 Q. This is the westerly line of West-street ? 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Q. From what was that line established ? 
 A. As by the law of 1798. '* 
 
 Q. The premises in the suit on that map arc shown in blue lines ? 
 A. They are shown by a pink-shade round them. 
 Q. Does this pink-shado exclude the piers and include the forty- 
 eight feet ? 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Q. Sinco when have these premises been filled in ? 
 Objected to 13 as assuming a fact not proved. 
 
 !2 1798. This date not belonging to the present century, had to be written 
 in full. Seo this Reader, p. 83, note 2. 
 
 ls Objected to. I usually write Obj, as in the engraving, for Objected to ; 1, 
 because I can then more readily refer to tho Objections ; 2, because it saves mak- 
 ing a period, or commencing a new paragraph. 
 
270 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC EEADEE. 
 
 Q. Arc those premises filled in ? 
 
 A. They are. 
 
 Q. Since when were they filled in? 
 
 A. Since 1829 ; they have all been filled in since 1829. 
 
 Q. Were you at any time employed by any of the city authorities 
 
 to survey the ground then filled in and make a map of it ? 
 A. I was, sir a portion of it. 
 Q. When? 
 A. In 1849. 
 Q. By whom? 
 A. By the Street Commissioner, at the request of the Chairman of 
 
 the Market Committee. 
 Q. What was the object of that survey? 
 Objected to. 
 
 Mr.. E - 11 I want to show that the ground was occupied as far 
 
 back as five years prior to our lease ; that is, as far back as 1853. 
 Ma. B . Xo matter what the answer to that may be, it won't 
 show that. 
 
 Objection sustained, because the inquiry went to the motive 
 of the party having the 
 
 J A curvey made. 
 
 Tt U Q. Did vou make a map of yorrr survey ? 
 A. I did. 
 
 Q. Is it here? 
 A. No, sir.' 
 
 i* E . Tliis is the initial of the name of one of the lawyers employed in 
 
 this case. The initial, or (perhaps for distinction's sake, when two or more 
 names begin with the same letter) two letters, is all that is necessary to write in- 
 stead of the lawyer's name. These letters might be inclosed by a curved line, as 
 suggested in this Reader, p. 139, n. 19, 6; but this may usually be saved in law- 
 reporting, without causing confusion or doubt, especially when the long period 
 is placed, as is the case in the engraving, before the initial letter or letters, ' (6) 
 When a lawyer's name is written at the commencement of his remarks, especial- 
 ly ia a body of testimony, the transcriber should commence it a little to the left 
 of the left-hand line of writing, as in this Key. It should be underlined with 
 two strokes of the pen. And upon the neatness of doing this, and other little 
 things of the kind very much of the good appearance of a manuscript-report will 
 depend ; and hence ilpays to do them well neatly. 
 
 i A, No, sir. The JVb, tir may be joined to A. advantageously, as 
 
 shown ia tlie engraving! tbc En being joined to the A without an 
 angle. 
 
 40 
 
TO lius KKPoKTina rxiatoidiis. 171 
 
 Q. A copy of it I 1 
 A. No, sir. 
 
 Q. What did you do with that map ? 
 
 A. It was taken to the Committee 3 and left with them ; that is the 
 last I have seen of it. 
 
 Q. Were you employed in 1850 by any person connected with the4 
 
 city authorities to take soundings near these premises? 
 A. I was. 
 
 Q. Did you make soundings? 
 A. I did. 
 
 Q. Did you draw a plan ? 
 A. I did. 
 
 Q. Plan of what ? 
 
 A. Plan of filling the outer bulkhead. 
 
 Q. What did you do with that plan ? 
 
 A. I left it with the Street Commissioner. 
 
 Q. When was that? 
 
 A. In 1851, I think ; late in the spring of 1851. 
 
 Q. On that plan was there any designation of the outer bulkhead 
 
 as it is now ? 
 A. No, sir, not as it is at present. 
 
 Q. When was the present bulkhead first, begun ? 
 
 A. I think it was along in the early part of the fall of 1851 ; I 
 speak from memory alone ; I may not be strictly correct as to 
 the date ; it was in 1851 ; I think the early part of the fall. 
 
 Q. When was it finished ? 
 A. In 1853. 
 
 Q. During that time was there any filling in cf the intermediate 
 space ? 
 
 J copy of It. TV'rite Kay-Pee-Yet, or (as illustrated in tho engraving) add of 
 by the Vee-hook, and shorten the stroke to add it, 
 
 3 to the committee. Write Tee 4 (iltee) with the comm-dot above the line 
 over the Tee, if deemed necessary. The better way is that illustrated in tho en- 
 graving namely, by Petoid* (=to the) and Tee under= committee. 
 
 4 connected with the. It is unnecessary to write or imply the conn, for 
 Ket 2 (ekt) is made legible by the following with. Observe that the similar form, 
 Ketoid-Weh', and -were, has the Ketoid above the line, and Weh ON the line ; 
 whereas in ccnnecttd with the KET is oa the line, and with, is joined, running 
 tbrcugh, or below, tho line. 
 
172 KECOXI) STANDAHD-PHOXOGKAPHIC HEADER. 
 
 A. It was going on nil the time. 
 
 Cross-Examination Resumed. 
 
 Q. Bid not the bulkhead give way, 8 so as to render useless the land 
 
 ia front within the pink-shade upon Exhibit No. 5 ? 
 A. Not that I am aware of. 
 Q. Ciiice 1353, and about the time of its completion in 1853, as you 
 
 have stated, were you in the habit of being upon or adjacent to 
 
 these premises ? 
 
 A. I have baen there 5 occasionally, but for no particiilar purpose. 
 Q. Which of the city authorities employed you to make soundings, 
 
 as you have stated ? 
 A. The Street Commissioner. 
 Q. What was his name ? 
 A. Mr. Dodge.* 
 
 CHARGE TO THE JURY. 
 
 \Charge of His Honor, Judge Nelson, in the case of Alexander Smith, d al, 
 versus Alvin Higgins, et al. In the United States Circuit Court for the 
 Southern District of New York.~\ 
 
 GENTLEMEN OF THE JURY : s The patent 9 in this case was originally 
 granted to Alexander Smith on the 18th of June, 1850. On the 10th 
 of December of the same year, an undivided half of the patent was 
 assigned to Jonathan Smith. 10 The suit is in the name of the two." 
 
 5 give \<ray. As in this phrase it -would be inconvenient to join "Way to give, 
 join the brief wa. See WAT iu the Dictionary. 
 
 6 I have been there. Here the En-hook of been is omitted BO that the 
 writer may have the great advantage of lengthening Bee to add there. 
 
 ' Dodge. It is usually unnecessary to insert in the notes the word Mister 
 (see Webster). If it should be inserted in the transcript even when not spoken, 
 it could do no harm. At any rate, the memory may bo relied upon iii such a triv- 
 ial matter as that. 
 
 8 Gentlemen of the Jury. P. ICO, E. 12, 6. 
 
 9 patent. The use of Poo 3 as a word-sign for patent originated with the au- 
 thor. Its value will be seen in the engraving of this charge. 
 
 i to Jonathan Smith. Jay is here written for Jonathan, under the princi- 
 ple of special contraction (237, R. 2). When it first occurred in reporting the case 
 (of which this charge, of course, was but a email part), it was written in full 
 Jay-En-Then. See this Reader, p. 122, note 6 ; p. 136, note 14. 
 
 11 of the two. See this Reader, p. 79, note 3. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 173 
 
 The patent was surrendered and re-issued with an amended specifica- 
 tion on the llth of May, 1852. The suit is founded upon this re-is- 
 sued patent and amended specification. 
 
 The first question to be considered by the Court and Jury 12 is, what 
 is the invention of the plaintiff? This we must ascertain and settle in 
 order to be able to determine whether or not it has been appropriated 
 or infringed by the defendant. 13 
 
 The invention is described 14 by the patentee as a new and useful 
 apparatus for parti-coloring yarn. 15 
 
 It is therefore a patent for machinery for the means to be used in 
 this work. The patentee then refers to the modes of parti-coloring in 
 use at the time he made his invention ; the first being by printing, and 
 the second by dipping the skeins into a dye- vat, the part not to be 
 
 12 by the Court and Jury. 250, 3. The words Court and Jury, in law-re- 
 porting, are usually commenced with a capital letter. 
 
 is by the defendant. The use of Dee 2 for defendant and Def 2 for defense, 
 originated with the author. I mention this fact here, as in many other cases I 
 have mentioned the fact of having devised word-signs and contractions and in- 
 troduced valuable principles, in order that history may not be falsified or con- 
 cealed by those who for any reason would obscure or deny my improvements of 
 the art, or underrate their value. But it must not be supposed that I have men- 
 tioned a tithe of the instances of my improvements. They are too frequent to 
 permit that. Take this line for instance. Ken 2 is a new word-sign for question ; 
 the phrase-sign for by the Court and Jury would not have been found in the Old 
 Phonography ; En-Ven 2 for invention is a new contraction, in analogy with which 
 many other contractions are formed. Plent 2 is a new word-sign for Plaintiff. 
 Dee 2 -Tren is a new contraction for determine. Whether or not would not have been 
 so quickly written by the Old Phonographers. Per 2 -Pret is a new contraction for 
 appropriated, formed in accordance with a new general principle, which makes a 
 saving of one or more strokes in thousands of words. En-Fren 1 is a new con- 
 traction for infringed. In the next line there are fourteen variations from the 
 Old Phonography, by which fourteen strokes and eight liftings of the pen, be- 
 sides other advantages, are gained over the Old Phonography. 
 
 u is described P. 182, K. 4. 
 
 is parti-coloring: yarn. This is a special contraction, in which Pret-Kel 
 stands for parti-coloring (ing being omitted), and yarn is added, as though it were 
 the word ya'n, by the En-hook. The phrase might have been written Pret-Kel- 
 Arn, but the Am in rapid writing would degenerate into nearly an En-hook ; and 
 thus, in fact, originated the sign in the engraving, so far as representing yarn by 
 an En-hook is concerned. (6) In this contraction the word color should strictly 
 have been represented by its sign, Kler ; but the small hook is used, because the 
 making of the large hook would require more time than the small one ; and there 
 is no countervailing objection on the ground of legibility, because the contrac- 
 tion given in the engraving is perfectly legible ; and no principle is violated, be- 
 cause it falls under the principle of special contraction (237, R. 2), which permits 
 the abbreviation of sign-words quite as readily as others. 
 
174 SECOXD STANDARD -PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 dyed being clamped, or tied, or wrapped around, to prevent the ac- 
 cess of the dye. 
 
 He then states that these methods' 6 in previous use were imperfect, 
 the printing not admitting of permanent colors, besides requiring 
 complex machinery, and the dyeing by clamping, tying, etc., being 
 unsuccessful on account of the access of the dye to the parts sought to 
 be excluded. He then speaks of the nature of his improvement, which, 
 he says, consists of parti-coloring yarns that have been reeled, 17 by 
 means of direct immersion 18 
 
 41 
 
 in the dye, by the use of movable frames 1 adapted to re- 
 ceive and hold the 2 skeins as they are arranged upon a 
 reel, and so combined with the dye- vat that they will permit the yarn 
 to be let down to a determinate distance in the dye. There is then a 
 particular description of the machinery used in this process, 3 and final- 
 ly the more material part of the specification, particularly when we 
 are inquiring as to the thing invented or discovered the claim. 
 What the patentee claims to have secured is the method substantially 
 as described, 4 of parti -coloring yarns which have been reeled, 3 by di- 
 
 16 that these methods. See this Reader, p. 94, note 8. 
 
 " that have been reeled. See this Reader, p. 146, note 28. 
 
 is direct immersion. 164. 
 
 . . i movable frames. This is a special contraction. 237, R. 2, ft. 
 
 41 
 
 s adapted to receive and hold the. And is omitted here. This 
 phrase occurred very often throughout the entire case ; so that the omission of 
 and from it was safe, although it would not have been, perhaps, if it had occurred 
 but rarely. 
 
 3 in this process. There are two modes of avoiding disjoining : cither omit 
 the circle of this as in the engraving, or turn the circle on the back of the curve, 
 as illustrated elsewhere. The latter mode is not difficult, after a little training. 
 
 * substantially as described. This phrase is of frequent occurrence in 
 patent suits, and this phrase-sign makes a great gain over the Old-Phonographic 
 expression Sbees 2 -Teu Iss 2 Dee-Skay-Bed. 
 
 5 which have been reeled. P. 169, R. 12. In case the Advanced Corre- 
 sponding and the Reporting outline for the present tense of a verb terminates 
 with a full-length stroke with a large initial hook as Bee-Rel, barrel; Kler 2 , color 
 the Advanced Correspondent may add the d of the past tense either by Dee or 
 (rather) by shortening ; (2) but the Reporter in such case writes the present for 
 the past tense (or time), because (A) he thereby saves either an additional stroke 
 or the little extra care of shortening, (B) and secures the further advantages (a) of 
 adding a consonant, as n (for yarn} in the special phrase-sign Rel'en 1 , reeled yarn; 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 175 
 
 rect and free immersion, by means of frames carrying the reeled 
 yarns," combined with the dyeing-vat by machinery adapted to let 
 down and draw up the frame and measure the extent of the immer- 
 sion. The reel on which the yarn is reeled (which was exhibited in 
 Court) is not a part of the combination, and as regards this question 
 of novelty in the combination, described by the patentee, and in which 
 his invention consists, may be laid out of view. The thing invented, 
 then, is this: The horizontal frame carrying the reeled yarns com- 
 bined with the dyeing- vat by machinery adapted to let down and 
 draw up this frame and measure the extent of the immersion, or the 
 extent of the line of dyeing upon the yarn. In other words, the thing 
 discovered is the combination of the horizontal frame carrying the 
 reeled yarns with the dyeing vat by machinery which must always 
 be kept in view as very important which lets down the frame carry- 
 ing the yarn, and draws it up, and at the same time measures the 
 line of yarn to be dyed. 
 
 Now, this being the thing invented the improvement patented 
 the next question 7 is, is it new and useful ? It must be both in order 
 to constitute a valid patent. The utility of the arrangement and com- 
 bination I have not understood to be contested by the learned counsel 
 for the defendant. 1 * 
 
 As to the novelty of the arrangement and combination, there has 
 been introduced in the course of the trial, intending to bear upon this 
 question, as well as upon the question of infringement, the previous 
 printing apparatus, the clamping process and apparatus, and the meth- 
 ods of Graham, Stevenson, Whittock, and that of Kerr, one of the 
 witnesses who testified on the part of the defendant. 
 
 Now, the question of novelty is not whether free immersion has 
 been before used for dyeing parti-colored yarns ; but whether this 
 dyeing of parti-colored yarns by free immersion was done previous 
 to the date of the invention of the plaintiff, by an arrangement and 
 
 (6) of shortening to add it, as Rcldi, reel (or reeled] it, Klerd-, color-ed it; (c) and of 
 of lengthening to add thr, as m Reldher 1 , reel (or reeled) tlir ; Klerdheri, clear-ed 
 Utr. 
 
 < reeled yarns. In this special contraction yarns is added the same as in 
 Pret-Klens, parti-colored yarns. 
 
 ' next question. 23G, 3. 
 
 8 by the learned counsel for the defendant. Lay -Kay Deo Jor learned 
 counsel for the defendant may bo introduced into general reporting, though it is 
 formed in accordance with the principle of special contraction (237, 11 2, /<) Lay 
 standing lor learned, Kay {or counsel, and Dee for defendant. This sigu ; transferred 
 to the common print would be "L. C. D/' See phrases commencing with Learn- 
 ed Counsel in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
176 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 combination of machinery like that described in his patent. 9 This is 
 not a patent for the discovery of the idea of dyeing parti-colored yarns 
 by immersion in the dye, but it is for an arrangement and combination 
 of machinery, as a means to be used in dyeing parti-colored yarns by 
 immersion in the dye. In order, therefore, to disprove the novelty of 
 the invention, it must be shown that these previous modes used prac- 
 tically in dyeing parti-colored yarns by immersion or otherwise, em- 
 braced within them this combination and arrangement of the ma- 
 chinery described in the patent. If it was done by modes and pro- 
 cesses not embracing this combination and arrangement, then such 
 previous use would not disprove the novelty of the plaintiffs inven- 
 tion. 10 
 
 On this point, therefore the question of novelty it will be your 
 duty to look into these old modes of parti-coloring yarn by immersion 
 or otherwise in the dye, and say whether they contain the special com- 
 bination and arrangement of the machinery described and used by the 
 plaintiff. 
 
 If you should arrive at a conclusion in favor of the plaintiff as to the 
 novelty or utility of his improvement, the next question will be as to 
 the alleged infringement by the defendant in the adoption of machin- 
 ery whereby yarn is parti-colored by immersion. That question will 
 depend upon the fact whether or not the arrangement of the machin- 
 ery used by the defendant in dyeing yarn embraces the combination 
 of the plaintiff; in other words, whether the defendant's mode and 
 machinery embodies within it the new ideas of the patentee ; whether 
 or not he has appropriated the ideas which lie at the foundation of 
 the plaintiffs improvement or discovery. 
 
 In order to constitute 11 an infringement, it is necessary that the 
 arrangement and combination of the party charged with the infringe- 
 ment should be the same to the eye, or in point of fact. If they em- 
 body the ideas of the patentee, and the machinery of the defendant 
 operates by such adoption and appropriation, then, though thearrange- 
 ment may be apparently different, in reality 12 and in judgment of law 
 an infringement exists. Hence, it will be not only proper, but essen- 
 tial, that the jury should look into the arrangement and operation of 
 the machinery used by the defendant for the purpose of ascertaining 
 
 described in liis patent. 24G, 1. 
 Jo plaintiff's invention.- 187, E. 1. 
 
 11 in order to constitute. This phrase might bo written by the advanced 
 reporter, Nerd l -Stet, the first t of constitute being omitted under 236, 3. 
 
 12 in reality. See- thes9 words, and in relation, among the phrases begin- 
 ning -with In in tho Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
KEY TO ftffi BEPOliTlNG EXEflCISES. 177 
 
 whether or not it embodies within it the principle of the patentee ; 
 whether or not its successful operation is attributable to such appro- 
 priation. If it does, then it is 13 an infringement. If it does not, then 
 there haa boeu no infringement. 
 
 It has been insisted by the learned counsel for the defend- 
 ant 1 that he does not use the reeled yarn, or rather the 
 yarns on a reel, as is done 8 by the plaintiff; and hence it is insisted 
 that in this respect the defendant's arrangement or combination of 
 machinery differs from that of the plaintiffs. It is true," however, 
 that the combination and arrangement of the machinery of the plain- 
 tiff is useless, and would not be 1 patentable without yarn to be oper- 
 ated upon in the process of dyeing ; and in order to make out- an in- 
 fringement, it must appear that the defendant not only used the com- 
 bination of the plaintiff, but that it is used for dyeing by letting down 
 and taking up the reeled yarn into .and out of the vat, and measur- 
 ing the extent of the immersion at the time. 
 
 I will state this proposition again, as it is undoubtedly important. 
 I have said that the combination and arrangement of the plaintiff's 
 machinery is useless, and would not be patentable without yarn to be 
 operated upon 7 in the dyeing process. The invention is the combina- 
 tion for the purpose of dyeing by immersion, and the machinery which 
 is employed to effectuate this process. It must therefore appear, in 
 order to constitute an infringement, that the defendant uses this com- 
 bination and arrangement for the purpose of dyeing by immersion, by 
 means of machinery which lets down the yarn into the dye ; that he 
 uses the combination of machinery which effects, or appears to effect, 
 this, and at the same time measures the extent of the dyeing. Wheth- 
 er or not the yarn to be dyed is on a reel, like the plaintiff's, is not 
 
 is then it is. See this Reader, p. 61, xvi. 
 
 \ f) 1 l>y the learned counsel for the defendant. This phrase-sign 
 44 is formed in accordance with the principle of special contraction (237 
 R. 1, b). For the is omitted under 250, 3. Seu this Reader, p. 175, note 8. 
 
 2 as is done. 245. 
 
 3 it is true. See this Header, page 152, note 12. 
 
 4 and would not be. See this Reader, 118, note 9. 
 
 6 and in order to make out. To is implied by joining, and out added 
 to the word-sign lor make (Em) by halving it. V. 61, xvi. 
 
 and taking: up the. 237, R. 1, 6. 
 
 ' to be operated upon. See this Reader, p. 103, note 4. 
 
178 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 material. If the yarn is so arranged as to be acted upon by the plain- 
 tilFs combination, and is so acted upon by the defendant's arrange- 
 ment that it may be let down into the dye and taken up, and at the 
 same time measure the extent of the immersion, then an infringement 
 exists. There would then be an embodiment of the ideas of the pat- 
 entee in the arrangement or combination of the machinery of the de- 
 fendant, and an appropriation of the improvement of the patentee. 
 Gentlemen, this branch of the case, the question of novelty, is a ques- 
 tion of fact which, under the views of the law which I have endeavored 
 to explain to you. must be examined and determined for yourselves. 
 Undoubtedly, before the plaintiff is entitled to* recover, he must have 
 established to your reasonable satisfaction that his new mode, com- 
 bination, or arrangement of machinery for the purpose of dyeing 
 parti-colored yarns, and the ideas involved and embodied in this new 
 arrangement and combination which enabled him to work out his 
 improvement as a useful one ; that these are substantially, practically 
 involved, embodied in the defendant's arrangement and operation of 
 his machinery. If you find these there, although the form may be 
 different to the eye if you find the essence of the plaintiffs arrange- 
 ment, the practice and operation of it embodied within the defendant's, 
 then, in judgment of law, there is an infringement. This is a question 
 of fact, which it is your province to determine. 
 
 The remaining question in the case is the question of damages, which 
 has been presented by the counsel for the plaintiff. Upon this ques- 
 tion the general rule is that the patentee or his assignee, in case of an 
 infringement or appropriation of his invention by another' without his 
 license, the patentee or the assignee, as the case may be, is entitled to 
 the actual damages 10 which he has sustained" by reason of this in- 
 fringement. It is often, indeed almost always, '"an exceedingly diffi- 
 
 s is entitled to. This contraction for entitled (En-Tee 1 ) is valuable. See 
 EXTITLE-D in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 9 by another. See under DHB in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 10 the actual damages, As the word damage will probably occur often in 
 this part of the charge, it may safely be contracted to Dee-Em (i.e., dam.). 
 
 n \vliich he has sustained. Here tustained is added to has by making the 
 circle triple-size nominally that is, a little larger than the Ses-circle is usually 
 made by the writer. 
 
 11 an exceedingly difficult. The word exceedingly is written in full by 
 Kays-Dee:' ingly ' (232, 5). In analogy with the word-sign for exist (Ses-Tee 2 ), the 
 Kay may be elided ; and ingJy may bo omitted under the principle of 237, R. 1, 6. 
 I prefer, however, to make at once Sdee 1 a word-sign for exceedingly. See these 
 words in the Dictionary. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 179 
 
 cult question to arrive at, upon any certain 13 or satisfactory data. 
 The theory, or the principle in respect to the damages, is that a per- 
 son who adopts, appropriates, or uses the improvement of another, 
 interferes 14 with his custom, his monopoly, or rather property (for it 
 is not a monopoly, it being the fruits of his own mind), and affects the 
 benefits which he would otherwise 15 be entitled to ; and the jury 
 should look into the case with a view to ascertain the actual damage 
 which the patentee under such circumstances has sustained. The rule 
 of law excludes any exaggerated or vindictive damage, which is some- 
 times allowed in cases of willful trespass. That rule of damage has 
 no application in this case. 
 
 In this case, one view probably to be taken upon the question of 
 damages would be this : the benefits and advantages, whatever they 
 may be, if there are any, derived in the use of the plaintiffs improve- 
 ment over the old modes practiced and in use ; and this is the useful 
 result, if any, consequent upon the new 10 invention over old modes. 
 If it can be shown that there are benefits and advantages derived by 
 the use of the new mode over the old, these are such as are to be taken 
 into consideration 17 upon the question of damages. 
 
 You have heard the testimony of the experts which has been offered. 
 I shall not go over or call attention particularly to it. Their estimates 
 and opinions arc not always reliable 1 * and very certain. But still they 
 are competent and admissible on the question of damages, and proper 
 to be taken into account by the jury in attempting to arrive at the 
 actual damages which the plaintiff has sustained. 19 This is also a ques- 
 tion of fact which belongs to the jury, and with which I do not de- 
 sire 20 to interfere. 
 
 13 upon any certain. Any is vocalized with , so that the phrase-sign may 
 not be read upon uncertain. 
 
 14 interferes. See this Reader, p. 103, noto 7. Tho words interfere-d are 
 contracted in analogy with infer-red (En-Ef 2 ) to Ent-Ef 1 . See these words in the 
 Dictionary. 
 
 l: ' which, he would otherwise. See this Reader, p. 119, note 9 ; p. 60, xiii. 
 
 10 upon the new. The is omitted under 250, 3. See NEW in the Standard- 
 Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 17 to be taken into consideration. The En-hook of taken (Ten) is omit- 
 ted to secure the advantage of phrase-writing, and into is omitted under 250, 3. 
 
 13 reliable. See this Reader, p. 101, note 5. 
 
 1D lias sustained. The circle for has, Iss 2 , is tripled to express three Esses. 
 
 20 and with which I do not desire. This speech-phrase is reduced to 
 writing, thus : and-with-which ; adding Ketoid (one of the forms for joining / to a 
 preceding word) ; then adding do not desire. 
 
180 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 ALEXANDER VON HUMBOLDT. 
 
 [An Address by Prof. Francis Lieber, at a Meeting calkd by the New- York 
 Geographical Society, held on the evening of June 2nd, 1859, in (lie Hall 
 of the New- York Historical Society. ~\ 
 
 43 
 
 ' ' TUB whole earth is the monument of illustrious men. ' ' 
 There are passages in the works of antiquity which, to 
 our ears and minds, have the sound and the depths of inspiration. 
 They impress themselves on our souls., and corresponding occasions on 
 the paths of our lives restore them to visible letters. Such seem to 
 me these words of Pericles, and such the occasion which has brought 
 us together in this place. What Pericles said, in his funeral speech, 
 of the men who had fallen, not for the defense but for the glory of 
 Athens, seems to apply in a double sense to Alexander von Humboldt. 
 Wherever death occurs or is remembered, there is solemnity ;' nor can 
 we 2 wholly free ourselves even from mourning' when a revered man has 
 left us, however full his measure of a f.vvnred life may have been. 3 He 
 lived so long and so large a life that generations over the whole globe 
 had grown up familiar with his name, and we were so accustomed to it 
 that our very intellects feel a degree of discomfort at presenting to our 
 minds the world henceforth as existing without him. Yet it is one of 
 the noblest delights for those who reflect and love to be grateful, to 
 trace the chief components of the monument of illustrious men to 
 their authors to find whence came the discoveries, inventions, con- 
 ceptions, institutions, and endeavors of ages in the field of culture, 
 freedom, and truth. Who has not enjoyed the pleasure of finding the 
 spots on the chart of human progress, where you put down your 
 finger and say : Here is Aristotle, here are the Waldenses, here the 
 causes and the effects of the University and of tracing the lines of 
 civilization in different directions from point to point?* And this de- 
 light we may enjoy when meditating on the period of which Humboldt 
 
 . _ i solemnity. Sjc tins Reader, p. 135, note C, 2. 
 - nor can we. P. 1G9, R. 12, 6. 
 
 3 may have l>ecn. Erah being used as a word-sign for may be 'en is writ- 
 ton by adding the En-book, have beiug omitted and to be supplied. 240 ; 250, 3. 
 The best Old expression of this phrase was Em--Vec-Ben ; i.e., the New expres- 
 sion is more than three times as fast as the Old. 
 
 4 from point to point. 250, 3, example From to. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 181 
 
 was one of the most distinct exponents we may enjoy it even now, 
 although he has left us but yesterday ; for God allowed to him days so 
 long that he passed into 5 history before he passed away from among 
 us. Many of my young friends have asked me as their teacher, and, 
 indeed, many other friends have repeated the question, as I conversed 
 with them on that news which on its arrival attracted more interest 
 than the advice of the threatening contest on the plains of Italy "Was 
 he not the greatest man of the century ? I do not believe it fit for 
 man to seat himself on the bench in the chancery 6 of humanity, and 
 there to pronotmce this one or that one the greatest man. How many 
 men have been called the greatest ! But if it is an attribute of great- 
 ness to impress an indelible stamp on aa entire movement of the col- 
 lective mind of a race ; if greatness, 
 
 in part, 1 consists in devising that which is good, large, 
 and noble, and in pcrscveringly executing it by means 
 which, in the hands of others, wonld have been insufficient, and 
 against obstacles which would have been insurmountable to others ; 
 if the daring solitude of thought and loyal adhesion to its own royal- 
 ty is a constituent of greatness ; if rare and varied gifts, such as mark 
 distinction when singly granted, showered by Providence on one manj 
 if modest amenity gracing these gifts, and encouraging kindliness tcr 
 every one of every nation that proved earnest in his pursuit wheth- 
 er he had chosen nature or society, the hieroglyphics or the liberty of 
 America, the sea and the winds, or the languages, astronomy, or in- 
 dustry y the canal or prison discipline, geography, or Plato ; if, in ad- 
 dition, an organizing mind a power of evoking activity in the sins'. 
 gih --and sagacity and tmbrokcn industry through a life lengthened 
 far beyond that which the psalmist ascribes to a long human existence ; 
 
 ' that he passed into. A t is omitted here for the sake of phrase- writing 
 (236, 3), as also in the subsequent phrases before he passed away; great-cst man. 
 
 c in the chancery- See CHANCEKT In the Standard-Phonographic Dic- 
 tionary. 
 
 ji 'in part. 24C, 1. Tho Old form for part was Pee-Eet ; bttt the best 
 
 Tr'l form both alone and in phrase-writing is Pret. It also is the best form 
 
 for part in the following words: compartment, 'com ':Pret-Ment ; depart-ed, rs, 
 
 Dee-Pret ; department, Dee-Pret-(Ment) ; impart, Em-Prct, Bco In parlictUar and 
 
 In part in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
182 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER, 
 
 if a good fame, encircling the globe on its own pinions, and not car- 
 ried along by later bistory if these make up or prove greatness, then 
 indeed we may sa)', without presumption, that our age has been grac- 
 ed by one of the greatest men so favored an exemplar of humanity 
 that he would cease to be an example for \is had he not manifested 
 through his whole life of ninety years that unceasing labor, unvary- 
 ing love of truth and advancement, and that kindness to his fellow- 
 beings, which are duties, and in which every one of us ought to strive 
 to imitate him. What an amount of thinking, observing, writing, 
 traveling, and discovering he has performed, from that juvenile essay 
 of his on the textile fabrics of the ancients, to the last line of his 
 "Cosmos," which reminds us of Copernicus reading the last proof- 
 sheet on his death-bed, 2 shortly before his departure; or of Mozart, 
 who directed with dying looks the singing of a portion of his requiem, 
 which he had in part composed on his death-bed ! Let us one and all, 
 young and old, symbolize by his name the fact that, however untrue 
 assuredly the saying is that genius is labor, it is true that the neces- 
 sary factor or coefficient of genius and of any talent is incessant dili- 
 gence. We are ordained not only to eat the bread of our mouth in 
 the sweat of our brow, but to earn in the same way the nourishing 
 bread of the mind. This is no world of trifling, and Humboldt, like 
 the Greeks, whose intellectuality he loved to honor whose Socrates 
 loved to say, Arduous are all noble things was a hard-working man, 
 far harder working than most of those who arrogate the name to 
 themselves. He ceased to work, and to work hard, only when he 
 laid himself down on that couch from which he never rose again. It 
 is not considered inappropriate, I believe, on occasions like this, to 
 give distinctness to the picture by stating personal observations. Al- 
 low me, then, to relate a very simple, yet n, characteristic fact. I vis- 
 ited Humboldt at Potsdam, in the year 
 
 45 
 
 1844, when he had reached, therefore, the age of 75 ; for 
 yoxi know that he was born in that memorable year of 
 17G9, in which Cuvier was born, and Wellington, and Chateaubriand. 1 
 and Napoleon, and Canning, and Walter Scott, and Mackintosh just 
 
 2 on liis tleatli-bed. 25. 
 
 j K i Chateaubriand. This name is pronounced Shatobrio,- (.) indicat- 
 40 ing the nasalization of the preceding vowel. It might have been writ- 
 ten Chet-BrenU, as though pronounced Chatobriand. See this Header, p. 98, 
 note 10. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 183 
 
 ten years after Schiller 3 just twenty after Goethe. 3 Humboldt told me 
 at that time that he was engaged on a work which he intended to call 
 Cosmos; that he was ohliged chiefly to write at night, for in the morn- 
 ing he studied and arranged materials, and in the evening he was 
 ohliged to he with the king from 9 o'clock to about 11. After his 
 return from the king he was engaged in writing until one or two 
 o'clock. 4 Humboldt, when in Berlin or Potsdam, was retained if 
 we may use a professional term to join the evening circle of the king 
 for the indicated hours. It was all, I believe, he was expected actu- 
 ally to perform in return for the titles, honors, and revenue which 
 he was enjoying, except that the monarch sometimes selected him as 
 a companion for his journeys. Humboldt described to me the char- 
 acter of these royal evening reunions. Everything of interest, as the 
 day brought it to notice, was there discussed. The drawing of a beau- 
 tiful live oak near Charleston, which a fair friend had made for me, 
 was taken by Humboldt to that circle, where it attracted so much at- 
 tention that he begged me to leave it ; and he told me that the vol- 
 ume describing our aqueduct, which my friend the author now the 
 president of our college had given me at the time of its publication, 
 and which I had then sent him, had furnished the topic of discussion 
 for an entire week. "We collected," he said, "all possible works 
 on ancient and modern aqueducts, and compared, discussed, and ap- 
 plied for many successive evenings." Is there, then, a royal road to 
 knowledge, after all, when a Humboldt can be retained? May I ex- 
 tend your supposed permission of giving personal anecdotes, provided 
 they are of a sufficiently biographical character, such as Plutarch, 
 perhaps, would not have disdained to record ? I desire to show what 
 interest he took in everything connected with progress. I have rea- 
 son to believe that it was chiefly owing to him that the King of Prus- 
 sia offered to me, not long after my visit, a chair to be created in the 
 
 2 Schiller. Pronoimced Shel-cr. This does not violate the rule of 101,6; 
 for this is not Shel, but Shier. Moreover, that is a rule of safety for the inexperi- 
 enced writer, but not necessarily to be observed by the reporter, who, able to 
 command his pen or pencil, can as surely distinguish by difference of inclination 
 between Shel and Shen when standing alone as between Chay and Ray, Shel be- 
 ing written more inclined than Shen. This liberty becomes safer in the case of 
 Shier, for there is no separate outline Ish-shon to conflict with. It is also sal'er 
 in case of Sheldher, because in the case of double-lengths the distinction of in- 
 clination is very easy. 207, R. 6. 
 
 3 Goetlie. The sound of the German oe or 6 (da, as a German calls if) is tho 
 sound of the vowel in first, erst, earth. For its Standard -Phonographic sign, see 
 Compendium, p. 206, 24, Nos. 31 and 32. Goethe =Gce-te. 
 
 4 one or two o'clock. 250, 3. See this Reader, p. 79, note 3. 
 
SECOND STANr>AttD-l>HONOGnAl>niC 
 
 tmiversity of Berlin, exclusively dedicated to the Science and Art of* 
 Punishment, or to Fcenology. I had conversed with the monarch on 
 the superiority of solitary confinement at labor over all the other 
 prison systems, when he concluded our interview with these words : 
 "I wish you would convince Mr. von Humboldt of your views. He 
 is rather opposed to them. I shall let him know that you will see 
 him." Humboldt and prison discipline sounded strange to my ears. 
 I went, and found that he loved truth better than his own opinion or 
 bias ; and my suggestion that so comprehensive a university as that 
 of Berlin, our common native city, ought to be honored with having 
 the first chair of Posnology (for which it was high time to carve out 
 a distinct branch, treating of the convict in all his phases after the 
 act of conviction), was seized upon at once by his liberal mind. He 
 soon carried the Minister of Justice along with him, and the offer to 
 which I have alluded was the consequence. On the other hand, a 
 friend, whose name is, perhaps, more interwoven with the history of 
 our canal than that of any other citizen, except Clinton, informs me 
 that ho had the pleasure of sitting by the side of Humboldt at a royal 
 dinner at Charlottsburg. During the whole time, they were engaged 
 in conversing almost exclusively on our great canal, and that greater 
 one which ought to unite in everlasting wedlock the 
 
 46 
 
 sturdy Atlantic and the teeming Pacific, having now 
 yearned for one another for centuries. Humboldt spoke 
 with a knowledge of details and a sagacious discernment which were 
 surprising to my friend, well versed in all the details of these topics. 
 Although it has been stated 1 by high authority that the works of 
 Humboldt show to every one who can "read between the lines/' an 
 endeavor to present nature in her totality, unconnected with 2 man, 
 I cannot otherwise than state here that, on the contrary, it has ever 
 appeared to me that this great man, studying nature in her details, 
 and becoming what Bacon calls her interpreting priest, elevates him- 
 self to those heights whence he can take a comprehensive view of her 
 in connection with 3 man and the movements of society, with lan- 
 guage, economy, and exchange, institutions, and architecture, which 
 is to man almost like the nidifying instinct to the bird. Humboldt' s 
 tendency in this respect seems to me in its sphere wholly dissimilar 
 
 j ft i although it has been stated, P. 169, E. 12. Bee this Keacfer, p. 
 40 Cl.xvi. 
 
 2 unconnected with. 250, 3, and example With. 
 
 3 in connection With. 250, 3, and example With. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 185 
 
 to the view which his friend Hitter takes of geography in connection 
 with history. Humboldt, it would seem, could hardly be expected to 
 stand in a different relation to the natural sciences. He was, with all 
 his erudition and the grandeur of his knowledge, eminently a social 4 
 man. I have found a passage in a paper written by a diplomatist and 
 highly cultivated writer, Yarnhagen von Ense, 5 which, I feel sure, 
 will be listened to with interest. Yon Ense describes his sojourn in 
 Paris in 1810, and says : 
 
 ' ' In the salons of Metternich (at that time Austrian Ambassador 
 near the Court of St. Cloud) I saw Humboldt only as a brilliant and 
 admired meteor so much so, that I hardly found time to present my- 
 self to him, and to whisper into his ear a few of those names which 
 gave me a right to a personal acquaintance with him. Rarely has a 
 man enjoyed in such a degree the esteem of all, the admiration of the 
 most opposite parties, and the zeal of all in power to serve him. Na- 
 poleon does not love him. He knows Humboldt as a shrewd thinker, 
 whose way of thinking and whose opinion cannot be bent ; but the 
 Emperor and his Court, and the high authorities in the state, have 
 never denied the impression which they received by the presence of 
 this bold traveler, by the power of knowledge, and the light which 
 seems to stream from it in every direction. The learned of all nations 
 are proud of their high associate, all the Germans of their country- 
 man, and all the liberals of their fellow." ~ "It has been 
 rarely vouchsafe!, " continues Yon Ense, "to a man in such degree as 
 to Humboldt, to stand forth in individual independence and always 
 equal to himself, and at one and the same time, in scientific activity 
 and in the widest social 7 and international intercourse, in the solitude 
 of minute inquiry, and in the almost confusing brilliancy of the soci- 
 ety of the day ; but I know of no one who, with all this, has endeav- 
 ored throughout his whole life to promote the progress and welfare of 
 our race so steadily, uniformly, and with such ample success." 
 
 So far Von Ense. This picture is, doubtless, true ; but we ought 
 not to recall it to our memory without remembering at the same time 
 
 * a social. The rule of 161, B, is conformed to here, for She! does i.r>t Btand 
 alone. ; but the word social may be written by the reporter Iss-Shel even when 
 alone, if he is particular to write the Shel more inclined thau Shen would natu- 
 rally be. See this Reader, p. 183, note 2. 
 
 8 Varnhagen von Ense. Pronounced Fiirnha-gen fon En-se. 
 
 6 Metternich. Pronounced Met-ernio. For the Standard-Phonographic 
 sign for the sound o, see the- Compendium, p. 20G, 24, No. 06. As to the soond, 
 see p. '210, 25, No. 60. 
 
 7 social. See this Reader, p, 183, note 2, and p. 185, note 4. 
 
18G SECOND STASDAKD-PHOXOGnATHIC EEADEB. 
 
 one of his most prominent characteristics his simplicity and amenity, 
 K '> i:;lierent in him that they M*crc never dimmed, so f:-.r as I know, by 
 the luster of his talents or energy of his thought. The most perfect 
 
 47 
 
 of social refinement which I have to this day in my mind, 
 is an early evening party at the villa of William A^UII 
 Ilumboldt, near the Lake Tegel. Nature has not done much for that 
 spot, hut refined simplicity, courtesy, and taste, easy interchange of 
 thought and experience, men of name and women of attractive ele- 
 gance and high acquirements, young and old, travelers, courtier:;, 
 soldiers, and students, music, works of art, with green lawns, shrub- 
 bery, and winding paths along smooth water and waving fields, are 
 components of that scene in the midst of which the 1 two illustrious 
 Ilximboldts moved and delighted others as much as they seemed to 
 be gratified, 2 giving and receiving as all the others did, 3 never conde- 
 scending, never indicating a consciousness that they encouraged the 
 timid, but showing how gladly they received additional knowledge 
 from every one. There are men here around me, of honored names 
 in those sciences which Ilumboldt cultivated more especially as his 
 own. 4 I hope they will indicate to us how he infused a new spirit 
 into them how he immeasurably extended them, how he added dis- 
 coveries and original conceptions ; but I, though allowed to worship 
 these sciences in the peristyle only, and not as a consecrated 3 priest, 
 crave permission to say a few words even on this topic. Some fifteen 
 years ago, Ilumboldt presided over the annual meeting of naturalists, 
 then held at Berlin. In his opening speech he chiefly discoursed of 
 the merits of Linnaeus. He knew of Linnaeus as Herodotus knew of 
 Salamis and Thermopylae ; for, the life of the great Swede overlapped 
 by some ten years that of Humboldt, and all he there said of Linnaeus 
 seems to me to apply to himself with far greater force, and on an en- 
 larged scale. In that speech, too, I remember he quoted his friend 
 Schiller. Humboldt was, in a marked manner, of a poetic tempera- 
 
 i in tho midst of which the. 23G, 3. The t of midst is elided, in 
 accordance with 236, 3, and (if is implied by joining. 
 
 - soemed to be gratified. Seem is written hero instead of the past fense, 
 bf, is added by -widening, and to is omitted. See this Header, p. 82, note 11. 
 
 3 as all the others did. See DHE in the Standard-Phonographic Dic- 
 tionary. 
 
 ' as his own. P. 182, R. 4. 
 
 5 as a consecrated. P. 112, K. 7, 6. 
 
 i <j 
 4: ( 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 187 
 
 meat. I do not believe that without it he would have been able to 
 receive 1 those living impressions of nature, and to combine what was 
 singly received, in those vivid descriptions so true and transparent 
 that they surprise the visitor of the scenes to this day. He had that 
 constructive imagination I do not speak now of inventive fancy 
 without which no man can be great in any branch, whether it belong 
 to nature or to history. But yesterday an officer of our navy, 7 whose 
 profession has made him well acquainted with South America, by sea 
 and land, with the Andes one of the monuments of our illustrious 
 man 8 told me that he knew of no descriptions, or rather characteris- 
 tics, so true to living reality as "Humboldt's Views of Nature," which 
 he had perused and enjoyed on the spot. The power of collocation 
 and shrewdness of connection, the knowledge of detail and the ab- 
 sence of a desire to perceive things according to a system, the thirst 
 for a knowledge of the life of nature, and the constant wish to make 
 all of us share in the treasures of his knowledge his lucid style, 
 which may raise his ' ' Cosmos " to a German classic these seem to me 
 to characterize Humboldt in his studies of nature, besides all that 
 which he has done as a professional naturalist. Humboldt's name 
 and life may be termed, with strict propriety of language, interna- 
 tional. He read and spoke English and Italian. He spoke and wrote 
 Spanish with care and correctness, and French almost as well as 9 Ger- 
 man. He lived for entire periods of many years in Paris, and counted 
 many French among his best friends, 10 yet not at the expense of pa- 
 triotism. In that very speech at Berlin, 
 
 A O which has been mentioned, 1 he dwells with pleasure on 
 jbO the penetrating effect which the German mind has exer- 
 
 he would have been able to receive. See Compendium, 249 ; p. 1G9, 
 R. 12 and R. 14. 
 
 ' of our navy. 25. 
 
 of onr illustrious man. Man is vocalized here, BO that it shall not be 
 read men, though a critical reporter would not need such aid for the correct read, 
 ing of the phrase-sign. 
 
 9 almost as well as. The t of almost is omitted under 236, 3, as is added 
 by enlarging the circle, and the hook of well is omitted, for the sake of phrase, 
 writing. 
 
 1 among his best friends. 230, 3 ; 164. 
 
 48 
 
 i which has been mentioned. P. 169, R. 12. 
 
188 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 cised on all the physical sciences, no less than in the mental branches. 
 Humboldt was a dweller in kingly palaces a courtier, if you choose, 2 
 and the son of a courtier without a taint of servile flattery or of sub- 
 mission. He was rather the honored guest of royalty. He loved lib- 
 erty, and considered it a necessary element of our civilization. He 
 was a sincere friend of substantial, institutional freedom. His mind 
 often traveled to this country ; and that he loved America, sometimes 
 with sadness, is sufficiently 3 shown, were it not otherwise well known, 
 by the singular love which the Americans bore him. To me that lit- 
 tle piece of news was inexpressibly touching, which simply informed 
 us that our Minister in Berlin, with the Americans now present at 
 that city a cluster of mourners from afar formed part of his funeral 
 procession the only foreign nation thus represented. In his simplic- 
 ity and genial warmth he did what many a bold man would have 
 hesitated to do. I was present as a young and distant listener, when 
 at Rome, immediately after the Congress of Verona, the King oi 
 Prussia, Humboldt, and Niebuhr, conversed on the affairs of the day, 
 and when the last-mentioned 4 spoke in no flattering terms of the po- 
 litical views and antecedents of Arago, who, it is well known, was a 
 very advanced republican of the Gallican school, an uncompromising 
 French democrat. Frederick William the Third simply abominated 
 republicanism, yet when Niebuhr had finished, Humboldt said, with 
 a sweetness which I vividly remember, "Still this monster is the 
 dearest friend I have in France." Humboldt had all his brother's 
 views of the necessity of the highest university education, and he 
 gave impulse to many a scientific, historical, or ethnological expedi- 
 tion, fitted out even by foreign governments, for he was considered 
 the counselor of all. But I cannot dwell 5 here any longer on his ver- 
 satility and manifold aptitude. It is proved by the literature of al- 
 most every branch. If we read "Barth on Central Africa," we find 
 Humboldt ; if we read Say's "Political Economy," we find his name ; 
 if we study the history of the Nineteenth Century, we find his name 
 in the diplomacy of Prussia and France ; if we read general literature, 
 we find his name in connection with Schiller and Madame dc Stacl , 
 if we look at modern maps, we find his isothermal lines ; if we con- 
 
 2 if you choose. P. 1G7, R. 2. 
 s is sufficiently. P. 182, R. 4. 
 
 4 last-mentioned. 236, 3. 
 
 5 but I cannot dwell. 7 is omitted hero under 250, 3, for tho sake of plirase- 
 writing. See the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary under /. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 189 
 
 suit Grim's Dictionary of the German Language, we find Humboldt 
 as authority. That period has arrived to which Croesus alluded in 
 the memorable exclamation, "Oh, Solon, Solon, Solon! " and we are 
 now allowed to say Humboldt was one of the most gifted, most fortu- 
 nate, and most favored mortals favored even with comeliness, with 
 a brow so exquisitely formed that, irrespective of its being the symbol 
 of lofty thought, is pleasant to look upon in his busts, as a mere beau- 
 tiful thing favored even in his name, so easily pronounced by all 
 nations which were destined to pronounce it. When we pray not 
 only for the kindly fruits of the earth, but also, as we ought to do, 
 for the kindly fruits of the mind, let us always gratefully remember 
 that He who gives all blessed things has given to our age and to all 
 posterity such a man as Humboldt. 
 
190 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC HEADER. 
 
 EXHIBIT 
 
 OF 
 
 GENEALOGY OF STANDARD PHONOGRAPHY. 
 
 STANDARD PHONOGRAPHY " The best system of modern Short- 
 hand Writing"- consists: 
 
 1. Of New Principles, Rules, Combinations, Devices, Contractions, 
 
 Word-Signs, and Phrase-Signs, originated by the Author oi 
 this EXHIBIT. (For a statement of many of these Improve- 
 ments, see pages 389-91 of Vol. II. of the Standard- Phonographic 
 Visitor.) 
 
 2. Of, as a Basis, the Ninth Edition of the Old Phonography, as 
 
 amended by the Author of this EXHIBIT 
 
 THE NINTH EDITION, published in 1852, being an improvement, 
 by different Phonographers, upon 
 
 THE EIGHTH EDITION, published in 1847 an improvement, by dif- 
 ferent Phonographers, upon 
 
 THE SEVENTH EDITION, published in 1845 an improvement, by 
 different Phonographers, upon 
 
 THE SIXTH EDITION, published in 1844 an improvement, by dif- 
 ferent Phonographers, upon 
 
 THE FIFTH EDITION, published in 1842 an improvement, by dif- 
 ferent Phonographers, upon 
 
 THE FOURTH EDITION, published in 1841 an improvement, by dif- 
 ferent Phonographers, upon 
 
 THE THIRD EDITION, published in December, 1840 an improve- 
 ment, by different Phonographers, upon 
 
 THE SECOND EDITION, published in July, 1840 an improvement, 
 by different Phonographers, upon 
 
 THE FIRST EDITION, or STENOGRAPHIC SOUND-HAND, published in 
 1837 an improvement (by Isaac Pitman and S. A. Good, it 
 is supposed) upon 
 
 HARDING' s STENOGRAPHY, published in 1823 an improvement 
 upon 
 
 TAYLOR'S STENOGRAPHY, published in 1786 which was an improve' 
 ment upon various systems of Shorthand preceding. 
 
EXHIBIT OF ENLARGING BRIEF S, W, AND Y. 191 
 
 EXHIBIT 
 
 OF 
 
 ENLARGING BRIEF S, W, AND Y. 
 
 A phonographic student wished some means of fixing in 
 the memory the Enlarged Brief Way and Yay signs. In 
 the STUDENT'S JOURNAL for April, 1886, Whole Number 172, 
 there was given the following : 
 
 Answer: Preliminarily, observe, that, by the enlarging of Iss you 
 double the s, as in writing Ses 1 , is as ; Ses z , as is. In seeking some 
 quicker mode than the Old Phonography furnished, for writing such 
 phrases as we would, with you, you were, it occurred to us to follow out 
 the analogy of doubling the Iss ; thus: Way weh> [we enlarged], we 
 were, we would; Wehweh 1 [with enlarged], with what; Wuhwuh 1 
 [what enlarged], what we-re ; Wuhwuh* [would enlarged] would we. 
 Then why not enlarge the brief Yay to double the y ? Because we 
 found that such use would be of very little value. It seemed desira- 
 ble, as we added the auxiliaries were and would to the pronouns we and 
 what, to add them to the pronouns ye and you. So we arrived at this 
 plan: Yay well 1 [ye enlarged] , ye were, you would; Yehweh 2 [yet en- 
 larged], yet were, yon were; Yuhwuh 2 [you enlarged], you would; 
 Yuhwuh 1 [beyond enlarged], beyond what. There still remained, as 
 troublesome in Old-Phonographic ways, such phrases as with you 
 [Weh 1 Yuh 2 ], were you [Well' 2 Yuh 2 ], what you [Wuh 1 Yuh 2 ], would you 
 [Wuh 2 Yuh 2 ] . As we had already decided as best to double the w 
 brief signs to add w, it occurred to us to incline the brief iv to add a 
 y; thus, we yet, TFayyeh 1 ; with you, Wehyeh 1 ; were you (or yet), 
 Wehyeh 2 ; what you (or yet), Wuhyuh 1 ; would you (or yet), Wuh- 
 yuh 2 . As to FORM of the enlarged brief w and y signs, it should be 
 observed that, as the brief w and y signs are like small hooks of Kel, 
 Ken, Tef, Ter, so the enlarged signs are like the large hooks of Kler, 
 Kayshon, etc., or, rather, like unclosed Ster loops. See illustrations 
 in the stereographic cut below. In considering the advantage of 
 these enlarged w and y signs, it should be observed that such signs as 
 for we yet, would you, etc., lay the foundation for many derivative 
 phrase-signs which are very useful ; as, for we would have, Waywehf ; 
 what we have, Wuhwuhf 1 ; you would have, YuhwuhR 
 
192 SECOND STANDAKD-PIIONOGRAPHIO HEADER. 
 
 ____ is, his, ___ is as; o as, O asis, as has 
 
 uue , we. were, iue would j with, with uiHo.r . ( c were 
 C "Jre lye , were, what; lohat, tyha.t we-re, what juould -, 
 
 o ujould, O ujoulSj^e, u>oui<J ujWt. 
 
 c O c .:, O 
 
 lue, uie i^et ^ with, ujitn v^ou 1 , c. ujere , d uJere^ou, 
 
 were i^e-t -, * luhal, ujhatijou., tuWt ije-f; o tu , O u) 1 * IJOU^OT tje ij 
 i^e ye were /or would]-, u tjet , U yet LUC-TC ( you. 
 oij o you, O you were /' tuouldj; beyond, be^onj- 
 
 were 
 
 I <" <^s> <; 
 
 c x> J ; = = < 
 
 C Z>3C > \' P'l 
 
 c v. J V. , C; * \ ' > 
 
 ^ , V^ -, j> , V J I ; ^ .-X. 
 
 O 3 I 
 
 ^ ', Q > ^ ', O- c . V. ; 
 " c >. \ -, ^ - ^ -, a , c 
 \ r\ ^ , ^ c N. N ', Cjonc)' j-rj-.o ^_t^ 
 
CHART OF CONTENTS. 193 
 
 CHART OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 
 A. ENGRAVED EXEBCISES 1-48 
 
 ANCIENT AND MODERN PHILOSOPHY 3 
 
 LOGIC 4 
 
 GEOLOGY 5 
 
 EVIDENCES OF THE CIRCULATION OF THE BLOOD 6 
 
 RELIGION AND SCIENCE 8 
 
 CREATION 11 
 
 THE AGE OF THE HUMAN RACE 13 
 
 THE INFALLIBILITY OF THE CHURCH 15 
 
 AUDI ALTEHAM PAETEM 17 
 
 THE AMERICAN BIBLE SOCIETY 23 
 
 POLITICS 28-38 
 
 GAULDEN'S PRO-SLAVERY SPEECH 28 
 
 No LAW FOR SLAVERY Gerrit Smith's Anti-Slavery Speech 30 
 
 LAW REPORTING 39-13 
 
 TESTIMONY 39 
 
 CHARGE TO THE JURY 40 
 
 ALEXANDER VON HUMBOLDT Prof. Lieber's Eulogium 43 
 
 B. PREFACE 49-52 
 
 C. INTRODUCTION 53-68 
 
 1. PHONOGRAPHIC NOMENCLATURE 53 
 
 2. KEY TO THE PRONUNCIATION 56 
 
 3. EXAMPLES OF PHONOGRA PHIC DESCRIPTION 50 
 
 4. EXHIBIT OF REPORTING-STYLE POSITION 63 
 
 5. POSITION OF WORDS IN THE DICTIONARY 65 
 
 C. EXHIBIT OF PHONOGRAPHIC PHRASE-WRITING 66 
 
 7. PHRASE SIGN POSITION 68 
 
 8. WORD-DISTINCTIONS 68 
 
 D. KEY TO THE ENGRAVING 69-189 
 
 With a great body of Instruction in the form of Notes. 
 
 E. EXHIBIT OF GENEALOGY OF STANDARD PHONOGRAPHY 190 
 
 EXHIBIT OF ENLARGING BRIEF S, W, AND Y , 191 
 
 F. INDEXES. 1. OF INTRODUCTION AND NOTES... 194 
 
 2. OF EXERCISES AND KEY 000 
 
194 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 INDEX OF THE NOTES. 
 
 A. 
 
 A-n, joining of page 03, note 15. 
 
 A-n-d, tick value of 72, n. 22. 
 
 A supplied after o/aud to 71, n. 15 and 17. 
 
 A law the Constitution 147, n. 1. 
 
 A man becomes 143, n. 8. 
 
 A rock sharpening angles 117, u. 3. 
 
 A scholar . . .' 113, n. 6. 
 
 Above all 159, n. 26. 
 
 Above our 159, n. 26. 
 
 Accessible 126, n. 7. 
 
 Accom objection to heavy dot for, answered 77, n. 4. 
 
 According 72, n. 23. 
 
 According to 120, n. 2. 
 
 According to all this testimony 120, n. 2. 
 
 Actor formative of, sometimes omitted 139, n. 21. 
 
 Actor sometimes represented by the verb 81, u. '2. 
 
 Actor the 144, n. 1C,. 
 
 Adapted to receive [and] hold the 174, n. 2. 
 
 Add another 137, n. 16. 
 
 Admits that 161, n. 8. 
 
 Affinity 135, n. 6. 
 
 Affixes omitted 145, n. 17 ; 177, n. 6. 
 
 African slave-trade man 137, n. 3. 
 
 Against it 164, n. 5. 
 
 Against the 85, n. 2. 
 
 Against you 118, n. 8. 
 
 Age of the human race 99, n. 12. 
 
 Ah! Oh! O! 87, n. 6. 
 
 All added by a hook, advantage of 72, n. 26 ; 78, n. 16 ; 110, n. 10 ; 159, u. 20. 
 
 All or will added by a hook, or by enlarging an Ar-hook 60, xiv. 
 
 Alldhr 186, n. 3. 
 
 All things 89, n . 7. 
 
 Almost as well as 187, n. 9. 
 
 Although it has been stated 184, n. 1. 
 
 American Bible Society, report of 121, n. 4. 
 
 American Bible Society 122, n. 0. 
 
 American Colonies 159, n. 22. 
 
 American people 122, n. 4 ; 158, n. 2. 
 
 American slavery, special contraction for 151, u. 7. 
 
INDEX OF THE NOTES. 195 
 
 Amiens, written as a French word ( < . i i m ....... .98, n. 10. 
 
 Among his best friends 187, n. 10. 
 
 Among others 135, n. 5. 
 
 Among them the 125, n. 4. 
 
 Analogous contractions for analogous words 78, n. 15 ; 153, n. 16. 
 
 Ancieut 70, 11. 4. 
 
 Ancient and modern philosophy compared 3-4 ; 69-74. 
 
 AndAuA Or distinguished . , 126, n. 5; 162, n. 17. 
 
 And bad 122, n. 1. 
 
 A-n-d before Kay' etc 118, n. 5. 
 
 And behold I am with you 110, n. 14. 
 
 And best interests 121, n. 7. 
 
 A-n-d tick prefixed to Skier Ill, n. 6. 
 
 And com-, etc 102, n. 11. 
 
 And false ones 122, n. 2. 
 
 And I tell you that 129, n. 8. 
 
 And when joined by Tetoid 123, n. 13. 
 
 And, how joined to Fel, Thel, etc 122, n. 2. 
 
 And joined by horizontal or perpendicular tick 70, n. 7. 
 
 And in order to make out 177, n. 5. 
 
 And none others 144, n. If. 
 
 Aiid obedience 147, n. 7. 
 
 And omitted 174, n. 2. 
 
 And (&) 152, n. 12. 
 
 And perpendicular, how distinguished from Or 81, n. I. 
 
 And prefixed to fourth-position to feel 134, n. 3; 134, n. 8. 
 
 And read it 131, n. 2. 
 
 And redeemed 126, n. 5. 
 
 And secularism 123, n. 13. 
 
 And so forth 152, n. 12. 
 
 Aud taking up the 177, n. 6. 
 
 And (Tetoid) distinguished from Or (Tetoid) 162, n. 17. 
 
 And the first 159, n. 23. 
 
 And the occurring medially 75, n. 7. 
 
 And the, how it may be disposed of by the practiced reporter 159, n. 23. 
 
 And the old States 156, n. 8. 
 
 And the world 118, n. 4. 
 
 And they others again .' 112, n. 3. 
 
 And the nature of whose connection 91, n. 12. 
 
 And there should be other means 129, n. 4. 
 
 And to feel that 134, n. 3. 
 
 And to oblige 100, n. 15. 
 
 And to some extent 134, n. 9; 156, n. 12. 
 
 And [to] work 85, n. 4. 
 
 And what 127, n, 13. 
 
 And what do not die 141, n. 7. 
 
 And what is 154, n. 1. 
 
 And which they were 158, n. 15. 
 
 And while it does not controvert the 125, n. 19. 
 
 And with which I do not desire 179, n. 20. 
 
 And would not be 177, n. 4. 
 
 Angles, sharpening of 117, n. 3. 
 
196 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Answer. No, sir 170, n. 1. 
 
 Anything and Nothing distinguished 137, n. 16. 
 
 [Applause] , 137, n. 4. 
 
 Applause and laughter 141, u. 6. 
 
 Are added by Ar-liook or by enlarging a small El-hook 61, xv. ; 77, n. 8. 
 
 Ar-hook implied 130, u. 20. 
 
 Ar-hook enlarged to add 1 59, ix. 
 
 Ar-hook implied in Dhees-Ger, etc '. 124, n. 15. 
 
 Are, sometimes Ray in phrase-writing 161, u. 2. 
 
 Are, were, or our added by hook 61, xv. 
 
 Around, etc., added by its briefest consonant expression 128, n. 16. 
 
 Articles generally omitted when impediments 85, n. 1. 
 
 As a cousccrated 186, n. 5. 
 
 As all the others did 186, n. 3. 
 
 As his own 186, n. 4. 
 
 As is done 177, n. 2. 
 
 As long as I bold 110, n. 13. 
 
 As prefixed to fourth-position words occasionally '. 125, n. 29. 
 
 As ours as adapted 87, n. 3. 
 
 As the same 133, n. 5. 
 
 As there is 119. n. 10. 
 
 As to and as to the distinguished 100, n. 3. 
 
 As toils, etc 90, n. 2. 
 
 As to whether the 125, n. 20. 
 
 As we have seen 103, n. 1. 
 
 As with a 162, n. 14. 
 
 Artificial 115, n. 5. 
 
 At any rate 98, n. 5. 
 
 At first 114, n. 3. 
 
 At added by shortening 61, xvi.; 73, n. 29. 
 
 At Charleston 136, n. 10. 
 
 At least distinguished from at last 78. n. 2. 
 
 At length, i.e., at ten', Tien' 102, n. 10. 
 
 At nearly the same time 156, n. 11; 
 
 At the North 143, n. 9. 
 
 At this stage 158, n. 1. 
 
 Attentively : 80, n. 5. 
 
 Audi alteram partem 104, n. 11. 
 
 Aye 137, n. 2. 
 
 B. 
 
 Baconian philosophy 73, n. 33. 
 
 Base[d] upon 122, n. 3. 
 
 Beautiful traits of character 143, n. 2. 
 
 Be added to may 82, n. 8. 
 
 Bee for -ble occasionally 101 , n . 5 . 
 
 Re added to Inm 82, n. IV: 
 
 Been dhr and Be dhr 79, n. 20. 
 
 Before he ventured to speak of it 82, n. 0. 
 
 Before and its word-sign 75, n. 10. 
 
 Before you 136, n . 11. 
 
INDEX Of THE NOTES. 197 
 
 Being i51, u . 4. 
 
 Believeth not llfi. n . 8. 
 
 Below it 80, n. 5. 
 
 Beneficent Creator 102, n. 16. 
 
 Beneficial 160, 11 . . 
 
 Benefits of reporting studies and practice 149, n. 11. 
 
 Benjamin Franklin 162, n. 18. 
 
 Better than 158, n . 8. 
 
 Between two descriptions 149, n . 11 . 
 
 Beyond a lew years 151, u . g . 
 
 Binds the 166, n. 7. 
 
 Black man 152, n. 13. 
 
 Black Republicans 142, n. 10. 
 
 Blacks 148, n. 8. 
 
 -I3Ie sometimes written by Bee when Bel would be used in the cs 140, n. 4. 
 
 Bloodhound 165, n. 1. 
 
 Body 115, n . 4. 
 
 Brackets, use of in Nomenclature 56. 
 
 Breaking up phrases illustrated 110, n. 12. 
 
 Brief Way and Yay 71, n .21. 
 
 Brief Way and Yay enlarged 60, x. 
 
 Brief Way j oined like an En -hook to ticks and dashes 118, n . 9 . 
 
 British Association 99, n. 11. 
 
 Broadest sense 138, n . 13 . 
 
 But a part of its 74, n. 4. 
 
 But I am not sure that 129, n. 12. 
 
 But I cannot dwell 188, n. 5. 
 
 But it 78, n . 17. 
 
 But not and Or not 125, n . 21 . 
 
 But surely 147, n . 5. 
 
 But they did it not 151, n. 9. 
 
 But to the eye of Cuvier 79, n. 20. 
 
 But 2 -whatever I can do 138, n. 15. 
 
 By another 178, n . 9 . 
 
 By contending popes 103, n. 3. 
 
 By telling me . 146, n. 29. 
 
 By the defendant 173, n. 13. 
 
 By the learned counsel for the defendant 175, n. 8. 
 
 By the long 103, n . 2. 
 
 By the name 93, n. 1. 
 
 By the regular 112, n. 5. 
 
 C. 
 
 Can certainly have 1*2, n. 13. 
 
 Can fail 105, n. 14. 
 
 Can there be 116, n. 9. 
 
 Can we accomplish there 127, n. 13. 
 
 Can we En-hook omitted as an impediment 86, n. 7. 
 
 Capable 101, n. 5. 
 
 Carry out in to 160, n. 28. 
 
 Carry out their 106,0.19. 
 
198 SECOND STANDARD-PHOXOGRAPHIC READER, 
 
 Chancery ............................................................... 181, n. C. 
 
 Change of outlines or directions for phrase-writing ..................... 15.-J. n. 1. 
 
 Chapters and verses .................................................... 1CM, n. 10. 
 
 Cuarai'teristics of the Reporting Style ...................................... 58-02. 
 
 Charles the Second ...................................................... 73, n. 34. 
 
 " Chase with the speaker " to be avoided .......................... , ........... 62. 
 
 Chateaubriand .......................................................... 182, n. 1. 
 
 Cheers, etc., mode of indicating ......................................... 137, n. 4. 
 
 Cicero ................................................................... 71, n. 19. 
 
 Circle between two strokes .................................... 94, n. 8 ; 101, u. 8. 
 
 Circle, large initial ........................................... 71, n. 19 ; 145, n. 21. 
 
 Circles between curves ...................................... 71. n. 19 ; 174, u. 10. 
 
 Circle, most convenient way of turning ................................ 123, n. 12. 
 
 Circle, triple size ....................................................... 173, u. 11. 
 
 Classical and Reporting studies compared .............................. 149, n. 11. 
 
 Combinations of principles ............................................. 107, u. 4. 
 
 Common nature ........................................................ 144, n. 11. 
 
 Con- and com- implied .............................. 73, n. 30 ; 143, n. 9 ; 180, u. 5. 
 
 Con- or Com- implied by writing under ................................... 70, n. 8. 
 
 Confessed his .......................................................... 102, n. 13. 
 
 Conflict contracted ...................................................... 121, u. 10. 
 
 Connected with the ..................................................... 171, n. 4. 
 
 Constitution and unconstitutional ..................................... 150, n. 15. 
 
 Constitution is ...................................................... .. . .158, n. 7. 
 
 Constitution is for slavery ............................................. 103, 11. 'J3. 
 
 Constitution is not for slavery ......................................... 150, n. 14. 
 
 Contra o implied by proximity ......................................... 125, n. 19. 
 
 Contractions, general rule for devising .................................. 147, n. 7. 
 
 Contraction for Habeas Corpus .......................................... 153, n. 15. 
 
 Contractions, principle of ............................................... 154. n. 2. 
 
 Contractions, principle of, similar to general rule of position ........ 154, n. 2 (c). 
 
 Contractions progressive degrees of ............... 112, n. 3 ; 122, n. G ; 143, u. C. 
 
 Contractions, suggestiveness generally determined by position of primi- 
 
 tive word ........................................................ 154, n. 2 (d). 
 
 Contractions, sometimes vocalized ...................................... 147, u. 7. 
 
 Contraction, value of a good one ........................................ 70, n. 12. 
 
 Contri- joined ............................................................ 9G, n. 2. 
 
 Contributed ...................... . ....................................... 90, n. 2. 
 
 Contribution ............................................................. 90, n. 2. 
 
 Country, new word-sign for ............................................. 155. n. 4. 
 
 Copy of it ............................................................... 171, n. 2. 
 
 Could distinctly joined to they ........................................... 82, n. 10. 
 
 Could have had ........................................................ 100, n. 29. 
 
 COM' thr distinguished from Ca' thr ....................................... 88, n. 7. 
 
 Court and jury ......................................................... 173, n. 12. 
 
 Criticism, discriminating, by the reporter ............................. 149, n. 11. 
 
 Cross examination, noting of ............................................ 108, n. 9. 
 
 Cuvier, pronunciation of ................................................. 79, n. 20. 
 
 Dagger, use of in Nomenclature ............................................... 5C, 
 
 Dashes with hooks, how distinguished from shortened letters .......... 76, n. 13. 
 
INDEX OF THE NOTES. 199 
 
 Dates, writing of 83, n. 2; 167, n. 4. 
 
 Dates of preceding centuries. 169, n. 12. 
 
 Declaration of Independence... 160, n. 27. 
 
 Defendant, word-sign for 173, n. 13. 
 
 "Democratic party" contracted 136, n. 14. 
 
 Dependent infinitive joined 104, n. 10. 
 
 Derivative contractions or word-signs, positions cf 154, u. 2, b, c, and d. 
 
 Derivative word-signs 86, n. 5. 
 
 Derivative words sometimes contracted and not the primitives 147, n. 7, b. 
 
 Described in bis patent 176, n. 9. 
 
 Description, pbonograpbic example of 56-58. 
 
 Desire to secede 145, n. 21. 
 
 Dliees-Em 174, n. 16. 
 
 Dbr and sometimes Tr and Dr added to straight lines by lengthening 60, xii. 
 
 Dhr= their, there, they are, they were, other, added by a heavy tick 60, xiii. 
 
 Dhr-tick, instance of use 77, n. 7. 
 
 Dhr=their, there, etc., added by lengthening to straight lines. .60, xii.; 166, n. 8. 
 
 Different directions of certain letters 146, n. 28. 
 
 Different readings 156, n. 9. 
 
 Different values of phonographic letters distinguished 76, n. 13. 
 
 Direct immersion 174, n. 18. 
 
 Directions changed forsake of phrase-writing 146, n. 28 ; 164, n. 4. 
 
 Discoverer 81, n. 2. 
 
 Discrimination required in note-reading 156, n. 9. 
 
 Disdained to be 70, n. 5. 
 
 Disparities in speed in the Old Phonography 92, n. 14. 
 
 Dissolution how distinguished from Desolation 145, n. 20. 
 
 Distinction of signs, principle of 76, n. 13. 
 
 Docs not refer 157, n. 14. 
 
 Do not understand me 149, n. 13. 
 
 Downward forms occasionally used for greater convenience 88, n. 1. 
 
 Drift 98, n. 9. 
 
 E. 
 
 Ease of junction secured by shaping of letters 96, n. 5 ; 143, n. 5. 
 
 El-hook on curves, for for v, and to add liave, ever,for-th 61, xvii.; 140, n. 24. 
 
 Ef-hook and En-hook on curves 138, n. 8 ; 157, n. 15. 
 
 Ef-Sem 94, n. 8. 
 
 El-hook employed to add all or mill 60, xiv. 
 
 El-hook enlarged to add r 59, ix.; 71, n. 20. 
 
 El-hook, small, enlarged sometimes to add are, were, our 60, xv. 
 
 Emancipators 144, n. 15. 
 
 Employed to prevent the secession 145, n. 24. 
 
 Ems-Ith 162, n. 8. 
 
 England, new word-sign for 155, n. 5. 
 
 Eudhert, =, 119, n. 12. 
 
 En-hook adding than 61, xviii. 
 
 Ku-hook omitted as an impediment 81, n. 3 ; 81, n. 4 
 
 Enlargement of the semicircles (Weh or Wuh, Yen or Yuh) 106, n. 1. 
 
 Enlarging Issi 110, n. 11. 
 
 Ens-circle between strokes 166, n. 7 ; 168, n, 10 ; 176, n. 10. 
 
 Entire and its derivatives 151, n. 5. 
 
200 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Entitle-d.... ............................................................ 178, n. 8. 
 
 E^ual brothers .......................................................... 161, n. 3. 
 
 Es sounds omitted ....................... 73, n. 34 ; 103, n. 9 ; 1G7, n. 5 ; 168, n. 7. 
 
 Et cetera and it is true .................................................. 152, n. 12. 
 
 Ever added by Ef-hook on curves ..... . .................................. 61, xvii. 
 
 Everything, speedy writing of ................................... ......... 103, n. 3. 
 
 Exaggerate the ......................................................... 159, n. 19. 
 
 Examples of Phonographic Description ..................................... 56-58. 
 
 Exercises how used in study ................................................. 49. 
 
 Exceedingly difficult ................................................... 178, n. 12. 
 
 EXHIBITS : 
 
 Of Nomenclature ..................................................... 53-50. 
 
 Of Characteristics of the Reporting Stylo ............................. 58-62. 
 
 Of Enlarging Brief S, W, and Y ......................................... 191. 
 
 Of Reporting-Style Position .......................................... 63-65. 
 
 Of Phonographic Phrase-Writing ..................................... 63-67. 
 
 Of Phrase-Position ...................................................... 68. 
 
 Of Word-Distinctions .................................................... 08. 
 
 Of History of Phonography ............................................. 190. 
 
 Omission of Vowels Reportiug-Style characteristic ................... 58, i. 
 
 Exhibits, the noting of .................................................. 108, n. 8. 
 
 Existing States .......................................................... 155, n. 6. 
 
 Explains the ............................................................ 113, n. 6. 
 
 Extemporaneous speech, phrases of .......................... 130, n. 18 ; 151, n. 9. 
 
 Extinction ............................................................. 158, n. 10. 
 
 Extracts, how indicated ................................................. 115, n. 6. 
 
 Fallible ................................................................. 101 , n. 5. 
 
 Family after family .................................................... 106, n. 20. 
 
 Far[ther and] farther ..................................................... 96, n. 8. 
 
 -Fer-red ................................................................. 103, n. 7. 
 
 Final Wuh-hook, rule for, stated ........................................ 118, n. 9. 
 
 Fixed stars impeding letters omitted .................................. 91, n. 11. 
 
 For added by Ef-hook on curves ......................................... 61, xvii. 
 
 For consenting .......................................................... 148, n. 9. 
 
 For a considerable time ................................................. 103, n. 4. 
 
 -Fore added .............................................................. 89, n. 8. 
 
 Foreign names .................................... 98, n. 10 ; 144, n. 15 ; 182, n. 1. 
 
 Foreign languages, reporting of ......................................... 114, u. 1. 
 
 For ouo ................................................................ 157, n. 18. 
 
 For our ................................................................ 127, n. 14. 
 
 For Ike omitted .......................................................... 177, n. 1. 
 
 For the papal dignity ................................................... 102, n. 1. 
 
 For the purpose .............................................. 109, 11. 3 ; 1GO, n, 1. 
 
 For what I did not ..................................................... 146, n. 27. 
 
 Form, and its derivatives, platform, etc .................................. 134, n . 4. 
 
 Forms changed occasionally ............................................ 91, n . 10. 
 
 Forth contracted ......................................................... 83, n. 1. 
 
 For-th added by Ef-hook on curves ...................................... 01, xvii. 
 
 Fourth position for Hay, etc ...................... . ..... . .............. 121, n . 5. 
 
INDEX OF THE XOTES. 201 
 
 Fourth position for Kel, etc 98, n. 3. 
 
 Fourth position for words beginning with Iss 100, n. 1. 
 
 Fractions, writing of 97, n. 10. 
 
 Freedom cannot bear 158, n. 11. 
 
 French u, representation of 79, n. 20. 
 
 from it, and its old expression 145, n. 22. 
 
 From point to point 180, n. 4. 
 
 From the general government 138, n. 16. 
 
 From the great State of New York 134, n. 2. 
 
 From to, example of 88, n. 2 ; 180, n. 4. 
 
 -Ful-l;/-ness, added by Ef-hook on curves 61, xvii. 
 
 -Fulness 109, n. 6. 
 
 Further and further 136, n. 8. 
 
 Futility 75, n. 11. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gay between Ing and other letters sometimes omitted 136, n. 13. 
 
 General 138, 16. 
 
 General contractions 74, u. 3. 
 
 General council, specially contracted 101, n. 4. 
 
 General system omitting En-hook as impediment 150, u. 18. 
 
 Gentlemen of the jury 172, n. 8. 
 
 Give way 172, n. 5. 
 
 God [Aljmighty's agency 125, n. 3. 
 
 God expects us 129, n. 6. 
 
 God has Bent 161, n. 6. 
 
 Goethe 183, n. 3. 
 
 Good writer 90, n. 10. 
 
 Go, therefore 109, n. 4. 
 
 Gordiau knot cut 72, n. 23. 
 
 Great National Democratic Party 138, n. 10. 
 
 Greatest speed of writing, how to attain it 51, par. 1. 
 
 Greek text, pronunciation of 114, n. 1. 
 
 n. 
 
 Habeas Corpus 153, n. 15. 
 
 Had added by shortening 61, xvi.; 160, n. 29; 162, n. 12. 
 
 Halving to add It, Had, What, Would, and sometimes At and Out 61, xvi. 
 
 Hand, hesitating movement of, to be avoided 50, par. 1. 
 
 Handful 151, n. 1. 
 
 Has found its way 95, n. 1. 
 
 Hast Thou made them all 95, n. 9. 
 
 Has sustained 179, n. 19. 
 
 HateJul 163, n. 2. 
 
 Have, added by Ef-hook on curves 61, xvii. ; 123, n. 7. 
 
 Have, added by Vee-hook 140, n. 24. 
 
 Have all 78, n. 16. 
 
 Hare implied after /. .126, n. 8; 127, n. 9 ; 130, n. 22; 136, n. 15; 137, n. 5; 159, n. 16. 
 Have not omitted when it can be conveniently written by a hook. . . .127, n. 9 (c). 
 
 Have omitted .75, n. 9; 91, n. 8; 126, n. 8; 127, n. 9: 130, n. 22. 
 
 Have omitted before been 77, n. 9. 
 
202 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Have supplied before irregular past participles 127, n. 9. 
 
 He petitioned 163, n. 19. 
 
 77e, represented by a tick 58, iv., 1. 
 
 He would have been able to receive 187, n. G. 
 
 Hear the otber side, and why 104, n. 11. 
 
 Heavy and light dots distinguished 77, u. 5. 
 
 Here and there 1-7, n. 10. 
 
 Heretofore 115, u. 5. 
 
 High, higher, highest 125, u. 1. 
 
 tits added to a loop 102, u. 13. 
 
 Hooks sometimes implied by offsets 174, n. 18. 
 
 Hooks omitted. . .81, n. 3 ; 80, n. 3 and 4 ; 91, n. 8 ; 179, n. 17 ; 180, n. 2 ; 184, n. 1. 
 
 Horizontal first-position words adapted 99, n. 13. 
 
 How can you believe 119, n. 1. 
 
 How expressed by a tick 59, iv., 2. 
 
 How modes of writing 120, n. 1. 
 
 How rarely 143, n. 7. 
 
 Human family 1C2, n. 10. 
 
 Human mind si, n. 4. 
 
 I. 
 
 /ansl I have 105, n. 18. 
 
 I believe that it is right to have 129, n. 11. 
 
 7, brief sign for 130, n. 23. 
 
 I command you 117, n. 1. 
 
 I command you to go 109, u. 1. 
 
 7, expressed by a tick 59, iv., 3. 
 
 1 have been there 172, n. 6. 
 
 I have felt that the 136, n, 14. 
 
 I have had my heart 131, n. 23. 
 
 I [have] loved the 126, n. 8. 
 
 I have presented 130, n. 23. 
 
 I have Raid 137, n. 5; 159, n. 16. 
 
 I have seen 127, n. 9. 
 
 I know that I am not going to be applauded 140, n. 27. 
 
 I offor 121, n. 8. 
 
 I preached the Gospel Christ Jesus 115, n. 6. 
 
 I said I would teach 118, n. 9. 
 
 I say it is 140, n. 1. 
 
 7 sometimes "omitted 133, n. 15; 146, n. 27, b ; 138, n. 5. 
 
 7, tlie pronoun, when written alone 105, n. 13. 
 
 I will make it 108, n. 11. 
 
 I would 113, n. 23. 
 
 I would that tliey felt more tliat it is God's Y,"ord 130, n. 19. 
 
 I would to God 130, n. 18. 
 
 7 written to imply have 1^3, n. 8; 127, n. 9. 
 
 -t'c omitted 7J, n. CO ; 77, n. 5 ; 77, n. 10. 
 
 If they could be 82, n. 10. 
 
 If you choose 188, n. 2. 
 
 If you were (or would) 131, n. 26. 
 
 Ignore, position of, and of ignorance, iynorant 130, n. li. 
 
 Illegalities 165, n. 2, 
 
INDEX OF THIS NOTES. 203. 
 
 Impediments, omission of 75, n. 7 ; 77, n. 11 ; 78, n. 13 ; 80, n. 8; 81, 3 and 4. 
 
 Impeding letters omitted * 86, n. 7. 
 
 Impeding syllables, ing, etc., omitted 89, n. 6. 
 
 Implying ing preceding a-n ox the 77, n. 4 ; 147, n. 2 ; 160, n. 30. 
 
 Implying ing preceding thr 96, u. 9 ; 158, n. 5. 
 
 Impious and impossible 163, n. 20. 
 
 Implication : Con 121, n. 10. 
 
 Implication : Contro-a, etc., occasionally like con 125, n. 19. 
 
 Implying and Supplying distinguished 71 ; n. 15 ; 148, n. 10, 6. 
 
 Implying lo 72, n. 23. 
 
 In a general council 101, n. 4. 
 
 In a similar 162, n. U. 
 
 In a spiritual 123, n. 14. 
 
 In a state of civilization 97, n. 1. 
 
 In comparison with those which 94, n. 5. 
 
 In connection with 184, n. 3. 
 
 In consequence of your commission 109, n. 5. 
 
 In England 1 55, n. 5. 
 
 In favor of slavery 149, n. 12. 
 
 /rt-hook distinguished from similar signs 76, n. !3. 
 
 In one or other 87, n. 4. 
 
 In order [to] 110, n. 8. 
 
 In order to constitute 176, n. 11. 
 
 In order to form 159, n. 20. 
 
 In our, best position 86, n. 6. 
 
 In prefixed by an In-hook 123, n. 14 ; 145, n. 18 ; 162, n. 11. 
 
 In [t/te] relation and in real-ity 143, n. 4. 
 
 In reality 17% n. 12. 
 
 In slaves 145, n. 18. 
 
 In taking up their 152, n. 10. 
 
 In that terrible clime 141, n. 4. 
 
 In this city 1 67, n. 5. 
 
 In this country 155, n. 4. 
 
 In thi[s] process 174, n. 3. 
 
 In the chancery 181, n. 6. 
 
 In the Constitution 150, n, 15. 
 
 In the contemplation 156, n. 9. 
 
 In the conversion of the world 129, n. 13. 
 
 In the faith Ill, n. 19. 
 
 In the first place 153, n. 17. 
 
 In the form 123, n. 11. 
 
 In the rnidst of which the 186, n. 1. 
 
 In the prefixed to Sker, etc 93, n. 2. 
 
 In the second place 153, u. 19. 
 
 In the relation distinguished from fn reality 143, n. 4. 
 
 In value 107, n. 8. 
 
 In what I say 140, n. 28. 
 
 In what is 98, n. 8. 
 
 In what part of the country 134, n. 6. 
 
 Incapable 132, n. 1. 
 
 Indian's skull found at New Orleans, ago of 99, n. 12. 
 
 Infinite-ly, etc , 92, n. 14. 
 
204: SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC KEADEK. 
 
 Ing-dot omitted 105, n. 15 ; 146, n. 29. 
 
 Ing lengthened to add tiir 135, n. 5. 
 
 -Ing implied 77, n. 4. 
 
 -Ing therefore 96, n. 9. 
 
 -Ing thr 103, n. 5. 
 
 Ingenuity 158, n. 6, 
 
 -Ingly represented 85, n. 3. 
 
 -Ings 77, n. 4. 
 
 Initials for speaker 139, B. 19. 
 
 Initial circle, large, saving of 71, n. 19 ; 145, u. 21 and 24. 
 
 Initial circle, implying an Ar-hook 124, u. 15. 
 
 Interfere-d 179, n. 14. 
 
 Interrogation, mark of, in law-reporting IC7, n. 2, 6. 
 
 Interruptions 139, 11. 19. 
 
 Into the air 74, n. 2. 
 
 Into omitted 179, n. 17. 
 
 Into the Constitution 151, n. 3. 
 
 Into your hands 118, n. 7. 
 
 Introduction 53-68. 
 
 Investments 145, n. 17. 
 
 Irrepressible conflict party 138, n. 11. 
 
 Is capable of being 151, u. 4. 
 
 Is commanded to send 109, n. 7. 
 
 Is described 173, u. 14. 
 
 Is ever 124, n, 18. 
 
 Is expressed 150, n. 17. 
 
 Iss-hhel may be used by a reporter even when it is alone 185, n. 4. 
 
 Is not possible 99, n. 13. 
 
 Is prefixed by enlarging a circle 173, n. 14 ; 188, n. 3. 
 
 Is suflicient-ly 188, n. 3. 
 
 Is that 128, n. 1. 
 
 Is the same as commanding 110, n. II. 
 
 Is therefore 89, n. 8. 
 
 Is to 128, n. 2. 
 
 Iss Per, etc., ocurring medially 76, n. 1. 
 
 -Istie-al-ly, how treated 77, n. 10. 
 
 It is true, and et cetera 152, n. 12. 
 
 It added by shortening 61, xvi.; 80, n. C ; 97, n. 2 ; 123, n. 9 ; 128, n. 15 ; (with 
 
 it) 133, n. 4 ; 140, n. 1 ; 145, n. 19 anO.22 ; 1GG, n. 4 ; 177, n. 13 ; 184, n. 1. 
 
 It added to the past tense of verbs ending in Mel, Xel, Kel 174, n. 5-, B. 
 
 It appeared to be ed omitted 104, n . 10. 
 
 It does not 163, n. 22. 
 
 Ith-Sem 94, n. 8. 
 
 It is a well-known fact 148 n . 28. 
 
 It is true 177, n. 3. 
 
 It is your right to have 140, n. 24. 
 
 It may be that there are 82. n . 8. 
 
 It may perhaps, etc 110, n. 12. 
 
 It not 159, n. 17. 
 
 It seems certain that they were 98, n. 6. 
 
 Its added 76, n. 12. 
 
INDEX OF THE NOTES. 205 
 
 J. 
 
 Jesus Christ addressed you .............................................. 116, n. 7. 
 
 Jonathan Smith ........................................................ 172, n. 10. 
 
 John Bull ............................................................... Hi, n. 9. 
 
 John, chapter 15 and verse 10 .......................................... 108, n. 10. 
 
 Joinings made easy by varied shapes ..................................... 89, n. 7. 
 
 Julius II. s omitted .................................................... 103, n. 9. 
 
 Jury to be capitalized in transcribing .................................. 173, n. 12. 
 
 Just so far .............................................................. 147, n. 4. 
 
 K. 
 
 -Kay omitted .................................................. 73, n. 30 ; 75, n. 8. 
 
 Kay- omitted ........................... 75, n. 8; 131, n. 25; 136, n. 13; 143, n. 6. 
 
 Key to the pronunciation ..................................................... 56. 
 
 Key to the Reporting Exercises ............................................ 69-189. 
 
 Lancaster .............................................................. 136, n. 13. 
 
 Lapping and joining instead ........................................... 146, n. 25. 
 
 Lapping, as in they did it not ............................................. 151, n. 9. 
 
 Lapping in phrase- writing .............................................. 79, n. 1. 
 
 Lapping for joining ........................................... 84, n. 3 ; 107, n. 8. 
 
 Lapping of words in phrase-writing ..................................... Ill, n. 2. 
 
 Large hook for /on Em, En, Ray ......................................... 59, viii. 
 
 Large hook for I on Em instances of value .............................. 69, n. 2. 
 
 Large hook letters, shortening of ............................. 69, n. 2 ; 163, n. 19. 
 
 Large initial-circle, advantage of ........................................ 71, n. 19. 
 
 Large initial- hook letters ending verbs in the present tense ........... 174, n. 5. 
 
 Large initial hooks ...................................................... 71, n. 20. 
 
 Last-mentioned ......................................................... 188, n, 4. 
 
 Laughter, renewed ..................................................... 139, n. 23. 
 
 Law courts, Phonography in ............................................ 167, n. 1. 
 
 Law of God ............................................................. 138, n. 8. 
 
 Law Reporting ............................................ . ............. 167, n. 1. 
 
 Law Reporting, punctuation in ........................................ 168, n. 11. 
 
 Law-school .............................................................. 166, n. 3. 
 
 Lawyer's names, how indicated ' ................. ....................... 170, n. 14. 
 
 Legibility aided occasionally by disjoining ......................... 93, n. 4 and 5. 
 
 Legibility of words aided by context .................................... 103, n. 2. 
 
 Legibility and distinction aided by use or sense ........................ 148, n. 10. 
 
 Lengthening principle proper use of .................................. 116, n. 9. 
 
 Less than it was ........................................................ 164, n. 4. 
 
 -Lessness ................................................................. 109, n. 6. 
 
 Let it not be ............................................................ 159, n . 17. 
 
 Let there be .............................................................. 80, n. 1. 
 
 Letters disjoined or crossing ......................... ......................... 56. 
 
 Letters must not be made too large .................................. 49, last par. 
 
 Liftings in phrase-writing .............................................. 107, n. 5. 
 
 Like signs, how distinguished .......................................... 76, n. 13. 
 
 Little savings and great gains .......................................... 145, n. 23. 
 
206 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Lo! I am with yon always ............................................. 119, n. 13. 
 
 Log cabins ............................................................. 131, u. -25. 
 
 Long stroke before last figure of dates .................................... 81, 11. 5. 
 
 Look around ........................................................... 128, n. 1C. 
 
 Loud laughter ......................................................... 139, n. 22. 
 
 -U\j ..................................................................... 75, n. 11. 
 
 Ly, frequently represented by enlarging an Ar-hook .................... 147, n. 5. 
 
 -Lty ........................................................ 75, n. 11; 135, n. G, 3. 
 
 -Ly omitted ........................................... 76, n. 2 ; 80, n. 5 ; 90, n. 7. 
 
 -Ly presently ...................................... . ................... 110, n. 9. 
 
 M. 
 
 Make and take, contractions for .......................................... 75, n. 6. 
 
 Make it ................................................................ 108, n. 11. 
 
 Maybe .................................................................. 180, n. 3. 
 
 May have been .......................................................... 180, u. 3. 
 
 Meant to have it ........................................................ 151, 11. 2. 
 
 Metternich .............................................................. 185, u. G. 
 
 Merely and immorally .................................................... 117, 11. 4. 
 
 Ministering spirits ....................................................... 89, n. G. 
 
 Misrepresentation, what it is ........................................... 104, n. 12. 
 
 Mont Blanc ............................................................ 144, n. 15. 
 
 Moral perfection ........................................................ 70, n. 10. 
 
 More than one ........................................................... 82, n. 7. 
 
 Most distinguished .................................................... 158, n. 12. 
 
 Most High ...................................... . ....................... 102, n. G. 
 
 Movable frames ......................................................... 174, n. 1. 
 
 Mr. generally omitted in note-taking ............................ .' ....... 172, n. 7. 
 
 Mr. President ........................................................... 136, n. 9. 
 
 Multiply -ied-mnltitude .................................................. CO, n. 2. 
 
 Must have been there ................................................... 79, n. 20. 
 
 My brethren ............................................................ 134, n. 1. 
 
 My Northern friends ................................................... 138, n. 14. 
 
 Names, noting of ....................................................... 70, u. .-,. 
 
 Names, foreign, how written ............................................ 98, n. 10. 
 
 Nasalization, how expressed ............................................. 98, n. 10. 
 
 Natural philosophy .................................................... Ill, u. 17. 
 
 Naturalism ............................................................. 123, u. 12. 
 
 -Nest omitted ........................................................... 143, n. 3. 
 
 Never ................................................................... 70, u. 1 2. 
 
 Nomenclature, Phonographic ................................................. 53. 
 
 No law for slavery ...................................................... 14G, u. 28. 
 
 No other idea .......................................................... 119, n. 12. 
 
 None others ............................................................ 144, n. 14. 
 
 Nor can we .............................................................. 180, n. 2. 
 
 Xorth contracted .............................................. 143, u. 9; 1G4, u. 7. 
 
 North star .............................................................. 164, n. 7. 
 
 Northern .................................................... 138. n. 11 ; 141, n. 7. 
 
 Northern Democracy .................................................... 141, n. 7. 
 
I3TDEX OF THE NOTES. 207 
 
 Not added by an En-hook 125, n. 21. 
 
 Not a year or two Ill, u. 15. 
 
 Kot with preceding t!i, m, etc 110, n. 8. 
 
 Notes, discrimination required in reading 149, n. 11. 
 
 Notes iu this Reader, tlie aim of 51. 
 
 Notes the references in 52. 
 
 Notes on the Exercises, objects of 51, bot. 
 
 A'ol/tirtg and anything 157, u. 10. 
 
 Noticeable circumstance that 95, n. 12. 
 
 Numbers, how usually written 79, u. 3 ; 141, u. 5 ; 172, u. 11. 
 
 Numerals, Phonographic 76, n. 3. 
 
 Numerical terms, iieed of signs for 78, n. 19. 
 
 O. 
 
 O and Oh 87, n. G. 
 
 Obedience, disobedience, etc 147, n. 7. 
 
 Objected to 1C9, n. 13. 
 
 Objections, noting of 1G9, n. 13. 
 
 Objections to certain contractions answered 143, n. G ; 145, n. 23. 
 
 Of a human being 118, n. G. 
 
 Of added by a Vee-hook 90, n. 11; 139, n. 17. 
 
 Of added by Ef-hook on curves Gl, xvii. 
 
 Of all American slavery 166, n. 5. 
 
 Of all parties concerned 146, n. 25. 
 
 O/by a Vee-hook 90, n. 11. 
 
 Of divisions; of written and why 134 n. 7. 
 
 Of, followed or not by an article, implied 9, vi. 
 
 Of having 73, n. 28. 
 
 Of human enjoyments G9, n. 3. 
 
 /"implied advantage of 09, n. 3 ; 71, n. 17. 
 
 Of its 74, u. 4 ; 79, n. 2. 
 
 Of occasionally written by Vee-hook rather than implied 139, n. 17. 
 
 O/omitted between words joined 71, u. 16. 
 
 Of our illustrious man J87, n. 8. 
 
 Of our lost ones 88, n. 1. 
 
 Of our navy 187, n. 7. 
 
 Of our own, Prentoidi 90, n. 4. 
 
 Of the omitted 141, u. 3. 
 
 Of the omitted as impeding words 90, n. G. 
 
 Of the two 172, n. 11. 
 
 Of t hoir 143, n. 10. 
 
 Of their and of it, new Hand-Book phrases 79, n. 2. 
 
 Offer distinguished f roni form 121, n. 8. 
 
 -Ography-ic-al 78, n. 15. 
 
 Oil! Ol and Ah! 87, u. G. 
 
 Old Phonography confusion of as to viho-se-m 124, u. 16. 
 
 " defect as to the representation of or not, but r.ot 125, u. 21. 
 
 " " in the representation of extemporaneous 
 
 speech 130, n. 18. 
 
 " did not imply to 70, u. 5. 
 
208 SECOND STANDAED-MOKOGIlAPmc UEADEK. 
 
 Old Phonography did not provide word-signs for numerical de- 
 nominations 78, n. Id. 
 
 " disparities of speed in 02, n. 14. 
 
 its inferiority as to outlines 150, n. 1(5. 
 
 " its mode of expressing a-n 72, n. 22. 
 
 " plan of, as to w and y 71, n. 21. 
 
 rule of, as to joining 89, n. 7. 
 
 " rule of, as to joining and 70, n. 7. 
 
 " sacrificed uniformity and consistency 153, n. 16. 
 
 OMISSIONS : 
 
 1. Of words 61, zix.; 76, n. 3 ; 126, n. 8 ; 131, n. 4 ; 129, n. 13. 
 
 Of an 113, n. 7 ; 1U7, n. 16. 
 
 Of impeding words 82, n. 7; 90, n. 6; 91, n. 8 ; (of the) 
 
 134, n. 6; (the) 42, n. 5 ; 133, n. 6 ; (the after and) 118, n. 4 ; (or) 111, n. 
 
 15; 183, n. 4 ; (with) 97, n. 11 ; (7 omitted in certain cases) 14G, n. 27. 
 
 2. Of syllables or letters 122, n. 4 ; 131. n. 25 ; (as k) 143, n. 6 ; (Kay or 
 
 Gay) 136, n. 13 ; (as n) 113, n. 9 ; (as t) 181, n. 6 ; (as En-hook) 117, E. 2 ; 
 149, n. 13 ; (of ny) 1 18, n. 6 ; (in phrase-writing) 1 16, n. 9 ; J 18, n. 8 ; (as 
 Ing when difficult) 146, n. 9 ; 140, n. 27 ; 151, n. 4 ; (of Eses) 73, n. 34. 
 
 3. Of Impediments 77, 
 
 n. 11 ; 94, n. 5; 128, n. 18; (as En-hoot) 130, n. 16; 91, n. 11 ; 95, n. 11 ; 
 103, n. 8; 105, n. Hand 15; 138, n. 9, 13 and 16 ; 150, n. 15 ; 183, n. 4. 
 
 4. Of Vowels in the Reporting Style 58, par. 1 ; 130, n. 21 . 
 
 5. Of superfluous words or letters 98, n. 6 ; 97, n. 1 ; 183, n. 4. 
 
 6. Of pronouns readily supplied 138, n. 15. 
 
 On as adverb 80, n. 7. 
 
 On liis deathbed 182, n. 2. 
 
 On omitted 76, n. 3. 
 
 One added by an En-hook 103, n. 2. 
 
 One and the same 75, u. 7. 
 
 One or two oclock 1S3. n. 4. 
 
 One omitted 76, n. 3. 
 
 Only conflict 121, n. 10. 
 
 Only one 103, n. 2. 
 
 Or disjoined where a-n-d would be Tetoid CI, n. 1. 
 
 Or omitted 1G3, n. 4. 
 
 Or embraces how Tetoid is distinguished from and 123, n. 8. 
 
 Or when joined CO, n. 12. 
 
 Or not joining hooks to ticks 125, n, 21. 
 
 Or that distinguished from and that 90, u. 12. 
 
 Other added by Thr-tick CO, xiii.; 129, n. 3. 
 
 Other added by lengthening CO, xii.; 129, n. 4. 
 
 Other added by lengthening straight line 137, n. 1G. 
 
 Otter added to Ing by lengthening 135, n. 5. 
 
 Othe.r'and, for on the other hand CO, n. 4. 
 
 Our added by Ar-hook 74, n. 36 ; 86, u. 6. 
 
 t " position of signs thus formed 127, u. 14 ; 159. u. 26. 
 
 Our, are, or were, added by hook 61, x.v. 
 
 Oar added by hook, general rule 127, n. 14. 
 
 Out added by shortening 129, n. 9. 
 
 Out at usury 73, n. 29. 
 
 Out of nothing 90, u. 11. 
 
INDEX OF THE NOTES. 209 
 
 Outlines, changed sometimes In phrase- writing.,, 158, n. 1. 
 
 Outside of it 106, n. 4. 
 
 Over all North America 146, n. 26. 
 
 Overlapping for joining in phrases 103, n. 4 ; 139, n. 18 ; 140, n. 25 ; 177, n. 7. 
 
 Overthrow 151, n. 6. 
 
 P. 
 
 Palpable 150, n. 16. 
 
 Paragraphs, indicated ..157, n. 17. 
 
 Paragraphing 139, n. 18. 
 
 Parentheses 155, n. 7. 
 
 Parenthetical words in phrase- writing 125, n. 4. 
 
 I'n i-i -nl., depart-ed, etc 181, n. 1. 
 
 Parti-coloring yarn 7 173, n. 15. 
 
 Party, in special contractions, added to Em by widening 136, n. li. 
 
 J'ast participles before which have may be omitted 127, n. 9. 
 
 Past tenses of verbs ending with a full-length stroke with a larger initial 
 
 hook 174, n. 5. 
 
 Past time written by present 59, vii. 
 
 Patent-ed 172, n. 9. 
 
 Patience, result of 0, par. G. 
 
 Pels distinguished from Pletoid=-Peo 12H, n. 17. 
 
 Period 1G7, n. 2. 
 
 Perpendicular tick for a-n-d 70, n. 7. 
 
 Phonographic nomenclature, explanation of 53. 
 
 Phonographic nomenclature, use of 51, par. 3. 
 
 Phonographic numerals for dates 81, n. 5. 
 
 Phonographic numerals, how distinguished sometimes 81, n. 5 ; 83, n. 2. 
 
 Phonography in Law Courts 1G7, n. 1. 
 
 Phraaeographic power in Standard Phonography 62, xxi. 
 
 Phrases breaking up of, illustrated 130, n. 19. 
 
 Phrases broken up by running down or above too much 102, n. 1. 
 
 Phrase-writing 62, xxi.; 
 
 129, u. G ; 130, n. IS ; 143, n. 8 ; 146, n. 25 ; 177, n. 2 ; 156, n. 10 ; 158, 
 n. I, 4, 7, 9, and 11; 161, n. G; 162, n. 14; 163, u. 22, 23 and 1; 164, n. 4. 
 
 Phrase-writing by shortest consonant expression 98, n. 5. 
 
 Phrase-writing, Exhibit of 66. 
 
 Phrase- writing facilitated by Standard Phonography G2, last par. 
 
 Phrase-writing, general principles GG, A. 
 
 Phrase- writing joining of a common substitute 150, n. 14. 
 
 Phrase-writing, occasional principle 128, n. 1C. 
 
 Phrase-writing occasionally requires change of word-forms 102, n. 6. 
 
 Phrase-writing of special importance to the reporter G'2. 
 
 Phrase-writing, overlapping in 103, u. 4 ; 139, n. 18. 
 
 Phrase- writing, progressive degrees of 112, n. 3. 
 
 Phrase-writing, special principles of 67, B. 
 
 Pltysical, specially contracted 78, n. 15. 
 
 Pitman's, Isaac, use of the disjoined ticks criticized 77, n. 4. 
 
 Place, in first place, etc 153, n. 19. 
 
 Pla iutiffs in the suit 168, n. 10. 
 
 Plaintiff's invention. 176, n. 10. 
 
210 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC REA1 KR, 
 
 Plantation l. r >4, n. 2. 
 
 Platonic philosophy 73. n. :ri. 
 
 Position, adaptation of 77, u. <i ; 124, 
 
 n. 18 ; 134, n. 1 ; 149, n. 12 ; 150, n. 17 ; 151. n. 8 ; 161 ; n. 3 ; 176, n. 9. 
 
 Position, distinction between Third and Fourth in case of horizontals . . .69, u. 1. 
 
 Position figures 55. 
 
 Position, frequent and less frequent, for distinction 86, u. 7. 
 
 Position of signs formed by prefixing our by an Ar-hook or by enlarging 
 
 the small El-hook .- 127, n. 14. 
 
 Position of a contraction fora number of related words 154, u. 2. 
 
 Position of a contraction sometimes determined by the rule of the corre- 
 sponding style 154, n. 2, e. 
 
 Position the third for Kay Red, etc 118, n. 5. 
 
 Position zero 133, n. 4. 
 
 Power why written Pee-Ray in rt 74, n. 1. 
 
 Pre-eminence, prominence, and permanence 159, n. 18. 
 
 Present for past tense 74, n. 35 ; 87, n. 2. 
 
 Present for past tense, advantage of 78, n. 14. 
 
 Present time written for the past 59, vii- 
 
 Principles instead of mere memory 118, n. 7. 
 
 Principles, values of 130, n. 18. 
 
 Profligate pontificate 103, n. 8. 
 
 Progressive contraction 73, n. 33. 
 
 Progressive contractions illustrated 122, n. G. 
 
 Progressive degrees of phrase-writing 112, n. 3. 
 
 Prominently 121, u. 6. 
 
 Pronunciation of Luke x., 16 114, n. 1. 
 
 Pronoun ce[d] it the 159, n. 25. 
 
 Pronunciation, Key to 56. 
 
 Pronunciation to be written foreign or English 144, n. 15. 
 
 Proslavery 137, u. 1. 
 
 Prosperity and prospect 137, n. 6. 
 
 Proximity to imply of only, advantage of G7, n. 17. 
 
 Punctuation in note-taking 79, n. 4. 
 
 Put in their claim 102, n. 8. 
 
 Puts it out of his power to receive the 14s 1 , n. 10. 
 
 Q. 
 
 Question and answer, best mode of noting 167, n. 2. 
 
 (Jit' xiinn-eJ, etc 96, u. 3. 
 
 Quostions by the Court and by a Juror, how indicated 188, n. 9. 
 
 Quotation marks final 144, n. 12. 
 
 Quotations repeated how to manage 115, n. 6. 
 
 R. 
 
 Rate of reading or speaking from memory 115, n. C, b. 
 
 Uay-Ter and Ray-Der 90, n. 10. 
 
 Rfadinj notes a difficulty in, avoided , 75, n. 3. 
 
INDEX OF THE NOTES. 211 
 
 Reading notes of exercises written from dictation 50, par. 4. 
 
 Heady reading, no w acquired 98, n. 7. 
 
 Reeled yarns 175, n. 6. 
 
 Rejoicingly 85, n. 3. 
 
 Reliable 175, n. 18. 
 
 Repeated quotations usually not taken in full 115, n. 6, c. 
 
 Repeated words joined by and 96, n. 8. 
 
 Repetition of words 136, n. 8 ; 147, n. 1. 
 
 Repetitions 106, n. 20. 
 
 Repetitions, expressions of 61, xx. 
 
 Repetitions, mode of expressing in Standard Phonography 
 
 61, xx.; 96, n. 8; 119, u. 11; H7, n. 1. 
 
 Reporter's principle ground of reputation 104, n. 12. 
 
 Reporting Exercises 1-48. 
 
 Key to 69-189. 
 
 " " notes on 69-189. 
 
 " foreign languages 114, u. 1. 
 
 " American Bible Society Anniversary 121, u. 4. 
 
 " Style study and practice and study of the Classics com pared.. 141, n. 11. 
 
 " what it is and what it is not 104, n. 12. 
 
 Reporting Lists how easily committed 49. 
 
 Reporting Lists must be familiarized 49. 
 
 Reporting-Style characteristics 58-62. 
 
 Reporting-Style position, exhibit of 63. 
 
 Roman Catholics, specially contracted 100, n. 2. 
 
 Roman contracted 102, n. 7. 
 
 Round joined to look-ed 131, n. 27. 
 
 R-ty 136, n . 6, 3. 
 
 S. 
 
 Same and some time 156, n. 11. 
 
 Schiller 183, n. 2. 
 
 Scientific societies 95, n. 10. 
 
 Secede 145, n. 21. 
 
 Secession added by Seseshon 145, n. 24. 
 
 Seem-ed to be gratified 186, n. 2. 
 
 Selections for the Exercises 52. 
 
 Seems to have established 107, n. 4. 
 
 Self government 132, n. 2. 
 
 Self- prefixed 89, n. 5 ; 132, n. 2. 
 
 Session added by Iss-eshon 146, n. 24. 
 
 Shaping letters for easy junction 129, n. 10 and 12 ; 130, n. 17 ; 131, n. 23. 
 
 She) and Shier alone 183, n. 2. 
 
 Shon andTiv hooks 70, n. 9. 
 
 .Shortened hook letters distinguished from hook dashes 76, n. 12, e. 
 
 Shus li-ness, words ending, contracted 74, n. 3 ; 142, n. 11. 
 
 Size of writing best for speed 49, last par. 
 
 Slavery and derivatives 137, n. 1 ; ICG, n. 5. 
 
 Slave-breeding State of Virginia 139, n. is. 
 
 Slave-breeder 139, n. 21. 
 
212 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Slave codes ............................................................. 157, n. 15. 
 
 Slavery was dying ..................................................... 153, n. 18. 
 
 Small El or Ar hook enlarged to add consonant ............................ 51), is.. 
 
 Social ............................................................. 185, n. 4 aii d 7. 
 
 Society, frequently contracted ........................................... 95, n. 10. 
 
 Society and association distinguished in contractions .................... 99, u. 11. 
 
 So far as to say ........................................................... 91, n. 9. 
 
 Solemnity ............................................................... 161, u. 4. 
 
 Somebody .............................................................. 115, n. 4. 
 
 So much 
 
 > 3 - 
 
 So much more important than those .................................... 107, u. 7. 
 
 So well ................................................................... 94.H.O. 
 
 Space for punctuation ................................................... 79 n - * 
 
 Space left for omitted word ............................................ H9. u - H- 
 
 Speaker, chase with, how to avoid ...................................... 62, par. 4. 
 
 Speaker, how to get close up with, as with a bound .......... 62, par. 4 ; 92, n. 14. 
 
 Speakers, change of .................................................... 1 3 ^> n - 19- 
 
 Spsaker's name, how indicated ......................................... 170, u. 14. 
 
 Special contractions to be devised by the reporter ...................... 136, u. 14. 
 
 Special contractions, principles and instances ............... 78, n. 17; 91, n. 11 ; 
 
 101, n. 4; 102, n. 7; 103, n. 7 ; 122, n. 7 ; 136, n. 8, 9, and 10 ; 136, n. 14; 
 137, u.l and 3; 138, n. 10, 11. 14, and 16 ; 140, n. 2; 141, n. 7 and 9 ; 147, 
 n. 2 ; 148, n. 8 ; 151, n. 7 ; 154, n. 2 ; 155, n. 4 and 5 ; 100, n. 27 ; 150, n. 1 ; 
 162, n. 18 ; 164, n. 7 ; 166, n. 5 ; 172, n. 10 ; 174, n. 1 . 175, n. 6 ; 178, n. 10. 
 Special contractions, progressive ........................................ 73, n. 23. 
 
 Special contractions, used as general ---- 147, n. 3 ; 160, n. 1 ; 162, n. 13 ; 175, n. 8. 
 
 Speech-phrases occasionally broken up ......................... ; ....... 99, n. 14. 
 
 Speech-phrases with corresponding writing-phrase ..................... 102, n. 1. 
 
 ............... 103, n. 3 and 4. 
 
 Standard-Phonographic Series Fourth Volume ............................... 49. 
 
 Standard Phonography greatly superior to other systems in respect of 
 
 phrase-writing ........................................... 62, ixi. ; 151, n. 9. 
 
 Standard Phonography adequacy in the phrases of common speech . .130, n. 18. 
 " advantages of referred to ....................... 75, n. 10. 
 
 '' how it makes the rough places smooth ......... 92, n. 14. 
 
 " " its mode of expressing repetitions .............. 147, n. ]. 
 
 " object of mentioning superiorities ............ 173, n. 15. 
 
 superiority of, as to outlines often where no now 
 
 principles aro involved .................. 150, n. 16. 
 
 " uniformity of ....................... 103, n. 7 ; 153, n. 16. 
 
 word-signs of, how constructed .................. S2, n. 6. 
 
 Star .......................................................... 9!,n. 11 ; 104, n. 7. 
 
 Supplying aud Implying distinguished ................................. 71, n. IP. 
 
 State of Virginia ....................................................... 130, n. 17. 
 
 Stationary ............................................................... 70, n. 9. 
 
 Straight lines lengthened to add thr, and tr, dr ............................ 60, xii. 
 
 Straight lines, you and we prefixed to ....................................... 60, xi. 
 
 St.= Saint adapted in position .......................................... Ill, n. 18. 
 
 Stmly of the Classics and Reporting compared ......................... 149, n. 11. 
 
 Subjects of verbs ........................................................ 120, n. 3. 
 
 Substantially as described .............................................. 174. n. 4. 
 
 Such another. .. . ,,l!o, u,7. 
 
INDEX OF THE NOTES. 213 
 
 Such are 159, n. 26. 
 
 Such will 159, n. 26. 
 
 Surely H7, n. 5. 
 
 Suspension 153, n. 16. 
 
 T. 
 
 Tacitus, quotation from 104, n. 11. 
 
 Take it 108, n. 11. 
 
 Taking it for granted 77, n. 11. 
 
 Taxing their 158, n. 5. 
 
 Teach all nations 1 10, n. 10. 
 
 Teach others 112, n. 4. 
 
 Terrible 166, n. 10. 
 
 Testimony, notes of, to be freely vocalized 168, n. 11. 
 
 Text after text, etc 113, n . g. 
 
 Texts, quoted passages, when not quoted in full 114, u. 1. 
 
 Than added by an En-hook to comparatives 61, xviii.; 70, n. 13. 
 
 Thau had the 158, n. 8; 162, n, 12. 
 
 Than omitted as au impediment 82, n. 7. 
 
 Tiiat as a conjunction joined 91, a. 7. 
 
 That distinguished from with it (Thet) 133, n. 4. 
 
 That have been reeled 174, n. 17. 
 
 That it is accorded 164, n. 6. 
 
 That joined to Ens-circle 95, n. 12. 
 
 That nothing 143, n. 5. 
 
 That slavery 156, n. 10. 
 
 That these methods 174, n. 16. 
 
 The actual damages 178, n. 10. 
 
 The added by Petoid 123, n. 10. 
 
 Tlte added occasionally by Petoid 123, n. 11. 
 
 TAe-dot , n. 24. 
 
 The emphasized 78, n. 12. 
 
 The Father has said it 120, n. 3. 
 
 The framers of the Constitution 152, n. 11. 
 
 The circle, the turning of 94, n. 8. 
 
 The. omitted 179 - n > 16 - 
 
 The sometimes omitted 74, n. 2; 75, n. 7. 
 
 written separately 72, n. 24. 
 
 There are none 161 > n - 2 - 
 
 Therefore added 89 > n - 8 - 
 
 There have 123, n. 7. 
 
 There is no 168 - n - u - 
 
 Then thr 103, n. 6. 
 
 Therefore added by lengthening and an Ef-hook 89, n. 8. 
 
 Therefore it is 12 8, n. 15. 
 
 Therefore it is a clear case that 117 > n - )0 - 
 
 These great results 12 *> n - 15 - 
 
 These (i)deas 122 - n - 5 - 
 
 They cannot Ill, n. 1. 
 
 They were added by lengthening 158, n. !5. 
 
 Third position distinguished from Fourth in case of horizontals 69, n. 1. 
 
214 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Third position for half-lengths 122, 11. 1. 
 
 This grand design 130, n. 20. 
 
 This grand idea 130, u. 21. 
 
 This great work 129, u. 7. 
 
 This immense fabric 94, n. 8. 
 
 This language Ill, n. 1C. 
 
 Th is proposition ways of writing 105, n. 17. 
 
 TAr-tick...60, xiii.; 77, n. 7 ; 103, n. 7 ; 106, u. 19 ; 128, u. 18 ; 129, n. 3; 161, n. 5. 
 Thr added to present tense of verbs ending in large initial-hooks, as Mel, 
 
 Nel, Rel, etc 174, n. 5. 
 
 Thr added by lengthening 86, n. I. 
 
 Tkr= other added by lengthening 87, u. 4. 
 
 Thr, and tr or dr added by lengthening. .60, xii.; 78, n. 18 ; 124, n. 17 ; 137, n. 16; 
 
 178, u. 9. 
 
 7%r= their, etc., added by d/ir-tick 60, xiii. 
 
 TAr-tick written upwards 144, u. 14. 
 
 Thr added by lengthening straight lines 78, n. 18. 
 
 Through which 129, n. 10. 
 
 Ticks with hooks 90, u. 4. 
 
 Ticks and dashes have hooks joined 125, n. 21. 
 
 To a higher 125, u. 1. 
 
 To all people 12G, n. 6. 
 
 To all portions, but it, etc 128, n. 17. 
 
 To applying the yard-stick 147, n. 3. 
 
 To be. Bee 3 , how origh, ted 90, n. 3. 
 
 To be added to Em 186, n. 2. 
 
 To be operated upon 177, n. 7. 
 
 To be taken into consideration 179, n. 17. 
 
 To (have) been 90, n. 3. 
 
 To have to supplied and have added 129, n. 11. 
 
 To have been added to Em 82, n. 11. 
 
 To himself 69, n. 1. 
 
 To implied belore the circle 73, n. 31. 
 
 To implied before a circle 70, n. 14. 
 
 To implied before Web-hook 90, n. 1. 
 
 To implied in two ways 59, v., 1 and 2. 
 
 To implied with and prefixed 85. n. 4. 
 
 To it, therefore 124, u. 17. 
 
 To look upon him 117, n. 2. 
 
 To omitted 72, n. 27; 91, n. 9. 
 
 To our 74, n. 36. 
 
 To our knowledge 9G, n. 5. 
 
 To save the world 130, n. 15. 
 
 To serve with circle in fourth position 121, n. 9. 
 
 To the 71, n. 15. 
 
 To the calculation 98, n. 4. 
 
 To the committee 171, n. 3. 
 
 To Ike by Petoid* ; Chetoid', to how 89, n. 9. 
 
 To the by the fourth position 71, n. 17. 
 
 To the hearty co-operation 121, n. 5. 
 
 To the original States 157, n. 13. 
 
 To the time 98, n. 7. 
 
INDEX OF THE NOTES. 215 
 
 To uphold slavery 158, n. 4. 
 
 To witucss their 161, n. 5. 
 
 Too much 89, n. 3 and 4. 
 
 T omitted 140, n. 24 ; 141, n, 3. 
 
 Tr and dr added by the advanced writer to straight lines by lengthening. .CO, xii. 
 
 Transcribing law reports 167, u. 2, b, c, d, e. 
 
 Transfer-red, etc 103, n. 7. 
 
 Transform the 144, u. 13. 
 
 Turning loose their 128, n. 18. 
 
 Twenty years 155, u. 3. 
 
 Two or three millions of dollars , 140, n. 2. 
 
 Two thousand dollars 141, n. 5. 
 
 Two, writing of .' 79, u. 3 ; 172, n. 11; 183, n. 4. 
 
 Ty, ~ity, -y, in contractions 75, n. 11 ; 135, n. 6 ; 1352, n. ; 158, n. G ; 
 
 161, n. 4 165, n. 2 ; 180, n. 1. 
 
 U. 
 
 Unconnected with 184, n. 2. 
 
 Uncon- joined 142, u. 1. 
 
 Unconscious 142, n. 11. 
 
 Under the Constitution of the United States 140, n. 24. 
 
 Under which it is made to appear 92, n. 13. 
 
 Uniformity of contraction 144, n. 13. 
 
 UNIFORMITY illustrated 103, n. 7 ; 134, n. 4 ; 135, n. 6; 144, u. 13. 
 
 Up and down the 131, n. 24. 
 
 Upon any certain 179, n. 13. 
 
 Upon one thing 1 40, n. 26. 
 
 Upon other means 130, n. 16. 
 
 Upon the coast of Africa 141, n. 3. 
 
 Upon the other 166, n. 8. 
 
 Upon the same 123, u. 10. 
 
 Upon the same common platform 134, n. 4. 
 
 Upon us 138, n. 12. 
 
 Upon what 105, n. 13. 
 
 Upon you 135, n. 7. 
 
 Useful 70, n. 6. 
 
 Use this 130, n. 17. 
 
 Us joined by enlarging the circle 72, u. 25. 
 
 Us, principle of joining in Standard Phonography 72, n. 25 ; 138, n. 12. 
 
 Uses distinguished, , , , 76, n. 12. 
 
 V. 
 
 Varnhagen von Ense 185, n. 6. 
 
 Vee-hook to add have 129, n. 11. 
 
 Verb for the actor 81, u. 2. 
 
 Verses and chapters, how indicated 108, n. 10. 
 
 Vocalization in the Reporting Style 164, n. 6 ; 179, n. 12 ; 187, n. 8. 
 
 Vowels generally omitted in the Ueporting Style 58, i. 
 
21G SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Varying letter-shapes for easier junction 102, n. 9. 
 
 Vaster than 95, u. 1 1. 
 
 W. 
 
 Washington, contraction for 142, 11. 14. 
 
 Was slavery 154, n. 20. 
 
 "Was that 103, n. 21. 
 
 Was transferred 103, n. 7. 
 
 Way, brief, enlarged CO, x.; 87, n. 5; 108, n. 1 ; Exhibit of, 191. 
 
 We can send 86, n. 8. 
 
 We could not get 127, n. 11. 
 
 We frequently prefixed by a hook to straight lines even GO, xi. ; 86, u. 8. 
 
 W T e may be 94, n. 7. 
 
 We look around 131 , n. 27. 
 
 We must dismiss 143, n. 1. 
 
 We prefixed by a Way-hook CO, xi. ; 75, n. 5. 
 
 We may be (Wemb) 94, n. 7. 
 
 Were expressed by an Ar-hook or by enlarging a small El-hook Cl, xv. 
 
 Were and are added by an Ar-hook, how distinguished 70, n. 11. 
 
 Were, added by an Ar-hook, shown to be new 70, n. 11. 
 
 Were, our, or are added by hook 61, xv. 
 
 Western Roman Empire 102, n. 7; 112, n. 3. 
 
 Western world .. , 138, n. 9. 
 
 West street 168, n. 7. 
 
 We were and we would 131, n. 26. 
 
 What added 105, u. 13; 127, n. 12; 141, n. 8; 154, n. 1. 
 
 What added by shortening. .01, xvi. ; 105, n. 11 ; 118, n. 9 ; 140, u. 28 ; 146, n. 27. 
 
 What added to witli 73, n. 32. 
 
 What I am going to say 107, n. 9. 
 
 What is your occupation 167, n. 3. 
 
 What other means 129, n. 3. 
 
 What would you think 10G, n. 1. 
 
 Whatever may be 107, n. C. 
 
 Whatever (Tef) joined to but 138, n. 15. 
 
 Wheu making and adopting the 160, n. SO. 
 
 When we bring it out 129, n. 9. 
 
 When you are helping the 132, u. 3. 
 
 Where there are, Werdher:Ray 79, n. 1. 
 
 Whether or not 173, n. 13. 
 
 Which have been made 96, n. 4. 
 
 Which have been meiitioued 187, n. 1. 
 
 WLich have been reeled 174, n. 5. 
 
 Which he has sustained 178, n. 11. 
 
 Which he would otherwise 179, n. 15. 
 
 Which our fathers 158, n. 13. 
 
 Which they 102, n. 9. 
 
 Which were 1 59, n. 24. 
 
 Which were so 70, n. II. 
 
 While, Old form for, criticized 92, n. 5. 
 
 White race 137, n. 7. 
 
 Whole volume 162, n. 15. 
 
INDEX OF THE NOTES. 217 
 
 Whose, who-m ......................................................... 124, n. 16. 
 
 Who understands you .................................................. 113, n. 9. 
 
 Why, Old form criticized ................................................. 92, n. 5. 
 
 Widening of Em ....................................................... 13G, n. 14. 
 
 Wickedness ............................................................ 142, n. 12. 
 
 Wickedness of his relation .............................................. 143., u. 3. 
 
 Will or all added by hook or enlarging Ar-hook .......................... GO, xiv. 
 
 Will or oil by El-hook, or added by enlarging Ar-hook .................... 81, u. 9. 
 
 Will think you a coward ................................................ 118, n. 5. 
 
 Within itself ............................................................ 123, n. 9. 
 
 With it (Duct*) and that (Dhef) .......................................... 133, n. 4. 
 
 With, omitted .................................. 96, u. G ; 97, n. 11 ; 184, n. 2 and 3. 
 
 With rights ............................................................. 161, n. 7. 
 
 With slavery ............................................................ 158, n. 9. 
 
 With what .............................................................. 73, n. 32. 
 
 With their .............................................................. 91, n. 10. 
 
 With you ................................................................ 114, n. 2. 
 
 Words, gradual agglutination of ........................................ 119, u. 13. 
 
 Words omitted as impediments .......................................... 82, n. 7. 
 
 Word Positions in the Dictionary ............................................. G5. 
 
 Words repeated ........................................................ 119, n. U. 
 
 Word-signs, value of .................................................... 70, n. 12. 
 
 Word-signs, appropriate ones needed .................................... 92, u. 14. 
 
 Word-signs, occasionally need vocalizing ........... 82, n. G ; 115, n. 16 ; 187, n. 8. 
 
 Word-signs with derivatives ............................................. 86, n. 5. 
 
 Words used as words should bo underscored .............................. 98, u. 9. 
 
 Word-signs and contractions of tho Eeporting Stylo to bo learned thor- 
 
 oughly .................................................................. 49. 
 
 Word-signs used as prefix-signs ......................................... 151, u. 6. 
 
 Word-signs and contractions may sometimes be vocalized ................. 
 
 ..................................... 82, n. 6; 91, n. 8; 108, n. 11 ; 111, n. G. 
 
 Words omitted ........................................ 82, n. 7 ; 88, n. 2 ; 90, n. G ; 
 
 9G, n. G ; 97, n. 11 ; 106, u. 20 ; 118, n. 9 ; 138, n. 15 ; 167, n. 3 ; 174, n. 2 ; 
 
 177, n. 1 ; 178, n. 9 ; 179, n. 16 and 17 ; 180, n. 4 ; 183, n. 4 ; 184, n. 2 and 3. 
 Worshippers ............................................................ 158, n. 3. 
 
 Worst possible .................. . ........................ , ............. 152, n. 14. 
 
 Would added by shortening ........................... , .... ........ . ...... 61, xvi. 
 
 Would added by Wuh-hook ....................... 118, n. 9 ; 127, n. 4 ; 187, u. 6. 
 
 Would added to we, etc .......................... , , , . ..................... 87, u. 5. 
 
 Would cause him to bo regarded ........................................ 82, n. 11. 
 
 Would not consent ...................... , ,, ............................ 158, n. 14. 
 
 Would joined to Ketoid .................................................. 118, n. 9. 
 
 Would seem ....................... , ..................................... 76, n. 13. 
 
 Would seem to embrace the. , , , , ........................................ 1G2, n. 9. 
 
 Would turn it .................. .. ...................................... 145, n. 19. 
 
 Writing exercises from dictation .......................... 50, par. 2 and last par. 
 
 Writing, size of must not bo too largo ................................ 49, last par. 
 
 Wuh-hook, final, rule of stated .......................................... 118, n. 9. 
 
 Wuh-hook made into a circle ............................................ 154, u. 1. 
 
 Yay, brief, enlarged .... ........... ................ .......... 60, x.: 10G, u. 1 ; 191. 
 
218 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC HEADER. 
 
 Yearly 90, n. 7. 
 
 Yes, sir 107, 11. 0. 
 
 Yet after all 129, n. 5. 
 
 Yet to be brought to light 82, n. 9. 
 
 You admit that 1C3, n. 3. 
 
 Yon agree with me 107, n. 5. 
 
 You expressed in phrase-writing by Yeh sometimes 59, iv., 4. 
 
 You sometimes written by a Yuh-hook GO, xi.; 105, n. 16 ; 163, n. 3 ; 183, n. 2. 
 
 Yon say that is 105. n. 16. 
 
 You want 1 0'.i, u . J . 
 
 You were and you would 131, 11. 20. 
 
 You would not 147, 11. C. 
 
 Z. 
 
 Zeedheri, 2, 119. n. 10. 
 
 Zero position 133, 11. 4. 
 
 &. 
 
 &c,,. 132, n. 12. 
 
INDEX OF THE EXERCISES AND KEY. 219 
 
 IXDEX OF THE EXERCISES AND KEY 
 
 OF THE 
 
 SECOND STANDAKD-PHONOGKAPHIC READER. 
 
 NOTE. Par=paragraph ; t=top ; m=middle; b=bottom; tm=bet\veen top 
 iinil middle ; mb=betweeu middle and bottom. Figures over 48 refer to pages of 
 the Key ; under 49, to pages of the Engraved Exercises. 
 
 Abolitionists, who are they 31 tin , 144. 
 
 Abolition of Slavery, why not expressly provided for by the Framers of 
 
 the Constitution 33 mb ; 154. 
 
 Age of the Human Race 13-15 ; 05-99. 
 
 "All men created equal,' 1 etc. what did it mean? 36 t ; 161. 
 
 American Bible Society 23-28 ; 121-135. 
 
 Anatomy, Comparative, uso of in restoring history of primeval 
 
 earth 5 b ; 79-80. 
 
 Ancient and Modern Philosophy compared 3-4 ; 69-74. 
 
 Ancient Philosophers, business of 3m ; 72 t. 
 
 A New Education needed 31 tin ; 143. 
 
 Ansted, Prof. quotation from 5 ; 78-80. 
 
 Aristotle's View of Creation 12 t ; 90. 
 
 B. 
 
 Baconian Philosophy, its object and effect 3 b ; 69-70. 
 
 Bacon, Lord, what he proposed 3 b ; 69-70. 
 
 Baltimore Democratic Convention of 1860 Mr. Gaulden's speech in. .28 ; 136-142. 
 
 Bible, different copies of 13 t ; 93 t. 
 
 Blacks, were they citizens under the Constitution 37 tm ; 1C3-4. 
 
 Blood, the circulation of, proved by Harvey 6-7 ; 80-83. 
 
 "Buck's Theological Dictionary " quoted 11-13 ; 91-95. 
 
 C. 
 
 Cahill, Rev. Dr. abstract of a lecture by 17; 102. 
 
 Catholic Church claimed to be infallible 17 ; 102. 
 
 Change wrought by Death 10 m ; 87 m. 
 
 Charge to the Jury 39 ; 167-179. 
 
 Chief Justice Tauey's discovery 36; 160 ; 37 ; 164. 
 
220 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Chronology 13 tm ; 93 m. 
 
 Church of Rome, its Infallibility discussed 15-17 ; 99-104. 
 
 Church of Rome, what it claims 15 b ; 100 tin. 
 
 Circulation of the blood, evidences of G-7 ; 80-83. 
 
 Compensation to the slaveholder 31 in ; 144 b. 
 
 Conflict between Ideas 24 ; 121 b. 
 
 Creation 11-13 ; 89-95. 
 
 Creation, different dates for assigned 13 ; 93. 
 
 Creation, Rev. Dr. Pye Smith's theory of 8 ; 83-4. 
 
 Creative Power of the Deity 13 t ; 94 in. 
 
 D. 
 
 Declaration of Independence, importance of 35 m ; 159. 
 
 Discoverers, their usual treatment 7 m ; K2 m. 
 
 Disowning the lawfulness of Slavery, results of 37 nib ; 104 b. 
 
 Dissolution of the Union 31 nib ; 145. 
 
 fi. 
 
 Edinburgh Review, extract from 3-4 ; 69-74. 
 
 Effects of the Baconian Philosophy 3 b ; 73 l>74. 
 
 Evidence offered by traces of animal life in the strata of the earth C t ; 79 tm. 
 
 Evidences of the Circulation of the Blood G-7; 80-83. 
 
 Extinct animals, traces of, in the earth's strata G t ; 79 t. 
 
 F. 
 
 Framors of the Constitution wcro they guilty of hypocrisy? 34 b ; 157 mb. 
 
 Franklin, Benjamin, petitioned for the Abolition of Slavery 36 mb ; 1G3 t. 
 
 Fugitive-servant clause of the Constitution does it refer to Slaves 34 m ; 157. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gaulden, of Georgia, speech of, in the Baltimore Democratic Convention. .28 ; 13G. 
 
 Geology 5; 78-80. 
 
 Gerrit Smith, speech, of, claiming that there can be no law for Slavery. . .30 ; 142. 
 Greek Quotation 21 1 ; 114. 
 
 H. 
 
 Hamilton, Alexander his remark about the sacred rights of mankind. .30 m; 102. 
 
 Handsome set of little children 29 mb ; 139. 
 
 Harvey, discoverer of the Circulation of the Blood 7 ; 81. 
 
 Heliopolis (Egypt), investigations at 14 m ; 9G b. 
 
 History, primeval, restored 5 b ; 78 m. 
 
 Horner, Mr. Leonard his researches in the Nile valley 14 tm ; 90 m. 
 
 Human Race, age of 13-15; 95-104. 
 
 Humboldt, Alexander von 43-48; 1SO-189. 
 
INDEX OF THE EXERCISES AND KEY. 221 
 
 I. 
 
 Ideas, conflict between 24 t ; 121 b. 
 
 Infallibility, no foundation for, iu lleasou or Scripture 16 nib ; 101 b. 
 
 Infallibility of the Catholic Church, what it means 17 m ; 104-105. 
 
 Infallibility of the Church against the 15 ; 99. 
 
 " for 17; 104. 
 
 Intellect, brilliant triumph of 6 ; 78 b. 
 
 Intolerance, are its bars broken down? 25 b ; 128 tin. 
 
 J. 
 
 Jay, John, Chief Justice of the United States what he said of Slavery. 
 
 3G mb; 163m. 
 
 K. 
 
 Key to the Reporting Exercises 69-180. 
 
 Laws of Nature, stability of 17mb; 105 m. 
 
 Law-Ueporting 39 ; 1G7. 
 
 Liberty, Genius of, can it shriek? 28 b ; 137. 
 
 Lieber, Prof. Francis, au Address by 43-48 ; 180-189. 
 
 Logic 4; 75-78. 
 
 M. 
 
 Man. Greatness and Glory of 31 Ira ; 144. 
 
 Mann, Hon. Horace what he said about Religion and Science 8 ; 83-86. 
 
 Memphis (Egypt), chronological investigations at 14 mb ; 97 t. 
 
 N. 
 
 New States Did the Constitution give them the right to have Slavery ? 
 
 34 tm ; 156m, 
 
 No Law for Slavery 30; 142, 
 
 Non-intervention, a Slave-breeder's idea of 29 mb ; 139 b, 
 
 O. 
 
 Orthodox View of the World's Salvation 24 tm; 123, 
 
 Our Friends in Heaven 9-11; 86-89, 
 
 P.] 
 
 Patience of Harvey in philosophical investigation 7 tm ; 82 t. 
 
 Philosophers, ancient, business of 3 m ; 70. 
 
 Philosophy of Health, extract from 6-7 ; 80-83. 
 
 Philosophy, Seneca's view of , 3 tm ; 72. 
 
222 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Platonic Philosophy, aim of 3 mb ; 73 b. 
 
 Politics 28-;<8 ; 130 142. 
 
 Posidonius and Seneca 3 tm ; 71-72. 
 
 Priests call they make a mistake ill Faith ? 20 t ; 111-112. 
 
 Pro-Slavery interpretations of the Constitution by Anti-Slavery men. .33 t ; 158 t. 
 
 B. 
 
 Ramoses II., Statue of, when erected 14 mb ; 97 t. 
 
 R -asouing Process, sameness of, in all cases 4 b : 75-78. 
 
 Religion and Science 8-10; 83-80. 
 
 Rights of Mankind, where written 30 mb ; 1C2 m. 
 
 Sassnett, Dr. William J., an Address by 23-28: 120-130. 
 
 Science not Sectarian 8 b ; 85 t. 
 
 " the Interpreter of Nature 9 mb ; 80. 
 
 Secession, Gerrit Smith's view of 31 mb ; 145 b. 
 
 Seneca's view of Philosophy 3m ; 72. 
 
 Slaveholders, character of 30 mb ; 142-143. 
 
 Slavery, a practical way to protect 29 in ; 138 b. 
 
 " how long was it to continue 33mb; 134. 
 
 " no law for 30 ; 142. 
 
 " remedy for 38 m ; 100. 
 
 " the institution of, claimed to bo the chief eource of the pros- 
 perity and intelligence of the White Race 29 t ; 137 b. 
 
 Smith, Rev. Dr. Pye his theory concerning the Garden of Eden 8 t ; 84 t. 
 
 Stowo. Mrs. Harriet Beecher, quoted 9-11 ; 85-89. 
 
 Supreme Being alone infallible 10 nib ; 102 t. 
 
 Supreme Court, what it says respecting laws against rights and funda- 
 mental principles , 32 b ; 150 nib. 
 
 T. 
 
 The Bible claimed to bo the grand instrumentality for saving the 
 
 world 20 tm; 128 b. 
 
 The Bible recognized as coming from God, notwithstanding different 
 
 constructions 27 mb : 133 mb. 
 
 Tho Christian Religion said to be the source of all that is truly good in 
 
 Human Nature 27 t ; 132 m. 
 
 The Constitution is it a bargain between the Whites and Blacks? 32 m ; 148. 
 
 The Constitution is it a bargain between the Whites of the North and 
 
 the Whites of the South ? 32 m ; 140. 
 
 The Constitution is it a law for Slavery ? 31 b ; 140 b ; 32 t ; 147. 
 
 " Pro-slavery interpretations of by Anti-slavery men. .35 t ; 158. 
 
 " was it intended to favor Slavery ? 32 b ; 150. 
 
 " " " by the Trainers or by the People to 
 
 favor Slavery ? 33 t ; 151. 
 
 Theological preconceptions, tenacity of 8m; 84 m. 
 
INDEX OF THE EXERCISES AND KEY. 223 
 
 Tho way to govern men 2Gb ; 131 b. 
 
 Traces of Animal Lifo in.tho strata of the earth evidence offered there- 
 by G; 79, b. 
 
 IT. 
 
 Union, dissolution of 31 mb ; 145. 
 
 L W. 
 
 Washington 3G m ; 1G2 m. 
 
 Whateley's " Elements of Logic," extract from 4 ; 75-78. 
 
 World's Salvation, Orthodox and Rational views of tlie 24 tm ; 123. 
 
 AVrit of Habeas Corpus, effect of ou Slavery 33 m ; 153 t. 
 
STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC 
 AND OTHER WORKS. 
 
 ANDREW J. GRAHAM, 
 
 AUTHOR AND PUBLISHER. 
 
 744. BROADWAY, NEW YORK. 
 
 PHONOGRAPHY is a shorthand system of writing according to sound or pronun- 
 ciation, rejecting silent, letters ami ambiguous signs. The original system (Steno- 
 graphic Souiul-IIiiiul, 1837) was an improvement by Isaac Pitman, of England, on 
 the system of Harding (1823, 1828), which was an improvement on the system of 
 Samuel Taylor (1766). 
 
 ' EDITIONS " OF THE OLD PHONOGRAPHY. The Old Phonography was va- 
 riously modified. The different modifications, or systems, called "editions," were 
 published First edition, in 1837 ; Second edition, Jan., 1840 ; Third edition, Dec., 
 Isl!) ; Fourth edition, 1841 ; Fifth edition, 1812 ; Sixth edition, 1844 ; Seventh 
 edition, 1815; Kigh'th edition, 1817 ; Ninth edition, 1853. This last and best edi- 
 tion was made the basis of Standard Phonography. See ODDS AND ESDS for an ac- 
 cuunt of the characteristics of these " editions." 
 
 " Standard Phonography is now acknowledged by the most accomplished phonog- 
 raphers to be the best system of shorthand writing that has ever been offered to the 
 world. lu the Adaptation of its Characters to the sounds of our language, in its 
 Legibility, in its Powers of Contraction, in the Rapidity with which it can be writ- 
 ten, in the Logical and Convenient A rrangement and Presentation of its Principles, 
 and in its Ease of Acquisition, it immeasurably surpasses every other system of short- 
 hand. PROF. JOHN B. HOLMES, A. St., LL. B. 
 
 " The only system worth the attempt to learn." CIIAS. A. SUMNEB. the leading 
 reporter of San Francisco. 
 
 " Standard Phonography is (he most philosophical, rapid, and beautiful system 
 of shorthand writing ever invented. The system of Phonography as now used, is 
 
11 
 
 the result of the labor and study of ANDREW J. GRAHAM, by whom Pitman's system was 
 used as a basis, while he has made very many alterations, and added many new 
 features [new principles, rules, combinations, devices, contractions, and word- 
 signs], making it at once the most unique and useful system of writing that can be 
 imagined." Haver/lilt Gazette. 
 
 IMITATIONS. See comparisons of them with Standard Phonography In Nos. 
 27 and 72 of the STCDEXT'S JOURNAL, where the demonstration is complete that the 
 imitations require about one tllird more labor and space than Standard Pln;i;o^i a- 
 phy; and are inferior iu every other respect. See VISITOR Vol. II., for an overwhelm- 
 ing body of testimonials from the best reporters of the country, against the inferi- 
 or imitations and in favor of Standard Phonography. See Chas. A. Sumner's Lec- 
 ture on Shorthand and Reporting. 
 
 THE STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC SERIES. 
 
 " A more complete series of works on any subject than Mr. Graham's Standard- 
 Phunographic Series has never been published. These Text-Books are the only ones 
 that are perfect in themselves ; and, in no respect, could I suggest an improve- 
 ment in the manner of bringing the subject before even the dullest student; and 
 the introduction of them into all institutions of learning, where Phonography is 
 taught, is the highest compliment that can be paid to their merit." CHARLES FLOW- 
 ERS, a superior reporter. 
 
 The Outline. In Miniature Book-form, bound in paper, 5 cents. One Doz- 
 en, 36 cents. 
 
 The Little Teacher. Comprises : 1. THE OUTLINE, presenting all the 
 chief elements of Standard Phonography in eight primer-size pages ; 2. THE LITTLE 
 READING EXERCISES furnishing in 16 little pages an exercise on each section of the 
 Outline. 3. Miniature edition of THE CORRESPONDENT'S LIST of Word-Signs, Con- 
 tractions, Phrase-Signs, Prefixes, and Affixes of the Corresponding Style. AST The 
 Little Teacher is a useful pocket companion for students of the Synopsis or Hand- 
 Book. Price, 40 cents. 
 
 The Synopsis. New and Improved edition. Comprises: 1. The Synopsis (in 
 16 duodecimo pages) of all the Principles of the Corresponding Style, unmistakably 
 presented, with numerous engraved illustrations. 2. The Reading Exercises in 
 which there is an extended illustration and application of each section of the text ; 
 followed by several pages of connected reading matter, with an interlined transla- 
 tion. 3. " The Correspondent's List" 12mo edition comprising an alphabetical 
 list of Corresponding Word-Signs, Contractions, Phrase-Signs, Prefixes, and Affix- 
 es. This edition is well adapted to the use of either Classes or Private Students, 
 50 cents. K&~ This is a highly useful book for students of the Hand-Book ; in mak- 
 ing frequent reviews of the elements. 
 
 The Hand-Book. Presents every principle of every style of the Art com- 
 mencing with ttie analysis of words, and proceeding to the most rapid Reporting 
 Style in such a Form and Manner, with such Fullness of Explanation and Com- 
 1 lateness of Illustration, and with such other features as to fully adapt the work to 
 the use of Schools and to Self-Instruction. The analysis and classification of the 
 of the sounds of the voice (given in the Appendix to Part II.), will furnish invalua- 
 ble assistance to those wishing to pet the correct pronunciation of any foreign lan- 
 guage. 366 duodecimo pages. Price, bound in muslin, with embossed side-title. 
 $:2.00; post-paid, $2.10. 
 
 " FULL, CONCISE and PHILOSOPHICAL in its development of the theory of writing 
 by sound, ADMIRABLE in its arrangement, and REPLETE with IMPROVEMENTS and re- 
 
Ill 
 
 finements on the Art as previously defined, it affords the learner a safe means of 
 obtaining a speed in reporting at least one-fourth greater than can be acquired by any 
 other method.'' Xew York Herald. 
 
 First Header. New and Revised Edition : Stercographed in the Corres- 
 ponding Style ; with interpaged lley ; with Questions ; and with Notes. $1.75; 
 postpaid, $1.81. Key separate, with Questions and Notes ; 60c.; postpaid, 54c. 
 
 Second Reader. New and Revised Edition : Stereographed in the Reporting 
 Style, with Key and Notes. To be studied in connection with the Reporting- 
 Style chapter of the Hand-Book. $1.75 ; postpaid, 51.81. 
 
 Standard.-Plionograph.ic Dictionary. " The last great crowning 
 work of the Standard Series," gives the pronunciation and the best outlines 
 (Corresponding, Advanced Corresponding, and Reporting) of about 60,000 words, 
 and the forms for about 60,000 phrases. Beyond comparison with any shorthand 
 dictionary or vocabulary ever published. Invaluable to writers of either style. 
 Cloth, $5 ; genuine morocco, $7 ; (Octavo-form from the same plates, with wide 
 margins), cloth, $G ; leather, $8 ; morocco, $9. 
 
 Tlie Reporter's List. In preparation with engraved forms and ex- 
 planations in pocket-size pages. It will combine, in one list, all the Word-Signs 
 and Contractions and Phrase-Signs of the Corresponding-Style and Reporting- 
 Style Lists of the Hand-Book, with some additions from the Dictionary, arranged 
 in phonographic-alphabetic order. The pages appear as fast as ready in the STU- 
 DENT'S JOURNAL commencing with the 1878 volume. This will be an invaluable 
 Va.de Mecum (" go with me ") to all phonographic students. 
 
 Lady of tlic Lake. By Sir Walter Scott. With Frontispiece. Stereo- 
 graphed in the advanced corresponding style, with iuterpaged key ; and with 
 Notes. Total number of pages, 328. Price, $2 ; postpaid, $2.10. Morocco, $4 ; 
 postpaid, $4.10. 
 
 PERIODICAL VOLUMES : 
 
 Odds and Ends (or Phonographic Intelligencer). In common print. Has 
 a variety of matter of interest and value to phonograpliers. 75 cents. 
 
 Standard-Phonographic Visitor. 
 
 Volumes 1, 2, 3, and 4 Out of print. Vol. 5 (numbers 1 to 41, 1870), 8 pages 
 each number, mostly in the Reporting Style with Notes 15 cents a number (odd 
 numbers only). 
 
 THE STUDENT'S JOURNAL. 
 
 Round Volumes: Vol. 1 (1872) to Vol. 4, quarto, $1.50 each, bound ; ppd. 
 $1.68. Vol. 5 (1870), one-half in phonography, $2.50 ; ppd. $2.68 (out of print) ; 
 Vol. 6 (1877) to 14 (1885), bound, each, $2.50 ; ppd. $2.68. 
 
 Vol.XVI. (1887) subscription, ?2 continues the Reporter's List (several pages 
 each number), unvocalized corresponding-style exercises (with key and questions 
 for self-instruction) ; reporting-stylo exercises (with key and notes) ; with much 
 valuable matter in common print so hyphenized as to show proper phrase-writ- 
 ing (part in the corresponding-style and part in the reporting-style). See speci- 
 mens of JOURNAL engraving, "contents "-lists of several numbers, and various 
 subscription " Offers " in Graham's New Circular, 16 quarto pages. 
 
 THE MINIATURE SERIES. 
 
 This series will consist of little volumes, about 3 by 5 inches. Now ready The 
 Outline, the Little Reading Exercises, The Correspondent's List (embraced in The Little 
 Teacher). In preparation, The Reporter's List, and various little reading books, 
 and works of reference. 
 
IV. 
 
 PHONOGRAPHIC ENVELOPS. 
 
 10 cents a pack. Glance at Standard Phonography, presenting on the face of the 
 envelop (leaving room for stamp and address) all the leading features of the Art. 
 The Lords Prater in the Reporting Style. The I'konvgraphic Alphabet, large size. 
 And Christian Names. 
 
 PHONOGKAPHIC STATIONERY. 
 
 Triple-Line Paper tor phonographic writing. 20 cents a quire. 
 Reporting Cover, CO cents. Pencil Note-Books, 5 cents ; ppd, 8c. 
 Phonographic Steel Pens, 15 cents a dozen ; 1.52 per box of 12 doz. 
 
 PHONOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTS. 
 
 '* All About Phonography." No. 27 STUDENT'S JOURNAL answers 
 numerous questions of those who are or would become phonographers ; and 
 demonstrates by comparisons with other systems the great superiority of Stand- 
 ard Phonography. 2 cents. For distribution as circulars, 50 cents a hundred 
 ^Jl.10 postpaid). With space for writing or printing the phonographic Book- 
 seller's or Teacher's address. 
 
 Shorthand and Reporting. By CHARLES A. SUMNEE. Part engraved. 
 10 cents. 
 
 Popular Uses and Benefits of Standard Phonography. Lecture by 
 CHAULES A. SUMNEB. 15 cents. 
 
 BRIEF LONGHAND. 
 
 A system of contractions in common longhand writing, as icnb=it cannot be. 
 A new and improved edition, illustrating "Partial Phonography." that is, the 
 combination of frequent phonographic word-forms with the Brief Longhand 
 contractions. 60 cents. This work contains Directions for Correcting Printer's 
 Proofs, and the Keys to the exercises embrace remarks upon the means of acquir. 
 ing Ease and Correctness in Composition, the method of keeping a Commonplace 
 Book and Index lierum, the most useful modes of reading, etc. 
 
 ENGLISH GRAITOIAR. 
 
 Graham's Synopsis of English Grammar. A highly original 
 work, in which the leading principles of grammar are presented in charts c r 
 Glances, followed by brief, easy, and comprehensive statements, showing the re- 
 lations of the principles. 75 cents. 
 
 PRONOUNCING WORKS, ETC. 
 
 Easy Reading and Spelling Series. I. THE PHONETIC SPELLING 
 BOOK, 10 cents; postpaid, 12 cents (out). II. THE FIRST PHONETIC READING BOOK. 
 15 cents ; postpaid, 17c. (III. The Second Phonetic Reading Book is The First 
 Reader Key). 
 
 Phonetic Quarterly, Vol. 1. A general historical and critical review of 
 phonetic printing from Hart, 1C59, to the present time. Paper, 25 cents ; cloth, 
 40 cents. 
 
 Siimner's Notes of Travel in Northern Europe. CO illustra- 
 tions ; :',So pages. $2; postpaid, $2.10. 
 
 New Circular. It) quarto pages with beautiful title-page border, repre- 
 senting Graham's works ; with specimens of the phonographic departments of 
 the STUDF.NT'S JOUENAL ; with specimen " Lesson by Mail," in the reporting 
 style; with many, beautiful captions; with "Subscription Offers," etc., etc., 
 too numorous to mention here. 2 cents ; for distribution as circulars, 60 cents 
 per hundred (postpaid, $1.10). 
 
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 Form L9-05m,-9,'47(A5618)444 
 
 'WVERSITY of CALlFUiOHA 
 
 AT 
 
 LOS ANGELES 
 LIBRARY 
 
3 1158 01115 4498 
 
 B '] "J""oOO 570 373 
 
 ~ b. r - ' A>